US20120046696A1 - Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method - Google Patents
Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20120046696A1 US20120046696A1 US13/230,337 US201113230337A US2012046696A1 US 20120046696 A1 US20120046696 A1 US 20120046696A1 US 201113230337 A US201113230337 A US 201113230337A US 2012046696 A1 US2012046696 A1 US 2012046696A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- deflection
- rod
- cavity
- deflection rod
- rods
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 132
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 132
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 title abstract description 118
- 238000004321 preservation Methods 0.000 title abstract description 42
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title description 73
- 238000002513 implantation Methods 0.000 title description 69
- 239000007943 implant Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 82
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 claims description 107
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 32
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 claims description 17
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 39
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 39
- 235000020637 scallop Nutrition 0.000 description 33
- 239000004696 Poly ether ether ketone Substances 0.000 description 28
- 229920002530 polyetherether ketone Polymers 0.000 description 28
- 241000237503 Pectinidae Species 0.000 description 26
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 26
- 229910001000 nickel titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 24
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 21
- HLXZNVUGXRDIFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N nickel titanium Chemical compound [Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ti].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni].[Ni] HLXZNVUGXRDIFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 21
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 21
- 239000000560 biocompatible material Substances 0.000 description 18
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 18
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 15
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000004873 anchoring Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 9
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 8
- 241000237509 Patinopecten sp. Species 0.000 description 7
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- HZEWFHLRYVTOIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ti].[Ni] Chemical compound [Ti].[Ni] HZEWFHLRYVTOIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- -1 copper-zinc-aluminum Chemical compound 0.000 description 6
- 238000004026 adhesive bonding Methods 0.000 description 5
- 210000003484 anatomy Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 5
- 208000027418 Wounds and injury Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 230000003412 degenerative effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910001200 Ferrotitanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229920000249 biocompatible polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 210000003041 ligament Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000000452 restraining effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 208000008035 Back Pain Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000020307 Spinal disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229920004695 VICTREX™ PEEK Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000014674 injury Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000035479 physiological effects, processes and functions Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920001652 poly(etherketoneketone) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 206010039722 scoliosis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000004872 soft tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229920001169 thermoplastic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004416 thermosoftening plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008733 trauma Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000002193 Pain Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000486437 Panolis Species 0.000 description 1
- 229920008285 Poly(ether ketone) PEK Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005299 abrasion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000005786 degenerative changes Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007499 fusion processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000227 grinding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012886 linear function Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000399 orthopedic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007493 shaping process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7043—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae with a longitudinal element fixed to one or more transverse elements which connect multiple screws or hooks
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7004—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods with a cross-section which varies along its length
- A61B17/7005—Parts of the longitudinal elements, e.g. their ends, being specially adapted to fit in the screw or hook heads
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7019—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other
- A61B17/7023—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other with a pivot joint
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7019—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other
- A61B17/7026—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other with a part that is flexible due to its form
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7019—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other
- A61B17/7026—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other with a part that is flexible due to its form
- A61B17/7028—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other with a part that is flexible due to its form the flexible part being a coil spring
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7035—Screws or hooks, wherein a rod-clamping part and a bone-anchoring part can pivot relative to each other
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7035—Screws or hooks, wherein a rod-clamping part and a bone-anchoring part can pivot relative to each other
- A61B17/7037—Screws or hooks, wherein a rod-clamping part and a bone-anchoring part can pivot relative to each other wherein pivoting is blocked when the rod is clamped
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7035—Screws or hooks, wherein a rod-clamping part and a bone-anchoring part can pivot relative to each other
- A61B17/7038—Screws or hooks, wherein a rod-clamping part and a bone-anchoring part can pivot relative to each other to a different extent in different directions, e.g. within one plane only
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/60—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like for external osteosynthesis, e.g. distractors, contractors
- A61B17/66—Alignment, compression or distraction mechanisms
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7004—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods with a cross-section which varies along its length
- A61B17/7007—Parts of the longitudinal elements, e.g. their ends, being specially adapted to fit around the screw or hook heads
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7002—Longitudinal elements, e.g. rods
- A61B17/7019—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other
- A61B17/7031—Longitudinal elements having flexible parts, or parts connected together, such that after implantation the elements can move relative to each other made wholly or partly of flexible material
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7032—Screws or hooks with U-shaped head or back through which longitudinal rods pass
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7032—Screws or hooks with U-shaped head or back through which longitudinal rods pass
- A61B17/7034—Screws or hooks with U-shaped head or back through which longitudinal rods pass characterised by a lateral opening
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7001—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae
- A61B17/7041—Screws or hooks combined with longitudinal elements which do not contact vertebrae with single longitudinal rod offset laterally from single row of screws or hooks
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/56—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
- A61B17/58—Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
- A61B17/68—Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
- A61B17/70—Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
- A61B17/7049—Connectors, not bearing on the vertebrae, for linking longitudinal elements together
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/03—Automatic limiting or abutting means, e.g. for safety
- A61B2090/037—Automatic limiting or abutting means, e.g. for safety with a frangible part, e.g. by reduced diameter
Definitions
- FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 1A is a posterior view of the embodiment of FIG. 1 implanted in a spine.
- FIG. 2 is a top view of the embodiment of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 4 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 5 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an anchor system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 6 is another perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of FIG. 5 .
- FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the anchor system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 8 is a sectioned view of a portion of embodiment of the alternative anchor system of FIG. 7 of the invention.
- FIG. 9 is a side view of the anchor system of FIG. 7 depicting a degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 9A is an end view of the anchor system of FIG. 9 .
- FIG. 10 is a side view of the anchor system of FIG. 7 depicting another degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 11 is a side view of the anchor system of FIG. 7 depicting yet another degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 12 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention of FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 14 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention of FIG. 14 .
- FIG. 16 is another exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention of FIG. 14 .
- FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 18 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 19 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention with another horizontal rod system.
- FIG. 19A is a perspective view of another horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted in FIG. 19 and partially shown in phantom form.
- FIG. 19B is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment of FIG. 19 .
- FIG. 19C is a side view of the embodiment of FIG. 19 .
- FIG. 20 is a top view of another embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization of the system of the invention of FIG. 19 .
- FIG. 20A is a top side of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 19A .
- FIG. 21 is another perspective view of the embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization of the invention of FIG. 19 .
- FIG. 22 is a side view the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted in FIG. 19 configured in a closed position for implantation.
- FIG. 22A is an end view of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 22 .
- FIG. 23 is a side view partially in phantom form of the horizontal rod system of FIG. 22 .
- FIG. 24 is a side view of the embodiment of FIG. 22 in an open position as used when the embodiment is deployed in a spine.
- FIG. 25 is an end view of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 24 .
- FIG. 26 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 27 is a side view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 28 is a perspective view of still another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 29 is a side view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention of FIG. 28 .
- FIG. 30 is a top view of another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted in FIG. 1 with the horizontal rod system in an undeployed position ready for implantation.
- FIG. 31 is a top view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of FIG. 30 in a deployed position after implantation.
- FIG. 32 is a side view, partially in phantom of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 30 .
- FIG. 33 is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 33A is a side view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 34 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 34A is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 34B is a side view of the embodiment of FIG. 34A .
- FIG. 34C is a top view of the embodiment of FIG. 34A .
- FIG. 35 is a side view of still another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 36 is a side view of yet another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 37 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 38 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 39 is a side view of yet another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 39A is still another embodiment of the horizontal rod system and the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 39B is yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system and the anchor system of the invention.
- FIG. 40 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 41 is a perspective view of still another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 42 is a side view of an embodiment of a two level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 43 is a side view of yet another embodiment of a two level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 43A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 44 is a side view of an embodiment of a fusion system of the invention.
- FIG. 45 is a side view of an embodiment of a two level fusion system of the invention.
- FIGS. 45A , 45 B are perspective and side views of still another fusion system of an embodiment of the invention that has a transition level.
- FIG. 46 is a flow chart of an embodiment of the method of the invention.
- FIG. 47 is yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 48 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 49 is a posterior view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 50A is a perspective view of an embodiment of the horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 50B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 51 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 52 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 53 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 54 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 55A is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 55B is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 56A is a front view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 56B is a front view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 57 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 58 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a lock tab of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 59 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 60 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 61 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 62A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a sliding tab of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 62B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a sliding tab of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 63 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 64 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod of the invention.
- FIG. 65 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 66 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 67 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod of the invention.
- FIG. 68 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 69 is a perspective and exploded view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 70 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 71 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 72A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 72B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 72C is a partial sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 73B is a front view of an embodiment of horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 73C is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 74 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention.
- FIG. 75 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention.
- FIG. 76 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention.
- FIG. 77A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention.
- FIG. 77B is a top view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention.
- FIG. 78 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention.
- FIG. 79A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 79B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 80 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 81 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 82 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 83 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a rotating link of a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 84 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 85 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention.
- FIG. 86A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a topping off dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 86B is a perspective view of another embodiment of a topping off dynamic stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 87A is a posterior view of an embodiment of a bi-level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 87B is a side view of an embodiment of a topping off dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIGS. 88A and 88B are plan views of embodiments of the deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 89 is a posterior view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 90 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 91 is a side view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIGS. 92A , 92 B and 92 C are posterior views of embodiments of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 93 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention.
- FIGS. 94A and 94B are perspective views of an embodiment of a vertical rod attached to a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 95 is a perspective and partially exploded view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 96 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a deflection rod within a shield and deflection guide of the invention.
- FIG. 96A is a section view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a deflection rod within a shield and deflection guide of the invention.
- FIG. 97 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 98A is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention.
- FIG. 98B is a graph of deflection to deflection force for an embodiment of a deflection rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 99 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIGS. 100A-100C are sectional views of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIGS. 101A and 101B are top views of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 102 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system and a horizontal rod of the invention.
- FIGS. 103A and 104 are top views of embodiments of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 105 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 106 side view of an embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention wherein the head of the anchor screw is transparent.
- FIG. 107 is a posterior view of an embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention attached to vertebrae.
- FIGS. 108A , 108 B are perspective views of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention.
- FIG. 109A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a horizontal rod mount, and a vertical rod connected to the deflection rod system of the invention.
- FIG. 109B is a sectional view though a longitudinal axis of the deflection rod system of FIG. 109A of the invention.
- FIG. 110 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the dynamic spine stabilization system of FIGS. 108A , 108 B of the invention.
- FIGS. 111A , 111 B are top and sectional views respectively of an embodiment of the deflection rod system of the dynamic spine stabilization system of FIGS. 108A , 108 B of the invention.
- Embodiments of the present invention include a system or implant and method that can dynamically stabilize the spine while providing for preservation of spinal motion.
- Alternative embodiments can be used for spine fusion.
- Embodiments of the invention include a construct with an anchoring system, a horizontal rod system that is associated with the anchoring system and a vertical rod system that is associated with the anchoring system and the horizontal rod system.
- the anchoring system includes a head or saddle that allows for appropriate, efficient and convenient placement of the anchoring system relative to the spine in order to reduce the force that is placed on the anchoring system.
- the anchor system has enhanced degrees of freedom which contribute to the ease of implantation of the anchor system. Accordingly, the anchor system is designed to isolate the head and the screw from the rest of the dynamic stabilization system and the forces that the rest of the dynamic stabilization system can place on the anchor system and the anchor system/bone interface. Thus, the anchor system can provide a secure purchase in the spine.
- the horizontal rod system is in part comprised of a super elastic material that allows for convenient positioning of the horizontal rod system relative to the anchor system and allows for isolation of the horizontal rod system from the anchor system so that less force is placed on the anchor system from the horizontal rod system and on the anchor system/bone interface. Accordingly, unlike prior devices the anchor system stays secure in the bone of the spine.
- An aspect and advantage of the invention is the ability to maximize the range of motion of the spine after embodiments of the dynamic stabilization, motion preservation implant of the invention are implanted in a patient. While traditional solutions to back pain include fusion, discectomy, and artificial implants that replace spine structure, embodiments of the present invention preserve the bone and ligament structure of the spine and preserve a wide range of motion of the spine, while stabilizing spines that were heretofore unstable due to degenerative and other spinal diseases.
- Still another aspect of the invention is the preservation of the natural motion of the spine and the maintenance of the quality of motion as well as the wide range of motion so that the spine motion is as close to that of the natural spine as possible.
- the present embodiments of the invention allow for the selection of a less stiff, yet dynamically stable implant for use in a non-fusion situation.
- a less stiff, yet dynamically stable implant relates directly to a positive patient outcome, including patient comfort and the quality of motion of the spine.
- load sharing is provided by the embodiment, and, in particular, the deflection rod or loading rod of the embodiment.
- the terms “deflection rod” and “loading rod” can be used interchangeably.
- this aspect of the invention is directed to restoring the normal motion of the spine.
- the embodiment provides stiffness and support where needed to support the loads exerted on the spine during normal spine motion, which loads, the soft tissues of the spine are no longer able to accommodate since these spine tissues are either degenerated or damaged.
- Load sharing is enhanced by the ability to select the appropriate stiffness of the deflection rod or loading rod in order to match the load sharing desired.
- the stiffness of the implant of the system can be selected among a number of loading rods. In other words, the stiffness is variable depending on the deflection rod or loading rod selected.
- the load sharing is between the spine and the embodiment of the invention.
- the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered. In another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a horizontal rod. In yet another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a horizontal rod that is connected between two anchors that are affixed to the same vertebra. In yet another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is about parallel to the horizontal rod in a resting position. In still a further, aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a mount on the horizontal rod and said deflection rod or loading rod is about parallel to the horizontal rod in a resting position.
- the horizontal rod attached directly to opposite anchors is stiff and rigid, and the cantilevered deflection rod or cantilevered loading rod shares the load with the spine resulting from the motions of the body of the patient.
- the load being absorbed or carried by the embodiment is being distributed along at least part of the length of the deflection rod or loading rod. In another aspect of the invention, the load being absorbed or carried by the embodiment is distributed along at least part of the length of the horizontal cantilevered deflection rod or horizontal cantilevered loading rod.
- the embodiments of the invention can be made smaller in order to fit in more spaces relative to the spine.
- the embodiments can fit in the L5-S1 space of the spine.
- An aspect of the invention is to preserve and not restrict motion between the pedicles of the spine through the use of appropriately selected horizontal and vertical rods of embodiments of the invention.
- An aspect of the invention is to provide for load bearing on horizontal elements such as horizontal rods instead of vertical elements or rods, and, in particular, vertical elements that are connected between bone anchoring systems.
- An aspect of the invention is the use of horizontal rods in the embodiments of the invention in order to isolate each level of the implantation system from the other so as not to put undue force and/or torque on anchoring systems of embodiment of the invention and associated bone, and so as to allow customization of the implantation system to the need of the patient. Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to provide for minimized loading on the bone/implantation system interface. Customization, in preferred embodiments, can be achieved by the selection of the horizontal rod with the desired stiffness and stiffness characteristics. Different materials and different implant configurations enable the selection of various stiffness characteristics.
- Another aspect of the invention is the ability to control stiffness for extension, flexion, lateral bending and axial rotation, and to control stiffness for each of these motions independently of the other motions.
- An aspect of the invention is to use the stiffness and load bearing characteristics of super elastic materials.
- Another aspect of the invention is to use super elastic materials to customize the implant to the motion preservation and the dynamic stabilization needs of a patient.
- An aspect of such embodiments of the invention is to provide for a force plateau where motion of the implantation system continues without placement of additional force of the bone anchor system, or, in other words, the bone/implantation system interface.
- an aspect of the invention is to use the horizontal bar to offset loading on the anchor system and on the implantation system in general.
- an aspect of the invention is to be able to selectively vary the stiffness and selectively vary the orientation and direction that the stiffness is felt by varying the structure of the implantation system of the invention, and, in particular, to vary the stiffness of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- Another aspect of embodiments of the invention is to prevent any off-axis implantation by allowing the implantation system to have enhanced degrees of freedom of placement of the implant.
- Embodiments of the invention provide for off-axis placement of bone anchor or pedicle screw systems.
- a further aspect of embodiments of the invention is to control stabilized motion from micro-motion to broad extension, flexion, axial rotation, and lateral bending motions of the spine.
- Yet another aspect of the embodiments of the invention is to be able to revise a dynamic stabilization implant should a fusion implant be indicated. This procedure can be accomplished by, for example, the removal of the horizontal rods of the implantation system and replacement of such rods with stiffer rods. Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to provide for a convenient path for a revision of the original implantation system, if needed.
- a further aspect of the invention due to the ease of implanting the anchoring system and the ease of affixing vertical rods to the horizontal rods of the invention, is the ability to accommodate the bone structure of the spine, even if adjacent vertebra are misaligned with respect to each other.
- a further aspect of the invention is that the implant is constructed around features of the spine such as the spinous processes and, thus, such features do not need to be removed and the implant does not get in the way of the normal motion of the spine features and the spine features do not get in the way of the operation of the implant.
- Another aspect of embodiments of the invention is the ability to stabilize two, three and/or more levels of the spine by the selection of appropriate embodiments and components of embodiments of the invention for implantation in a patient. Further embodiments of the invention allow for fused levels (in conjunction with, if desired, bone graphs) to be placed next to dynamically stabilized levels with the same implantation system. Such embodiments of the invention enable vertebral levels adjacent to fusion levels to be shielded by avoiding an abrupt change from a rigid fusion level to a dynamically stable, motion preserved, and more mobile level.
- another aspect of the embodiments of the invention is to provide a modular system that can be customized to the needs of the patient.
- Horizontal rods can be selectively chosen for the particular patient as well the particular levels of the vertebrae of the spine that are treated. Further, the positioning of the various selected horizontal rods can be selected to control stiffness and stability.
- embodiments of the invention can be constructed to provide for higher stiffness and fusion at one level while allowing for lower stiffness and dynamic stabilization at another adjacent level.
- Yet a further aspect of the invention is to provide for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation while preserving the bone and tissues of the spine in order to lessen trauma to the patient and to use the existing functional bone and tissue of the patient as optimally as possible in cooperation with embodiments of the invention.
- Another object of the invention is to implant the embodiments of the invention in order to unload force from the spinal facets and other posterior spinal structures and also the intervertebral disk.
- a further aspect of the invention is to implant the embodiment of the invention with a procedure that does not remove or alter bone or tear or sever tissue.
- the muscle and other tissue can be urged out of the way during the inventive implantation procedure.
- an aspect of the invention is to provide for a novel implantation procedure that is minimally invasive.
- a dynamic stabilization, motion preservation system 100 embodiment of the invention is depicted in FIG. 1 and includes an anchor system 102 , a horizontal rod system 104 , and a vertical rod system 106 .
- horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a human patient that is standing
- vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing ( FIG. 1A ).
- the anchor system 102 includes a bone screw 108 which is mounted to a head or saddle 110 .
- the bone screw 108 can be replaced by a bone hook as more fully described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.
- the head or saddle 110 to the bone screw 108 allows for multiple degrees of freedom in order that the bone screw 108 may be appropriately, conveniently, and easily placed in the bone of the spine and in order to assist in isolating the bone screw 108 from the remainder of the system 100 so that less force is placed on the anchor system 102 and on the bone screw/bone interface.
- Some prior art devices, which use such bone screws have, on occasion, had the bone screws loosen from the spine, and the present embodiment is designed to reduce the force on the bone screw and on the bone screw/bone interface.
- the anchor system 102 is comprised of titanium.
- other biocompatible materials such as stainless steal and/or PEEK can be used.
- the horizontal bar system 104 is preferably secured through the head 110 of the anchor system 102 with a locking set screw 112 .
- This embodiment includes a first horizontal rod 114 and a second horizontal rod 116 .
- the first horizontal rod 114 has first and second deflection rods or loading rods 118 and 120 secured thereto.
- the first horizontal rod can be comprised of titanium, stainless steel or PEEK or another biocompatible material, and the first and second deflection rods or loading rods can be comprised of a super elastic material.
- the super elastic material is comprised on Nitinol (NiTi).
- Nitinol or nickel-titanium NiTi
- other super elastic materials include copper-zinc-aluminum and copper-aluminum-nickel.
- the nickel-titanium is the preferred material.
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 and 120 are mounted in the center of the first horizontal rod 114 to a mount 122 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 and 120 are force fit into the mount 122 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods may be screwed, glued, or laser welded to the mount 122 and to bores placed in the mount 122 .
- the first horizontal rod 114 includes first and second ridges 124 , 126 located on either side of the mount 122 and extend at least partially along the length of the first horizontal rod 114 toward the respective ends of the horizontal rod 114 .
- These ridges 124 , 126 add rigidity to the mount 122 relative to the rest of the horizontal rod system 104 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 have a constant diameter extending outwardly toward the respective ends 128 , 130 of the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 can have a varying diameter as the rods 118 , 120 approach their respective ends 128 , 130 .
- the rods 118 and 120 can have a decreasing diameter as the rods approach the respective ends 128 , 130 .
- the decreasing diameter allows the super elastic rods 118 , 120 to be more flexible and bendable along the length of the rods as the rods approach the ends 128 , 130 and to more evenly distribute the load placed on the system 100 by the spine.
- the diameter of the deflection rods or loading rods continuously decreases in diameter.
- the diameter can decrease in discrete steps along the length, with the diameter of one step not being continuous with the diameter of the next adjacent step.
- the diameters of the deflection rods or loading rods can continuously increase in diameter or can have discreet step increases in diameter along the length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods extent toward the respective ends 128 , 130 .
- the rods can have at least one step of decreasing diameter and at least one step of increasing diameter in any order along the length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods approach the respective ends 128 , 130 , as desired for the force and load carrying characteristics of the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 .
- the horizontal rod system 104 and, in particular, the deflection rods 118 , 120 , share the load carried by the spine.
- This load sharing is directed to restoring the normal motion of the spine.
- This embodiment, and, in particular, the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 provide stiffness and support where needed to support the loads exerted on the spine during spine motion, which loads, the soft tissues of the spine are no longer able to accommodate since these spine tissues are either degenerated or damaged.
- Such load sharing is enhanced by the ability to select the appropriate stiffness of the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 in order to match the load sharing desired.
- the stiffness of the deflection or loading rods can be selected from a number of deflection or loading rods. The stiffness is variable depending on the deflection or load rod selected. As indicated herein, the stiffness of the deflection or loading rod can be varied by the shape of the rod and the selection of the material. Shape variations can include diameter, taper, direction of taper, stepped tapering, and material variation can include composition of material, just to name a few variations.
- the load carried by the deflection or loading rods is distributed along at least part of the length of the deflection or loading rods. Preferably, the load is distributed along the entire length of the deflection or loading rods.
- the embodiments of the invention can be made smaller in order to fit in more spaces relative to the spine.
- embodiments can fit, for example, in the L5-S1 space of the spine in addition to generally less constrained spaces such as the L4-L5 space of the spine.
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 are cantilevered from mount 122 .
- these deflection rods 118 , 120 have a free end and an end fixed by the mount 112 , which mount is located on the horizontal rod 114 .
- the cantilevered deflection rods 118 , 120 are about parallel in a rested position to the horizontal rod 114 , and, in this embodiment, the horizontal rod is directly connected to the anchor systems and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of the anchor system.
- the horizontal rod 114 is stiff and rigid and, particularly, in comparison to the deflection rods. In this arrangement, the horizontal rod system and, in particular, the deflection rods 118 , 120 share the load resulting from the motions of the body of the patient.
- the second horizontal rod 116 could be replaced with a horizontal rod 114 which has deflection rods or loading rods ( FIG. 43A ).
- both horizontal rods would have deflection rods or loading rods.
- the deflection rods or loading rods mounted on one horizontal rod would be connected to vertical rods and the vertical rods would be connected to deflection rods or loading rods mounted on the other horizontal rod.
- Such an embodiment provides for more flexibility.
- the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 can have other configurations and be within the spirit and scope of the invention.
- the vertical rod system is comprised of, in this embodiment, first and second vertical rods 132 , 134 which are secured to first and second connectors 136 , 138 located at the ends 128 , 130 of the first and second deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 .
- the vertical rods 132 , 134 are preferably connected in such a way as to be pivotal for purposes of implantation in a patient and for purposes of adding flexibility and dynamic stability to the system as a whole.
- These vertical rods 132 , 134 are preferably made of titanium. However, other bio-compatible materials can be used.
- the vertical rods 132 , 134 are also connected to the second horizontal rod 116 by being received in C-shaped mounts 140 , 142 located on the second horizontal rods and in this embodiment, held in place by set screws 144 , 146 . It is to be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that other structures can be used to connect the vertical rods to the horizontal rods.
- the vertical rods are only connected to the horizontal rods and not to the anchoring system 102 in order to isolate the anchor system 102 and, in particular, the heads 110 from stress and forces that could be placed on the heads, and from forces transferred to the heads where the vertical rods connect to the heads.
- the system 100 through the vertical and horizontal rods allow for dynamic stability, and a wide range of motion without causing undue force to be placed on the heads of the anchor systems.
- These embodiments also allow for each level of the spine to move as freely as possible without being unduly restrictively tied to another level.
- More lateral placement of the vertical rods toward the heads of the anchor system provides for more stiffness in lateral bending and an easier implant approach by, for example, a Wiltse approach as described in “The Paraspinal Sacraspinalis-Splitting Approach to the Lumber Spine,” by Leon L. Wiltse et al., The Journal of Bone & Joint Surgery , Vol. 50-A, No. 5, July 1968, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the stiffness of the system 100 can preferably be adjusted by the selection of the materials and placement and diameters of the horizontal and vertical rods and also the deflection rods or loading rods. Larger diameter rods would increase the resistance of the system 100 to flexion, extension rotation, and bending of the spine, while smaller diameter rods would decrease the resistance of the system 100 to flexion, extension, rotation and bending of the spine. Further, continually or discretely changing the diameter of the rods such as the deflection rods or loading rods along the length of the rods changes the stiffness characteristics. Thus, with the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 tapered from the mount 122 toward the ends 128 , 130 , the system can have more flexibility in flexion and extension of the spine.
- the horizontal rods and the vertical rods in addition to the horizontal deflection rods or loading rods adds to the flexibility of the system 100 .
- all of the horizontal and vertical rods, in addition to the deflection rods or loading rods, can be made of titanium or stainless steel or PEEK should a stiffer system 100 be required.
- the system 100 can easily accommodate the desired stiffness for the patient depending on the materials uses, and the diameter of the materials, and the placement of the elements of the system 100 .
- an implanted system 100 need to be revised, that can be accomplished by removing and replacing the horizontal and/or vertical rods to obtain the desired stiffness.
- the horizontal rods having the deflection rods or loading rods can be removed and replaced by horizontal rods having deflection rods or loading rods made of titanium, or stainless steel, or non-super elastic rods to increase the stiffness of the system. This can be accomplished by leaving the anchor system 102 in place and removing the existing horizontal rods from the heads 110 and replacing the horizontal rods with stiffer horizontal rods and associated vertical rods.
- FIG. 3 depicts a view of the horizontal rod 104 as previously described.
- the connectors 136 , 138 are shown on the ends of the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 .
- the connectors can be forced-fitted to the deflection rods or fastened in other methods known in the art for this material and as further disclosed below.
- the connectors 136 , 138 have slits 148 , 150 to aid in placing the connectors onto the ends of the deflection rods.
- the connectors 136 , 138 each include upper and lower arms 160 , 162 which can capture there between the vertical rods 132 , 134 .
- the arms each include an aperture 168 , 170 that can accept a pin or screw 176 , 178 ( FIG. 1 ) for either fixedly or pivotally securing the vertical rods 132 , 134 .
- the vertical rods include a head 162 , 164 that can be force fit or screwed onto the rest of the vertical rods.
- the heads include apertures 172 , 174 for accepting the pins or screws 176 , 178 .
- the system 100 has as low a profile as possible and extends from the spine as little as possible, it is advantageous to place the deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 as close to the first horizontal rod 114 as possible.
- preferably notches 152 , 154 are placed in horizontal rod 114 to accommodate the connectors 136 , 138 .
- the purpose for the notches is to provide for a horizontal rod with a low profile when implanted relative to the bones and tissues of the spine so that there is, for example, clearance for implant and the motion of the implant, and to keep the deflection rods or loading rods as close as possible to the horizontal rods in order to reduce any potential moment arm relative to the mounts on the horizontal rod.
- FIG. 4 depicts another embodiment of the horizontal rod 114 with deflection rods or loading rods 118 , 120 and with different connectors 156 , 158 .
- Connectors 156 , 158 each include two pairs of upper and lower arms 160 , 162 extending in opposite directions in order for each connector 156 , 158 to mount an upper and a lower vertical rod as presented with respect to FIG. 46 . This configuration allows for a three level system as will be described below.
- FIG. 5 A preferred embodiment of the anchor system 102 invention can be seen in FIG. 5 .
- This anchor system 102 includes a bone screw 108 with a head 110 in the form of a U-shaped yoke 180 with arms 182 , 184 .
- a hook preferably with bone engaging barbs or projections, can be substituted for the bone screw 108 .
- the hook embodiment is further described in the above referenced and incorporated provisional application. The hooks are used to hook to the bone, such as the vertebra instead of having screws anchored into the bone.
- Each of the arms 182 , 814 of yoke 180 includes an aperture 186 , 188 through which a pin 190 can be placed.
- the pin 190 can be laser welded or force fit or glued into the yoke 180 , as desired.
- the pin 190 can be smooth or roughened as discussed below.
- the pin 190 can be cylindrical or be comprised of a multiple sides as shown in FIG. 7 . In FIG. 7 , pin 190 has six sides and one or more of the accommodating apertures 186 , 188 can also include mating sides in order to fix the position of the pin 190 in the yoke 180 .
- a compression sphere 200 is placed over the pin 190 .
- the compression sphere 200 can have a roughened surface if desired to assist in locking the sphere in place as described below.
- the compression sphere 200 can include one or more slits 202 to assist in compressing the sphere 200 about the pin 190 .
- the compression sphere 200 can have an inner bore that is cylindrical or with multiple sides in order conform to and be received over the pin 190 .
- one or more spacer rings 204 can be used to space the compression ring from the yoke 180 in order to assist in providing the range of motion and degrees of freedom that are advantageous to the embodiments of the invention.
- Head 110 in FIGS. 7 , 8 is somewhat different from head 110 in FIG. 1 as will be described below.
- Head 110 in FIGS. 7 , 8 includes a cylindrical body 206 with a lower end having an aperture 208 that can receive the compression sphere 200 .
- the aperture 208 can have a concave surface as depicted in FIGS. 7 , 8 . Accordingly, the compression sphere 200 fits inside of the concave surface of aperture 208 and is free to move therein until restrained as described below.
- the lower end of the cylindrical body 206 about the aperture 208 has some of the material that comprised wall 224 removed in order to accommodate the motion of the yoke 180 of the bone screw 108 .
- the portion of the wall 224 adjacent to the arms 182 , 184 of the yoke 180 has been removed to accommodate the yoke 180 and the range of motion of the yoke.
- the head 110 of the anchor system 102 includes an internal cylindrical bore 210 which is preferably substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of the head 110 .
- This bore 210 is open to the aperture 208 and is open and preferably substantially perpendicular to the distal end 212 of the head 110 .
- the bore 210 is threaded and can accept the set screw 112 .
- aligned U-shaped slots that extend through the head 110 from the outer surface to the bore 210 . These U-shaped slots are also open to the distal end 212 of the head 110 in order to have the set screw 112 accepted by the threads of the bore 210 .
- a compressor element or cradle 220 Located in the bore 210 between the set screw 112 and the compression sphere 200 is a compressor element or cradle 220 .
- the compressor element or cradle 220 can slide somewhat in the bore 210 , but the compressor element or cradle 220 is restrained by a pin 222 ( FIG. 7 ) received through the wall 224 of the head 110 and into the compressor element or cradle 220 .
- a pin 222 FIG. 7
- the compressor element or cradle 220 has a generally cylindrical body so that the compressor element 220 can fit into bore 210 .
- An upper end 226 of the compressor element 220 includes a concave surface 228 .
- This surface 228 is shaped to fit the horizontal rod system 104 and, in particular, a horizontal rod 114 , 116 .
- the lower end of the compressor element 220 includes a concave surface 230 which can accommodate the compression sphere 200 .
- the lower end of the compressor element 220 adjacent to the concave surface 230 has an additional concave surface 232 ( FIG. 8 ) which is used to accommodate the motion of the upper end of the yoke 180 as the head 110 is moved relative to the bone screw 108 .
- the concave surfaces 228 and 230 can be roughened, if desired, to assist in locking the head 110 relative to the bone screw 108 .
- there is no top compression element or cradle in order to reduce the profile of the head of the anchor system.
- the set screw can press against the horizontal rod 114 , 116 , which horizontal rod 114 , 116 , can press against the compressor element or cradle 220 , which compressor element or cradle 220 can press against the compression sphere 220 , which compression sphere can press against the pin 190 in order to lock the horizontal rod 114 , 116 relative to the head 110 and to lock the head 110 relative to the bone screw 108 .
- all of the surfaces that are in contact can be roughened to enable this locking, if desired.
- the surfaces may be smooth with the force of the set screw 112 urging of the elements together and the resultant locking.
- This alternative horizontal rod 114 , 116 includes first and second concave openings 234 , 236 which can receive vertical rods such as vertical rods 132 , 134 ( FIG. 1 ).
- the horizontal rod 114 , 116 is substantially cylindrical with the areas around the concave openings 234 , 236 bulked up or reinforced as desired to support the forces. Additionally, threaded bores are provided adjacent to the concave openings 234 , 236 and these bores can receive screws that have heads that can be used to lock vertical rods in place.
- the screws can retain short bars that project over the concave openings 234 , 236 in order to hold the vertical rods in place ( FIG. 34 ).
- the short retaining bars can also have concave openings that conform to the shape of, and receive at least part of, the vertical rods in order to retain the vertical rods in place with the system 100 implanted in a patient.
- the head 110 depicted is a preferred embodiment and is somewhat different from the head 110 as seen in FIG. 8 .
- the head body 206 , the outer surface 218 of the head and the head wall 224 have been configured in order to prevent splaying of the head 110 when the set screw 112 locks the anchor system 102 as explained above.
- the head 110 and, in particular, the wall 224 is reinforced about the U-shaped slot 216 that received the horizontal bar system 104 .
- the head 110 can use a number of shapes to be reinforced in order to prevent splaying.
- the exemplary embodiment of FIGS. 1 , 2 includes a pitched roof shape as seen in the top view looking down on distal end 212 of the head 110 .
- the wall about the U-shaped slot 216 is thickened, while the portion of the head distal from the U-shaped slot can be less thick if desired in order to reduce the bulk and size of the head 110 and, thus, give the head 110 a smaller profile relative to the bone and tissue structures when implanted in a patient.
- the small profile allows greater freedom of motion of the system 100 as described below.
- the head 110 can be shorter and, thus, stand less prominently out of the bone when the bone screw 108 in implanted in a spine of a patient for example.
- the anchor system 102 includes a number of degrees of freedom of motion. These degrees of freedom of motion are depicted in FIGS. 9 , 9 A, 10 , 10 A, and 11 , 11 A.
- FIG. 9 establishes a frame of reference including a longitudinal axis x which is along the longitudinal length of the bone screw 108 , a y axis that extends perpendicular to the x axis, and a lateral axis z which is perpendicular to both the x axis and the y axis and extends outwardly from and parallel to the pin 190 of the yoke 180 of the anchor system 102 .
- FIGS. 9 establishes a frame of reference including a longitudinal axis x which is along the longitudinal length of the bone screw 108 , a y axis that extends perpendicular to the x axis, and a lateral axis z which is perpendicular to both the x axis and the y axis and extends outwardly from and parallel to the pin 190 of the yoke 180 of the anchor system 102 .
- the system 100 due to the embodiments as disclosed herein is able to have the head 110 rotate about the z axis from about 80 degrees to about zero degrees and, thus, in line with the x axis and from the zero degree position to about 80 degrees on the other side of the x axis. Accordingly, the head is able to rotate about 160 degrees about the z axis relative to the bone screw 108 . As seen in FIGS. 10 , 10 A the head 110 is able to tilt about 0.08 inches (2 mm) relative to and on both sides of the x axis.
- the head 110 can tilt from about 12 degrees to zero degrees where the head 110 is about parallel to the x axis and from zero degrees to 12 degrees about the y axis and on the other side of the x axis.
- the head can tilt through about 24 degrees about the y axis.
- the head 110 can swivel for a total of about 40 degrees about the x axis.
- the head 110 can swivel about the x axis from about 20 degrees to one side of the z axis to zero degrees and from zero degrees to about 20 degrees on the other side of the z axis.
- the head is able to substantially exercise all of these degrees of freedom at once and, thus, can have a compound position relative to the bone screw by simultaneously moving the head within the ranges of about 160 degrees about the z axis ( FIG. 9 ), about 24 degrees from the y axis ( FIG. 10 ) and about 40 degrees about the x axis ( FIG. 11A ).
- the range of motion in the axial plane is about 180 degrees or about 90 degrees on each side of the centerline.
- the range of motion in the Caudal/Cephalad orientation is about 4 mm or about 2 mm on each side of the centerline or about 24 degrees or about 12 degrees on each side of the centerline.
- the range of motion in the coronal plane is about 40 degrees or about 20 degrees on each side of the centerline.
- FIGS. 12 , 13 depict yet another embodiment of the anchor system 102 of the invention where elements that are similar to elements of other embodiments and have similar reference numbers.
- this embodiment includes a lower cradle or compressor element 220 that is similar to the cradle or compressor element 220 of the embodiment of FIG. 7 with the head 110 similar to the head 110 as seen in FIG. 7 .
- the compression sphere 200 is similar to the compression sphere 200 in FIG. 7 with the compression sphere including a plurality of slits provided about the axis of rotation 238 of the sphere 200 .
- the slits 202 have openings that alternate between facing the north pole of the axis of rotation of the sphere 200 and facing the south pole of the axis of rotation of the sphere 200 .
- the slits can be provided in the sphere and have no opening relative to the north or south pole of the axis of rotation of the sphere 200 . Still further, the slits can open relative to only one of the north or south poles.
- FIGS. 12 , 13 there is also an upper cradle or compressor element 240 which is positioned adjacent to the set screw 214 (see also FIG. 7 ).
- the upper cradle or compressor element 240 has a generally cylindrical body which can slide in the cylindrical bore of the head 110 with an upper end having fingers 242 extending therefrom.
- the fingers 242 can spring over a bore formed in the lower surface of the set screw 214 in order to retain the cradle 240 relative to the set screw 214 and to allow the cradle 240 to rotate relative to the set screw 214 .
- the lower surface of the cradle 240 includes a concave surface 244 which can mate with a horizontal rod 114 , 116 in order to lock the rod relative the head 110 and the head 110 relative to the bone screw 108 . If desired, the concave surface 244 can be roughened to assist in locking the system 100 .
- a retaining ring 246 is depicted.
- the retaining ring can be force fit over the outer surface 218 of the head 110 , or pop over and snap under a ridge 248 at the distal end 212 of the head 110 , or can have internal threads that mate with external threads located on the outer surface of the 218 of the head 110 .
- the head side wall 224 includes a lateral or side opening 250 which communicates with the cylindrical bore 210 which is located in head 110 .
- the lateral or side opening preferably extends more than 180 degrees about the outer surface of the head.
- the side opening 250 includes a lip 252 and the side opening extends down below the lip into communication with the cylindrical bore 210 and follows the outline of the concave surface 228 of the cradle 220 .
- a horizontal rod 114 , 116 can be positioned through the side opening 250 and urged downwardly into contact with the concave surface 228 of the cradle 220 .
- the cradle 220 includes a downward projecting post 254 .
- this embodiment does not include a compression sphere, and instead the pin 190 , which can have a larger diameter than a pin 190 in other embodiments, comes in direct contact with the post 254 when the set screw 112 locks the anchor system 100 .
- the pin 190 can have a roughened surface 256 to assist in the locking of the anchor system 100 . As is evident from FIGS.
- this embodiment has a side loading head 110 , the distal end of the head is a fully cylindrical without communicating with any lateral U-shaped slots of the other embodiments. Accordingly, this embodiment does not include any retaining ring or reinforced areas that can be used to prevent splaying.
- FIG. 17 depicts yet another embodiment of the anchor system 102 that has a lateral or side loading head 110 .
- a compression cylinder 258 is placed over the pin 190 .
- the compression cylinder 258 can slide along the longitudinal axis 260 of the pin 190 , if desired.
- the head 110 can rotate about the pin 190 and the compression cylinder 258 .
- the head 110 can also slide or translate along the longitudinal axis 260 of the pin as well as the longitudinal axis of the compression cylinder 258 .
- Compression cylinder 258 has slits 262 that can be configured similarly as the slits 202 of the other embodiments of the anchor system 100 described and depicted herein.
- FIG. 18 depicts still another embodiment of the anchor system 100 that has a lateral or side loading head 110 .
- This embodiment includes a compression sphere 200 provided over a pin 190 which is similar to the other compression spheres 200 depicted and described herein. Accordingly, this embodiment has the freedom of motion described with respect to the other embodiments which use a compression sphere.
- each embodiment of the anchor system does not necessarily depict all the elements of another embodiment of the anchor system, that one of ordinary skill in the art would be able to use elements of one embodiment of the anchor system in another embodiment of the anchor system.
- Embodiments of the horizontal rod system 104 of the invention include the embodiments describes above, in addition to the embodiments that follow.
- An aspect of the horizontal rod system 104 is to isolate the anchor system 102 and reduce the stress and forces on the anchor system. This aspect is accomplished by not transmitting such stresses and forces placed on the horizontal rod system by, for example, flexion, extension, rotation or bending of the spine to the anchor system. This aspect thus maintains the integrity of the placement of the anchor system in, for example, the spine and prevents loosening of the bone screw or bone hook of the anchor system.
- various horizontal rod systems can be used to control the rigidity, stiffness and/or springiness of the dynamic stabilization system 100 by the various elements that comprise the horizontal rod system.
- the horizontal rod system can be used to have one level of rigidity, stiffness and/or springiness in one direction and another level in a different direction.
- the horizontal rod system can offer one level of stiffness in flexion of the spine and a different level of stiffness in extension of the spine.
- the resistance to lateral bending can be controlled by the horizontal rod system. Select horizontal rod systems allow for more resistance to lateral bending with other select horizontal rod systems allow for less lateral bending.
- placement of the vertical rods also effects lateral bending. The more laterally the vertical rods are placed, the more stiff the embodiment is to lateral bending.
- the horizontal rod system connects to the heads of the anchor system without the vertical rod system connecting to the heads.
- two anchor systems are secured to each vertebral level with a horizontal rod system connected between the two anchor systems. This further ensures that less stress and force is placed on the anchor systems secured to each level and also enables dynamic stability of the vertebra of the spine. Accordingly, movement of the vertebra relative to each other vertebra, as the spine extends, flexes, rotates and bends, is stabilized by the horizontal rods and the entire system 100 without ulacing excessive force or stress on the anchor system as there are no vertical rods that connect the anchor systems of one vertebra level with the anchor system of another vertebra.
- FIG. 19 through FIG. 25 another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 304 of the dynamic stabilization system 300 is depicted as used with an anchor system 102 of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 1 .
- the horizontal rod system 304 includes first and second horizontal rods 308 , 310 .
- FIG. 19A shows a second image of only the horizontal rod 308 in a first undeployed position and that FIG. 19 shows a deployed position with the horizontal rod 308 connected with vertical rods 306 and, thus, the entire system 300 .
- the horizontal rod 308 includes first and second aligned end rods 312 , 314 which are connected together with an offset rod 316 located between the first and second end rods 312 , 314 .
- the horizontal rod 308 looks much like a yoke with the offset rod joining each of the end rods 312 , 314 with a curved section 318 , 320 .
- At the junction of the first end rod 312 and the offset rod 316 is a first bore 322 which is aligned with the first end rod 312
- the second end rod 314 and the offset rod 316 is a second bore 324 which is aligned with the second end rod 314 and, thus, aligned with the first end rod 312 .
- deflection rods or loading rods 324 , 328 are made of a super elastic material such as, for example, Nitinol (NiTi) and the rest of system 300 is comprised of titanium, stainless steel, a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK or other biocompatible material.
- a super elastic material such as, for example, Nitinol (NiTi) and the rest of system 300 is comprised of titanium, stainless steel, a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK or other biocompatible material.
- other super elastic materials include copper-zinc-aluminum and copper-aluminum-nickel.
- the nickel-titanium is the desired material.
- the super elastic material has been selected for the deflection rods as the stress or force/deflection chart for a super elastic material has a plateau where the force is relatively constant as the deflection increases.
- a super elastic rod has a load (y) axis/deflection (x) axis curve which has a plateau at a certain level where the load plateaus or flattens out with increased deflection. In other words, the rod continues to deflect with the load staying constant at the plateau.
- the load plateau is about 250 Newtons to about 300 Newtons. It is to be understood that the plateau can be customized to the needs of the patient by the selection of the type and composition of the super elastic material.
- the plateau should be lower, and, for others, the plateau should be higher. Accordingly, and, for example, at the plateau, additional force is not put on the anchor system 102 and, thus, additional force is not put on the area of implantation of the bone screw 108 and the surrounding bone of the spine where the bone screw 108 is implanted.
- the deflection rods or loading rods 326 , 328 are force fit, screwed, welded, or glued into the bores 322 , 324 as desired.
- the first and second deflection rods or loading rods 326 , 328 extend from the respective bores 322 , 324 toward each other and are joined by a Y-shaped connector 330 .
- the Y-shaped connector 330 includes a base 332 which has opposed and aligned bores 334 , 336 that can receive the deflection rods or loading rods 326 , 328 in a manner that preferably allows the Y-shaped connector to pivot about the longitudinal axis defined by the aligned first and second deflection rods or loading rods 326 , 328 .
- the Y-shaped connector 330 includes first and second arms that preferably end in threaded bores 342 , 344 that can receive the threaded ends of the vertical bar system 306 as described below.
- first and second arms that preferably end in threaded bores 342 , 344 that can receive the threaded ends of the vertical bar system 306 as described below.
- recesses 346 , 348 FIG. 24
- the horizontal rod 308 can be more easily implanted between the tissues and bones of the spine and, in particular, guided between the spinous processes.
- the Y-shaped connector 330 can be deployed by rotating it about 90 degrees or as required by the anatomy of the spine of the patient and connected with the vertical rod system 306 .
- the second horizontal rod 310 is similar to the second horizontal rod 116 of the embodiment of FIG. 1 .
- This second horizontal rod 310 is preferably comprised of titanium or other biocompatible material and includes first and second mounts 350 , 352 which can receive the ends of the vertical rod system 306 .
- the mounts 350 , 352 include respective recesses 354 , 356 which can receive the vertical rods 358 , 360 of the vertical rod system 306 .
- the mounts 350 , 352 also include tabs 362 , 364 which can capture the vertical rods 358 , 360 in the respective recesses 354 , 356 .
- the tabs 362 , 364 can be secured to the mounts 350 , 352 with screws or other appropriate fastening devices.
- the first and second vertical rods 358 , 360 are preferably comprised of titanium or other biocompatible material and include a threaded end and a non-threaded end.
- the threaded end can be formed on the end of the rod or threaded elements can be force fit or glued to the end of the vertical rods 358 , 360 .
- FIGS. 26 , 27 , and FIGS. 28 , 29 depict yet more alternative embodiments of the horizontal rod systems of the invention.
- the horizontal rod 370 in FIG. 26 , 27 is similar to the horizontal rod 118 in FIG. 1 .
- Horizontal rod 370 includes a mount 372 which has bores that can receive first and second deflection rods or loading rods 374 , 376 which are preferably made of a super elastic material.
- At the ends of the first and second deflection rods or loading rods 374 , 376 are connectors which include a tab having a threaded bore therethrough. The connectors can be used to connect vertical rods to the deflection rods or loading rods.
- FIGS. 28 , 29 depict a horizontal rod 380 with first mount 382 and second mount 384 .
- Each of the mounts 382 , 884 includes a bore that is substantially parallel to the horizontal rod 380 .
- First and second deflection rods or loading rods 386 , 388 extend respectively from the bores of the first and second mounts 382 , 382 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods 386 , 388 are parallel to the horizontal rod 380 and are directed toward each other.
- the deflection rods or loading rods 386 , 388 can be directed away from each other.
- the mounts 382 , 384 would be spaced apart and the deflection rods or loading rods would be shorter as the deflection rods or loading rods extended parallel to and toward the ends of the horizontal rod 380 .
- FIGS. 30 , 31 , 32 depict yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 390 of the invention which is similar to the horizontal bar system 104 as depicted in FIG. 1 .
- Horizontal bar system 390 includes tapered deflection rods or loading rods 392 , 394 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods are tapered and reduce in diameter from the mount 396 toward the ends of the horizontal rod 390 .
- the deflection rods or loading rods can taper continuously or in discrete steps and can also have an decreasing diameter from the ends of the deflection rods or loading rods towards the mount 396 . In other words, a reverse taper than what is depicted in FIG. 30 .
- the vertical rods 402 , 404 are connected to the deflection rods or loading rods 392 , 394 as explained above.
- the conically shaped or tapered deflection rods or loading rods can be formed by drawing or grinding the material which is preferably a super elastic material.
- the tapered shape of the deflection rods or loading rods distributes the load or forces placed by the spine on the system evenly over the relatively short length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods extend from the central mount outwardly toward the ends of the horizontal rod.
- the deflection rods or loading rods are less than half the length of the horizontal rods.
- FIG. 30 depicts the vertical rods 402 , 404 in undeployed positions that are about parallel to the horizontal rod 390 and with the vertical rods 402 , 404 directed away from each other and toward the respective ends of the horizontal rod 390 .
- the horizontal rod 390 can be more conveniently directed through the bone and tissue of the spine and, for example, directed between the spinous processes to the implant position.
- the vertical rods 402 , 404 can be deployed so that the vertical rods are parallel to each other and about parallel to the horizontal rod 390 as depicted in FIG. 31 .
- this embodiment can be inserted from the side of the spine in the undeployed configuration depicted in FIG. 30 and then the vertical rods can be rotated or deployed by about 90 degrees (from FIG.
- the vertical rods are also free to rotate about 180 degrees about the deflection rods and in the sagittal plane of patient. This allows this embodiment to conform to the different sagittal contours that may be encountered relative to the spine of a patient.
- the deflection rods or loading rods are rigidly connected to the horizontal rod allowing for an easier surgical technique as sections of the spine and, in particular, the spinous processes and associated ligaments and tissues do not have to be removed in order to accommodate the implantation system 100 .
- the moving action of the system takes place about the spinous processes and associated tissues and ligaments, and, thus, the spinous processes do not interfere with this motion.
- having the horizontal rods more lateral than central also allows for a more simple surgical technique through, for example, a Wiltse approach.
- a cone 406 can be slipped over the end of the horizontal rod 390 and the vertical rod 402 to assist in urging the tissues and bone associated with the spine out of the way. Once the horizontal rod is implanted the cone 406 can be removed.
- the cone 406 includes an end 408 which can be pointed or bulbous and the cone 406 has an increasing diameter in the direction to the sleeve 410 portion of the cone 406 .
- the sleeve can be cylindrical and receive the end of the horizontal rod and the end of the deflection rod or loading rod 402 .
- FIG. 32 depicts how the connectors 412 , 414 are secured to the respective deflection rods 392 , 394 .
- the deflection rods have flanges, such as spaced apart flange 416 , 418 on the deflection rod 392 .
- the connectors 412 , 414 can snap over and be retained between respective pairs of flanges.
- FIG. 33 depicts yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 430 of the invention.
- the horizontal rod system 430 includes horizontal rod 432 which is preferably comprised of a super elastic material such as Nitinol.
- the horizontal rod 432 includes a generally central platform 434 , and on each side of the central platform 434 are first and second upwardly facing scallops or recesses 436 , 438 .
- On each side of the upwardly facing scallop or recess 436 are downwardly facing scallops or recesses 440 , 442 .
- On each side of the upwardly facing scallop or recess 438 are downwardly facing scallops or recesses 444 , 446 .
- the platform 434 accepts a connector for connecting the horizontal rod to vertical rods ( FIG.
- the scallops 436 , 440 , 442 on one side of the platform 434 act as a spring and the scallop 438 , 444 , 446 on the other side of the platform 434 acts as a spring.
- These springs assist the platform in carrying the load that the spine can place on the horizontal rod and isolate the anchor systems 102 from that load. That isolation has the advantage of preventing loosening of the anchor system as implanted in the patient. It is to be understood that by varying the pattern of the scallops, that the stiffness or rigidity of the horizontal bar can be varied and customized for each patient. Fewer scallops will generally result in a more stiff horizontal bar and more scallops will generally result in a less rigid horizontal bar.
- the stiffness can be different depending on the direction of the force that is placed on the horizontal bar depending on the orientation and location of the scallops.
- the horizontal bar is stiffer in extension and less stiff in flexion.
- the rod is of a uniform diameter, although the diameter can be non-uniform as, for example, being larger where the platform 434 is and tapering to the ends of the horizontal rod 432 , or having a large diameter at the ends of the horizontal rod 432 , tapering to a smaller diameter at the platform 434 .
- the scallops are formed within the uniform diameter.
- the scallops are molded into the horizontal rod or machined out of the preformed horizontal rod.
- the horizontal rod is more easily inserted into the spine and between bones and tissues of the spine. Further, this horizontal rod can be more easily delivered to the spine through a cannula due to the substantially uniform diameter.
- a machining technique known as wire electric discharge machining or wire EDM can be used.
- wire EDM wire electric discharge machining
- an approach for shaping the super elastic material is through wire EDM followed by electro-polishing.
- the super elastic material in this and the other embodiments can be cold rolled, drawn or worked in order to increase the super elastic property of the material.
- the deflection takes place almost exclusively in the middle portion of the horizontal rod and principally at the platform and spring thus relieving the load or force on the ends of the horizontal rod and on the anchor system/bone interface.
- the inferior scallops are not symmetrical the way the superior scallops are.
- the lateral most cuts in both of the most lateral inferior scallops are steep and not radiused. These cuts allow the rod to bend at these points enhancing the spring effect.
- the ratio of the radii of the superior scallop to the inferior scallop in this preferred embodiment is two to one. The result is to create two curved and flat (in cross-section) sections, one on each side of the platform and these two flat sections in this preferred embodiment have about the same uniform thickness.
- the scallops and the platform is formed into an otherwise uniformly diametered cylindrical rod. Accordingly, none of these formed elements in this preferred embodiment extend beyond the diameter of the rod.
- the diameter of the horizontal rod is about 4 mm.
- the rod could be bent in such a way that the platform and/or the scallops extend outside of the diameter of the cylindrical rod.
- that configuration would not be as suitable for implantation through a cannula or percutaneously as would the horizontal rod as shown in FIG. 33 and described above.
- the torsion rod and connector elements used in the horizontal rod embodiment of FIG. 1 can be used with the horizontal rod of FIG. 33 .
- the connector is secured to the platform of the horizontal rod of FIG. 33 with the two deflection rods or loading rods extending toward the ends of the horizontal rod of FIG. 33 and about parallel to that horizontal rod.
- FIG. 33A Another embodiment of the horizontal rod 433 is depicted in FIG. 33A .
- the horizontal rod 433 is similar to the horizontal rod in FIG. 33 with the exception that the platform and scallops are replaced with a reduced diameter central potion 448 .
- Each end of the central portion 448 gradually increases in diameter until the diameter is the full diameter of the ends of the horizontal rod 433 .
- This embodiment can be formed of a super elastic material and ground to the reduced diameter shape from a rod stock of the super elastic material. The rod stock could also be drawn to this shape. Generally after such operations the horizontal rod would be electro polished.
- a connector such as the connector shown in FIG. 40 could be used to connect vertical rods to preferably the middle of the central portion 448 .
- FIGS. 34A , 34 B, 34 C depict yet an alternative embodiment of a horizontal rod 280 such as horizontal rod 116 as shown in FIG. 1 that is meant to rigidly hold the vertical rods secured thereto.
- the mounts 282 , 284 formed in this horizontal rod 280 include a body that can be formed with the rod 280 .
- the mounts are then provided with a movable capture arm 286 , 288 that have recesses, which capture arms are formed out of the mount preferably using a wire EDM process that leaves the capture arm still connected to the horizontal rod with a living hinge.
- Eccentric headed set screws 290 , 292 are mounted on the horizontal bar. With vertical rods captured in the recesses of the capture arms, the eccentric set screws can be turned to urge the capture arms against the living hinge, and thereby capturing the vertical rods in the recesses of the capture arms.
- FIG. 40 depicts a dynamic stabilization system 450 that uses the horizontal rod system 454 of the invention.
- the system 450 additionally uses the anchor system 102 as depicted in FIG. 1 and the other horizontal rod 310 as depicted in FIGS. 19 , 34 .
- a connector 452 is secured to the platform 434 of the horizontal rod 454 and vertical rods are connected to the connector and to the other horizontal rod 310 .
- the scallops are formed by bending a bar and not by forming the scallops in a straight horizontal bar as depicted in the horizontal bar 432 of FIG. 33 .
- the horizontal rod 430 of FIG. 33 could also be used in the embodiment of FIG. 40 .
- FIG. 35 depicts an alternative embodiment of a horizontal rod system 460 of the invention.
- Horizontal rod system 460 includes a horizontal rod 462 with a central platform 464 and first and second spring regions 466 , 468 located on either side of the platform 464 . Extending outwardly from each spring region are respective ends of the horizontal rod 462 .
- the spring regions include coils that are wound about the longitudinal axis of the horizontal rod 462 .
- the entire horizontal rod 462 can be comprised of a rod wound around a longitudinal axis with the platform 464 and the ends of the horizontal rod being more tightly wound and/or with a smaller diameter and the spring regions 466 , 468 more loosely wound and/or with a larger diameter.
- Such a horizontal rod 462 can preferably be comprised of super elastic material such as Nitinol or alternatively titanium or other biocompatible material which demonstrates the ability to flex repeatedly.
- FIG. 36 depicts yet another alternative embodiment of a horizontal rod system 480 which includes first and second horizontal rods 482 , 484 which can be flat rods if desired.
- the horizontal rods 482 , 484 include spring region 494 , 496 . In the spring region the horizontal rod is formed into an arc, much like a leaf spring.
- spacers 488 , 490 , 492 Located at the ends and at the central platform 486 and between the horizontal rods 482 , 484 are spacers 488 , 490 , 492 . The spacers are glued, bonded, welded or otherwise secured between the first and second horizontal rods 482 , 484 in order to form the horizontal rod system 480 .
- This system 480 can be comprised of super elastic materials or other materials that are biocompatible with the patient.
- FIG. 37 depicts another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 500 including a horizontal rod 502 .
- recesses 504 are formed in the horizontal rod in order to define the stiffness of the horizontal rod 502 .
- This system can be formed of a super elastic material or other biocompatible material.
- FIG. 38 depicts still another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 520 of the invention with a horizontal rod 522 .
- the horizontal rod 522 includes dimples 524 distributed around and along the horizontal rod 522 .
- the stiffness of the horizontal rod 522 can be determined. Further is more dimples are placed on the lower surface than on the upper surface, when placed in a patient, the horizontal rod 522 would tend to be stiffer in extension and less stiff in flexion.
- This horizontal rod 522 can also be made of a super elastic material or other biocompatible material.
- FIG. 39 depicts another embodiment of the horizontal rod system 530 of the invention which has a horizontal rod 532 which is similar to the horizontal rod 432 of FIG. 33 and, thus, similar elements will number with similar numbers.
- the ends 534 , 536 of the horizontal rod 532 are curved so as to create hooks that can fit around portions of the vertebra so as to secure the horizontal rod 532 to the vertebra.
- the rod is comprised of super elastic material or other biocompatible material.
- the hooks at ends 534 , 536 are sprung open and allowed to spring closed around the vertebra.
- An anchor system which includes a hook (as discussed above) could be used with this system.
- FIGS. 39A , 39 B are similar to FIG. 39 .
- a horizontal rod 532 is held in place relative to the spine by two anchor systems 102 .
- the anchor systems are similar to the anchor systems depicted in FIG. 1 .
- the anchor systems 102 include an anchor or bone screw 108 or bone hook 109 with spikes 111 ( FIG. 39B ), as well as the head 110 into which the horizontal rod is received.
- a set screw 112 secures the horizontal rod relative to the anchor systems.
- FIG. 41 depicts another embodiment of the dynamic stabilization system 540 of the invention.
- This embodiment includes side loading anchor systems 542 as described above, although top loading anchor systems would also be appropriate for this embodiment.
- the horizontal rods 544 , 546 are preferably comprised of a polymer such as PEEK and mounted on the horizontal rods 544 , 546 are first and second connectors 548 , 550 .
- Vertical rods 552 and 554 are connected to the first and second connectors 548 , 550 at points 556 with screws, rivets or other devices so that the connection is rigid or, alternatively, so that the vertical rods 552 , 554 can pivot or rotate about the points.
- the horizontal rods are comprised of PEEK, the system tends to be more rigid than if the rods were comprised of a super elastic material. Rigidity also depends on the diameter of the rod.
- the vertical rod systems are comprised of vertical rods that can be pivoted or inserted into position after the horizontal rods are deployed in the patient.
- the vertical rods are preferably connected to the horizontal rods and not to the anchor systems in order to reduce the forces and stress on the anchor systems.
- the vertical rods are connected to the horizontal rod systems, which horizontal rod systems include mechanisms as described herein that reduce the forces and stresses on the anchor systems.
- the vertical rods can generally be comprised of titanium, stainless steel, PEEK or other biocompatible material. Should more flexibility be desired, the vertical rods can be comprised of a super elastic material.
- FIGS. 42 and 43 depict multi-level dynamic stabilization systems 560 , 580 .
- Each of these systems 560 , 580 are two level systems. All of these systems use anchor systems as described herein.
- the middle level horizontal rod 562 is secured to a vertebra and includes a horizontal rod system 104 having first and second deflection rods or loading rods such as that depicted in FIG. 4 , whereby a first pair of vertical rods 564 can extend upwardly from horizontal rod system and a second pair of vertical rods 566 can extend downwardly from the horizontal rod system.
- the vertical rods that extend upwardly are connected to an upper horizontal rod 568 such as depicted in FIG.
- the upper horizontal rod 568 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located above the vertebra to which the middle level horizontal rod 562 is secured.
- the lower horizontal rod 570 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located below the vertebra to which the middle level horizontal rod 562 is secured. This embodiment offers more stability for the middle level vertebra relative to the upper and lower vertebra while allowing for extension, flexion, rotation and bending relative to the middle level vertebra.
- FIG. 43 depicts another multi-level dynamic stabilization system 580 . All of these systems use anchor systems as described herein.
- the middle level horizontal rod 582 is secured to a vertebra and includes a horizontal rod such as that depicted in FIG. 34 .
- the upper and lower horizontal rods 586 , 590 can be similar to the horizontal rod 114 including the deflection rods or loading rods and deflection rod or loading rod mount depicted in FIG. 3 .
- Vertical rods are pivotally and rotationally mounted to the upper and lower horizontal rods 586 , 590 and, respectively, to the deflection or loading rods thereof and are also rigidly mounted to the middle level horizontal rod 582 .
- the upper horizontal rod 586 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located above the vertebra to which the middle level horizontal rod 582 is secured.
- the lower horizontal rod 590 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located below the vertebra to which the middle level horizontal rod 582 is secured.
- This embodiment offers more dynamic stability for the upper and lower vertebra relative to the middle level vertebra while allowing for extension, flexion, rotation and bending relative to the middle level vertebra.
- the middle level horizontal rod 582 has four mounts instead of the two mounts depicted in FIG. 34 or FIG. 34A so that a first pair of vertical rods 588 can extend upwardly from a lower horizontal rod 590 and a second pair of vertical rods 566 extending downwardly from the upper horizontal rod 586 , can be secured to the middle level horizontal rod 582 .
- FIGS. 44 , 45 depict one and two level systems that are more preferably used for fusion.
- the system 600 depicted in FIG. 44 resembles the system depicted in FIG. 41 .
- the system is substantially rigid and can be used in conjunction with spine fusion.
- this system can be used with the placement of bone or a fusion cage between vertebra to which this system is attached.
- bone can be placed between the vertebral bodies or, alternatively, fusion can be accomplished by placing bone in the valleys on each side of the spinous processes.
- the horizontal rods 602 , 604 an also be comprised of titanium, or other biocompatible material and be used for spine fusion.
- the vertical rods 606 can be rigidly attached to the horizontal rods through the use of a horizontal rod with mounts, as depicted in FIG. 34 , so that the vertical rods 606 do not move or pivot with respect to the horizontal rods.
- FIG. 45 depicts a two level system 620 that is more preferably used for a two level fusion.
- Each level can use an anchor system for example described with respect to anchor system 102 of FIG. 1 .
- the horizontal rods 622 , 624 , 626 are can be similar to the horizontal rod in FIG. 34 with either two vertical rod mounts for the upper and lower horizontal rods 622 , 626 or four vertical rod mounts for the middle level horizontal rod 624 .
- the vertical rods 628 , 630 can be rigidly attached to the horizontal rods through the use of a horizontal rod with mounts as depicted in FIG. 34 so that the vertical rods 628 , 630 do not move or pivot with respect to the horizontal rods.
- Vertical rods 628 extend between the upper and middle horizontal rods 622 , 624
- vertical rods 630 extend between the middle and lower horizontal rods 624 , 626 .
- the system 620 depicted in FIG. 44 resembles the system depicted in FIG. 41 , but with respect to three levels.
- PEEK is used for the horizontal rods 622 , 624 , 626
- the system is substantially rigid and can be used in conjunction with spine fusion.
- this system can be used with the placement of bone or a fusion cage between vertebra to which this system is attached. Bone can also be placed along the valleys on either side of the spinous processes for this system.
- the horizontal rods 622 , 624 , 626 can also be comprised of titanium, PEEK or other biocompatible material and be used for spine fusion.
- this two level system can be modified by replacing the horizontal rod 622 with a horizontal rod 115 ( FIGS. 45A , 45 B), which is much like horizontal rod 104 with deflection or loading rods 118 , 120 of FIG. 1 .
- This embodiment is depicted in FIG. 45A .
- fusion is accomplished between the two lower horizontal rods 117 which rods are like those depicted in FIG. 34 , or like horizontal rods 116 in FIG. 1 , and made of, preferably, titanium, and flexibility is provided by the upper horizontal rod 115 that is like horizontal rod 114 with deflection or loading rods that are shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIGS. 48-85 provide further embodiments of the dynamic stabilization system.
- FIGS. 48 and 49 perspective and posterior views of another embodiment of a dynamic stabilization system 700 can be seen.
- the dynamic stabilization system 700 includes an anchor system 702 , a horizontal rod system 704 and a vertical rod system 706 .
- horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a human patient that is standing and vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing.
- the horizontal rod system 704 can include a first horizontal rod 708 , a second horizontal rod 710 and a deflection rod system 712 .
- the vertical rod system 706 can include vertical rods 716 which are used with separate connectors 718 to attach the vertical rods 716 to the deflection rod system 712 attached to the first horizontal rod 708 and can use connector 1210 to attach vertical rods 716 to the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the deflection rod system 712 is attached, in this embodiment, to the center of the first horizontal rod 708 within a mount 714 , while being connected to the vertical rods 716 at the ends 722 , 724 of the deflection rod system 712 .
- the deflection rod system 712 is positioned about parallel to the first horizontal rod 708 , the first horizontal rod 708 being attached to the anchor systems 702 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of the anchor system 702 .
- the horizontal rods 708 , 710 are stiff and rigid (and made of titanium, for example), particularly in comparison to the deflection rod system 712 (which can be made of a super elastic material such as Nitinol (inner deflection rod 720 ( FIG. 50A ) and a polymer such as PEEK (outer shell 721 ), for example).
- the horizontal rod system 704 and, in particular, the deflection rod system 712 shares and distributes the load resulting from the motions of the body of the patient.
- FIGS. 50A-55B illustrate an embodiment of a deflection rod system 712 , a vertical rod 716 and a connector 718 used within the dynamic stabilization system 700 .
- the deflection rod system 712 includes an inner deflection rod 720 having a first end 722 and a second end 724 , a retaining ring 726 and a spherical ball or joint 728 .
- the deflection rod system 712 includes an inner rod 720 preferably made of, for example, a super elastic material such as Nitinol, and an outer shell 721 made of a polymer such as PEEK.
- the first end 722 of the inner deflection rod 720 of the deflection rod system 712 can be passed through the retaining ring 726 and attached to the spherical ball or joint 728 (as shown in FIG. 51 ) using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example.
- the spherical ball or joint 728 is only connected to the deflection rod 720 and not to the outer shell 721 of the deflection rod system 712 .
- the spherical joint 728 can then be positioned within the socket chamber 768 of the connector 718 .
- the retaining ring 726 can be threaded, fused, glued, press fit and/or laser welded, for example, to the connector 718 , thereby securing the deflection rod 712 to the connector 718 (as shown in FIG. 52 ) in a ball joint type connection.
- the deflection rod system 712 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center which corresponds with the center of the spherical ball or joint 728 .
- the vertical rod 716 used in this embodiment of the dynamic stabilization system 700 includes a head 730 having an aperture 732 that can accept a screw 734 and a rectangular shell or recess 736 for accepting the connector 718 .
- the aperture 732 of the vertical rod 716 includes a first bore 738 and a second bore 740 .
- the first bore 738 of the aperture 732 can be configured to encase the head 742 of the connector screw 734 while the second section 740 can be configured to capture the neck 735 of the screw 734 .
- the first section 738 of the aperture 732 has a larger diameter than the second bore 740 of the aperture 732 , the overall shape of the aperture 732 conforming to the shape of the connector screw 734 .
- the rectangular shell or recess 736 of the vertical rod head 730 is configured to fixedly receive and encase the connector 718 .
- the inner surface of the rectangular shell or recess 736 includes a top surface 746 , inner side surfaces 748 , 750 , and inner front and back surfaces 752 , 754 .
- the top 746 , front 752 and back 754 inner surfaces are flat and rectangular in shape, while the inner sides surfaces 748 , 750 are flat with a saddle-shaped cut-out which can allow for movement of the deflection rod system 712 and/or the vertical rod 716 relative to each other.
- the bottom surface 756 of the head 730 is elevated from the bottom surface 758 of the vertical rod shaft 760 in order to provide a space for the connector 718 to be attached to the bottom of the head 730 .
- the extent of elevation can vary depending on the size of the connector 718 attached thereto.
- the connector 718 used in this embodiment of the dynamic stabilization system 700 includes a threaded aperture 762 for accepting the connector screw 734 and a housing 764 for accepting the deflection rod system 712 .
- the aperture 762 within the connector 718 is lined up with and placed adjacent to the aperture 732 located on the vertical rod 716 , the connector screw 734 being inserted into both apertures 732 , 762 to secure the connector 718 to the vertical rod 716 .
- FIGS. 51 and 52 further illustrates the housing 764 of the connector 718 as having a generally cylindrical exterior surface 765 with a flat top surface 766 .
- the housing 764 also includes an opening 770 on the front face 772 of the connector 718 leading to a socket or spherical chamber 768 formed within the housing 764 .
- the socket or spherical chamber 768 can be configured to engage the spherical ball or joint 728 of the deflection rod system 712 .
- the spherical ball or joint 728 of the deflection rod system 712 is allowed to be pivotally engaged to the connector 718 within the socket or spherical chamber 768 while the deflection rod 720 is allowed to extend away from the connector 718 through the opening 770 of the front face 772 of the housing 764 .
- the retaining ring 726 holds the ball 728 in place in the connector 718 .
- the vertical rod recess or shell 736 can also be aligned with the housing 764 of the connector 718 .
- the connector housing 764 can be inserted into the vertical rod recess or shell 736 until the connector housing 764 engages the top 750 and sides 748 , 750 , 752 , 754 along the inner surface of the vertical rod shell 736 .
- movement of the connector 718 within the head 730 of the vertical rod 716 is minimized and/or eliminated.
- This configuration also allows the vertical rod shell 736 to absorb any pressure resulting from movements of the deflection rod system 712 and vertical rod 716 during use, thereby limiting the pressure placed on the screw 734 during use.
- FIG. 55A further illustrates the connection between the deflection rod system 712 , the connector 718 and the vertical rod 716 in this embodiment.
- the retainer ring 726 has an outer diameter which is slightly smaller than the diameter of the opening 770 on the front face 772 of the connector 718 .
- the retainer ring 726 has a flat front surface 774 , while the inner surface of the retaining ring 726 includes a curved section 776 , the radius of curvature for the curved section 776 being the same as the radius of curvature of the spherical ball or joint 728 .
- the retaining ring 726 can be inserted into the opening 770 through the front face 772 of the connector 718 until it is in sliding engagement with the spherical joint ball or 728 .
- the connector 718 can also include a ridge 778 on its inner surface which limits the depth of insertion of the retainer ring 726 into the connector 718 .
- the retainer ring 726 can then be screwed, fused, glued, force fit, and/or laser welded to the connector 718 .
- FIG. 55B illustrates an alternative fastening technique.
- the spherical ball or joint 728 is inserted into the connector 718 through an opening 780 on the back face 780 of the connector 718 while the deflection rod 720 is inserted into the connector 718 through an opening 770 on the front face 772 of the connector 718 .
- the spherical joint 728 and the deflection rod 720 are connected within the connector 718 .
- the spherical ball or joint 728 and the deflection rod 720 can be preassembled by, for example, screwing, gluing, force fitting and/or laser welding before the spherical joint 728 is placed in the connector 718 .
- a retainer ring 726 can then be used to prevent the spherical joint 728 from exiting the connector 718 through the opening 780 on the back face 782 of the connector 718 .
- the retainer ring 726 may be screwed, fused, glued, force fit and/or laser welded to the connector 718 .
- Other fastening techniques are also within the scope and spirit of the invention.
- the connector 718 can then be secured to the vertical rod 716 as shown in FIG. 53 .
- the connector 718 is mated with the head 730 of the vertical rod 716 .
- the aperture 732 in the vertical rod 716 is aligned with the aperture 762 of the connector 718 .
- the connector screw 734 then can secure the vertical rod 716 to the connector 718 .
- FIGS. 56A-59 illustrate another embodiment of a deflection rod system 800 , a vertical rod 802 and a connector 804 that can be used within the dynamic stabilization system 700 .
- a cylindrically-shaped connector 804 including a U-shaped slot 810 is used to attach the vertical rod 802 to the deflection rod system 800 as will be described in greater detail below.
- the connector 804 in this embodiment is shown as including a cylindrical body 806 having an internal cylindrical bore 808 , a U-shaped slot 810 and a lock tab 812 .
- the deflection rod system 800 in this embodiment includes a deflection rod 814 (preferably made of Nitinol, Niti or other super elastic material) having an outer shell 815 (preferably made of PEEK or other comparable polymer) and a spherical ball or joint 816 .
- the connector 804 includes a socket chamber 818 which is formed within the U-shaped slot 810 for receiving the spherical ball or joint 816 of the deflection rod system 800 .
- the exterior panel 820 of the lock tab 812 can be moved from its open, undeployed configuration (as shown in FIG. 56A ) to its closed, deployed configuration (as shown in FIG. 56B ), thereby closing the opening of the U-shaped slot 810 around the spherical ball or joint 816 of the deflection rod system 800 to secure the deflection rod system 800 to the connector 804 .
- the specific mechanism employed to move the exterior panel 820 of the lock tab 812 in this embodiment of the invention is illustrated in FIG. 59 , which is described in greater detail below.
- the deflection rod system 800 is pivotally engaged to the connector 804 within the socket chamber 818 while the deflection rod shaft 814 extends away from the connector 804 . Consequently, the vertical rod 802 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center that corresponds with the center of the spherical joint 816 .
- FIG. 57 illustrates the vertical rod 802 used in this embodiment of the invention.
- the vertical rod 802 includes a vertical rod shaft 822 , a threaded band 824 , and an end cap 826 having a cavity 828 for accepting the lock tab 812 of the connector 804 .
- the threaded band 824 and the end cap 826 are both located adjacent to the first end 830 of the vertical rod shaft 822 .
- the diameter of the threaded band 824 can be greater than the diameter of the vertical rod shaft 822 and the end cap 826 .
- the vertical rod 802 may not include an end cap 826 at all, in which case the threaded band 824 will include a cavity for accepting the lock tab 814 of the connector 804 .
- FIG. 58 provides a detailed illustration of the lock tab 812 used in this embodiment of the invention.
- the lock tab 812 includes the exterior panel 820 , a cylindrical platform 832 and a knob 834 .
- the exterior panel 820 can include a convex outer surface 836 and a concave inner surface 838 .
- the cylindrical platform 832 is located along the inner surface 838 of the exterior panel 820 , the top surface 840 of the cylindrical platform 832 being parallel to the top surface 842 of the exterior panel 820 .
- the knob 834 is centrally located along the top surface 842 of the cylindrical platform 832 .
- the knob 834 can be used to fasten the lock tab 812 to the vertical rod 802 , whereby the inner surface 838 of the exterior panel 820 and the knob 834 both conform to the shape of the end cap 826 of the vertical rod 802 as shown in FIG. 59 .
- the knob 834 includes a cylindrical base 844 having a bevel-shaped collar 846 and a U-shaped slit 848 .
- the U-shaped slit 848 allows the ends 850 of the knob 834 to pinch in until the collar 846 extends past the top of the end cap 826 of the hollow vertical rod 802 .
- the collar 846 catches under lip 84 and returns to its original unpinched configuration, thereby securing the vertical rod 802 to the lock tab 812 (as shown in FIG. 59 ).
- the connector 804 has an internal cylindrical bore 808 for accepting the vertical rod 802 which is positioned substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the cylindrical body 806 .
- the interior surface of the cylindrical body 806 includes threads 852 for engaging the threaded band 824 of the vertical rod 802 .
- the vertical rod 802 can be screwed into the cylindrical body 806 until the end cap 826 of the vertical rod 802 is placed in sliding engagement with the lock tab 812 knob 834 .
- Engagement of the vertical rod 802 to the lock tab 812 is accomplished, as set forth above, by inserting the knob 834 into the cavity 828 of the end cap 826 of the vertical rod 802 until the collar 846 of the knob 834 extends past the lip 847 of the end cap 826 , whereby the collar 846 of the knob 834 secures the vertical rod 802 to the lock tab 812 .
- the end cap 826 of the vertical rod 802 is free to rotate around the knob 834 of the lock tab 812 while the vertical rod 802 remains engaged to the lock tab 812 .
- the lock tab 812 can be moved up and down by way of threaded movement of the vertical rod 802 within the cylindrical body 806 of the connector 804 .
- the spherical ball or joint 816 of the deflection rod system 800 is inserted into the U-shaped slot 810 of the connector.
- the exterior panel 820 and the locking tab 812 can be moved down to block the opening of the U-shaped slot 810 of the connector 804 .
- the lower inner surface 854 of the lock tab 812 can be concave and rounded to engage the spherical ball or joint 816 of the deflection rod system 800 .
- FIGS. 60-64 illustrate another embodiment of the deflection rod system 900 , the vertical rod 902 and the connector 904 used within the dynamic stabilization system 700 .
- the deflection rod system 900 used in this embodiment includes a deflection rod 906 having an outer shell 907 , the deflection rod 900 further including spool-shaped end caps 908 attached thereto, having circumferential retaining ridges 915 , attached to the ends of the end cap 908 .
- the end cap 908 can be screwed, glued, force fit, fused and/or laser welded onto the deflection rod 906 .
- the spool-shaped cap 908 is not connected to the shell 907 .
- the shell 907 extends along the rod 906 and is short of the end cap 908 .
- the deflection rod 906 can be comprised of a super elastic material and the shell 907 can be comprised of a polymer such as PEEK.
- the shell 907 protects the rod 906 and adds rigidity to the deflection rod system 900 , and the rod 906 includes the deflection and recovery properties of a super elastic material.
- the deflection rod system 900 can be used in this embodiment of the dynamic stabilization system 700 without deviating from the scope of this invention.
- FIG. 60 illustrates the connector 904 used in an embodiment of the invention.
- the connector 904 can be seen as including a C-shaped slot 910 for accepting the spool-shaped end cap 908 of the deflection rod system 900 and a sliding tab 912 which can close the opening of the C-shaped slot 910 to secure the spool-shaped end cap 908 of the deflection rod system 900 to the connector 904 .
- the connector 904 can be seen as including the C-shaped slot 910 including two channels 914 adjacent to the side surfaces 916 of the connector 904 .
- the channels 914 allow the C-shaped slot 910 to conform to the shape of the end cap 908 of the deflection rod system 900 (as shown in FIG. 60 ) and receives the circumferential retaining ridges 915 of the end cap 908 . This configuration defines the movement of the deflection rod 900 within the connector 904 .
- the connector 904 further includes L-shaped tab restraints 918 having a pair of grooves 920 along the inner surface of the tab restraints 918 as well as a groove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shaped slot 910 .
- the L-shaped tab restraints 918 and various grooves 920 , 922 facilitate securing the sliding tab 912 to the connector 904 as will be described in greater detail below.
- the sliding tab 912 of this embodiment includes a first end 924 and a second end 926 .
- the sliding tab 912 further including a U-shaped slot 928 at end 924 , side knobs 930 , a bottom lip 932 at end 926 and a rear restraint 934 .
- the U-shaped slot 928 located adjacent to the first end 924 of the sliding tab 912 , is positioned parallel to the longitudinal axis of the sliding tab 912 .
- the U-shaped slot 928 allows the first end 924 of the sliding tab 912 to pinch together within the L-shaped tab restraints 918 of the connector 904 (shown in FIG. 61 ) as the sliding tab 912 is being placed in its deployed position.
- the side knobs 930 are located on the side surfaces 936 of the sliding tab 912 and conform to the grooves 920 along the inner surface of the tab restraints 918 of the connector 904 (shown in FIG. 61 ).
- the bottom lip 932 located adjacent to the second end 924 of the sliding tab 912 , conforms to and can be received in the groove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shaped slot 910 of the connector 904 (shown in FIG. 61 ). Referring to FIG.
- the back surface 938 of the sliding tab 912 can be seen as including a curved section 940 which can be configured to conform to the cylindrical shape of the spool-shaped end cap 908 .
- the back surface 938 of the sliding tab 912 can also include the rear restraint 934 .
- the rear restraint 934 can be inserted into a slot 948 within the vertical rod 902 (shown in FIG. 64 ) to position the vertical rod 902 relative to the connector 904 for deployment into a patient.
- the side knobs 930 and the bottom lip 932 also facilitate securing the sliding tab 912 to the connector 904 (as shown in FIG. 63 ).
- FIG. 63 illustrates the connector 904 in its deployed configuration.
- the deflection rod system 900 is secured to the connector 904 within the C-shaped slot 910 using the sliding tab 912 .
- the side knobs 930 are mated with the grooves 920 along the inner surface of the tab restraints 918 and the bottom lip 932 is mated with the groove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shaped slot 910 , thereby locking the sliding tab 912 into its deployed position within the connector 904 and locking the connector 904 about the spool-shaped end cap 904 .
- the vertical rod can rotate about the end cap 904 and thus rotate about the longitudinal axis of the torsion rod system 900 .
- the vertical rod 902 used in this embodiment of the invention includes a vertical rod shaft 944 , a first slot 946 for accepting the connector 904 and a second slot 948 for accepting the rear restraint 934 of the sliding tab 912 .
- the vertical rod 902 also includes an aperture 950 for accepting a screw, rivet or pin.
- the back of the connector 904 can be shaped to conform to the shape of the vertical rod 902 . Accordingly, the vertical rod 902 can be mated with the connector 904 as shown in FIG.
- a screw, rivet or pin can be inserted through the aperture 950 of the vertical rod 902 into the connector 904 to secure the vertical rod 902 to the connector 904 and/or allow the vertical rod 902 to pivot about the screw, rivet or pin (see arrows 905 ) and relative to the horizontal rod 900 .
- the rear restraint 934 can be held in the slot 948 prior to the sliding tab 912 being lockingly deployed to capture the spool-shaped end cap 918 in the C-shaped slot 910 .
- FIGS. 65-67 illustrate yet another embodiment of the deflection rod system 1000 , the vertical rod 1002 and the connector 1004 which can be used as a part of the dynamic stabilization system 700 .
- the deflection rod system 1000 can be seen as including a deflection rod 1006 having spool-shaped end caps 1008 attached to the ends of the shaft 1006 and shell 1007 similar to the embodiment depicted in FIG. 60 .
- FIGS. 68-71 can be used in this embodiment of the dynamic stabilization system 700 without deviating from the scope of this invention.
- FIG. 66 illustrates the connector 1004 of this embodiment of the invention.
- the connector 1004 can be seen as having a U-shaped slot 1010 on the first end 1012 of the connector 1004 , and a clamp, generally numbered 1014 , on the second end 1016 of the connector 1004 .
- the U-shaped slot 1010 can be configured to accept the vertical rod 1002 .
- the connector 1004 includes apertures 1018 , 1020 along the sides of the U-shaped slot 1010 for accepting a pin or screw 1022 . Once an aperture 1036 ( FIG.
- the pin or screw 1022 can be inserted into the apertures 1018 , 1020 of the connector 1004 as well as the vertical rod 1002 to either fixedly or pivotally secure the vertical rod 1002 to the connector 1004 .
- the pin or screw 1022 can be fused, glued, screwed, force fit and/or laser welded to the connector 1004 .
- the clamp 1014 includes a C-shaped arm 1024 as well as a C-shaped locking paw 1026 that is pivotally attached to the connector 1004 using a pivot pin 1028 .
- the clamp 1014 also includes a clamp set screw 1030 which can adjust the position of the locking paw 1026 .
- the end cap 1008 of the deflection rod 1000 can be secured to the connector 1004 between the C-shaped arm 1024 and the locking paw 1026 in the closed configuration of the clamp 1014 as shown in FIG. 65 and held in place by set screw 1030 . Accordingly, the vertical rod can pivot about the deflection rod 1006 with the end cap 1008 retained in the clamp 1014 .
- the vertical rod 1002 used in this embodiment of the invention can be seen as including a cylindrical shaft 1032 , a head 1034 having an aperture 1036 for accepting a pin or screw, and a spacer 1038 located between the head 1034 and the shaft 1032 .
- the head 1034 of the vertical rod 1002 conforms to the U-shaped slot 1010 of the connector 1004 .
- FIGS. 68-71 illustrate another embodiment of deflection rod system 1100 which can be used within the embodiments of the dynamic stabilization systems 700 described herein.
- the deflection rod system 1100 generally includes a deflection rod 1108 and two end caps 1104 .
- the end cap 1104 can be, for example, spool-shaped or spherically-shaped as illustrated with respect to other embodiments.
- the deflection rod system 1100 can also include an outer shell 1106 .
- the deflection rod 1108 is cylindrical and made of a super elastic material, preferably Nitinol (NiTi). The diameter of the deflection rod 1108 is constant in this embodiment.
- the outer shell 1106 of the deflection rod system 1100 is made of a biocompatible material or polymer, preferably PEEK, which is less elastic than the deflection rod 1108 .
- the deflection rod shell 1106 includes a hollow tube which is generally tapered. The tube increases in diameter from the ends 1118 of the shell 1106 to the central portion 1110 of the outer shell 1106 .
- a channel 1112 can be provided at the central portion of the shell 1106 to facilitate the retention of the deflection rod system 1100 in a mount on a horizontal rod such as, for example, mount 714 on horizontal rod 708 in FIG. 45 .
- a ring-shaped plateau or land can be defined having the largest diameter of the shell 1106 ( FIG. 70 ). Either the channel 1112 or the plateau can be received in the mount 714 of the horizontal rod system as seen in FIG. 48 .
- the end caps 1104 can be made of titanium, stainless steel, a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK or another biocompatible material. In this embodiment, the end caps 1104 are spool shaped or cylindrical shaped and include a central channel 1114 .
- the deflection rod 1108 can be inserted into the outer shell 1106 of the deflection rod system 1100 so that the ends 1116 of the deflection rod 1108 extend past from the ends 1118 of the outer shell 1106 .
- the end caps 1104 can then be attached to the end 1116 of the deflection rod 1108 .
- the purpose of the deflection rod shell 1106 is to protect the deflection rod 1108 , which is made of the super elastic material and to support and restrict the motion of the rod 1108 .
- the outer shell 1106 also serves to reduce the strain on the deflection rod 1108 as force is applied to the ends 1116 of the deflection rod 1108 .
- the deflection rod shell 1106 can resist such strain along the entire length of the shell 1106 .
- the outer shell 1106 of the deflection rod system 1100 helps to limit the maximum amount of deflection allowed by the deflection rod system 1100 as well as support and protect the deflection rod 1108 .
- the embodiments of the deflection rod systems illustrated in FIGS. 70-71 include a deflection rod or core 1108 and a deflection rod shell 1106 as described above.
- the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 68-71 are not intended to be limiting and it is envisioned that the deflection rod system 1100 may include other embodiments which would be evident to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention.
- FIGS. 72A-73C illustrate alternative embodiments of the first horizontal rod 708 .
- an embodiment of the first horizontal rod 708 is shown as including a mount 714 , a pair of guide or deflection restraining rings 1200 and a pair of grooves 1202 proximal to and outboard of the guide rings 1200 .
- the deflection rod system 712 is secured to the first horizontal rod 708 within the mount 714 .
- the deflection rod system 712 is further contained within the guide rings 1200 proximal to the ends of the deflection rod system 712 .
- the guide rings 1200 can be used to limit the amount of deflection of the deflection rod system 712 in use as well as to prevent the deflection rod system 712 from becoming overextended during use.
- the guide rings 1200 are elliptical rings wherein the vertical diameters of the guide rings 1200 are greater than the horizontal diameters of the guide rings ( FIG. 72C ). Again, horizontal referring to a horizontal orientation with respect to a patient that is standing and vertical referring to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing.
- the configuration of the guide ring 1200 allows the deflection rod system 712 to have a greater amount of vertical deflection than horizontal deflection. It is envisioned that the guide rings 1200 can have other configurations and still fall within the scope of this invention.
- the first horizontal rod 708 also includes the grooves 1202 which can be mated with corresponding knobs 1204 located on the end caps 1206 of a vertical rods 716 to keep the ends caps 1206 and/or the vertical rods 716 aligned during deployment into the patient. Alternatively, such initial alignment technique can be dispensed with.
- the vertical rod 716 includes an end cap 1206 and a main vertical shaft 1208 wherein the main vertical shaft 1208 can be screwed into the end cap 1206 . It is to be understood that the horizontal system can first be inserted into a patient without the main vertical shaft 1208 being attached (as shown in FIG. 72B ).
- the main vertical shafts 1208 can be attached to the end caps 1206 , wherein the grooves 1202 and the knobs 1204 can act to align and steady the end caps 1206 as the main vertical shafts 1208 are inserted into the end caps 1206 (as shown in FIG. 72C ).
- the first horizontal rod 708 of this embodiments includes a deflection rod collar or shield and deflection guide 1210 that wraps around the deflection rod system 1100 .
- the shield and deflection guide 1210 also may be identified herein as a shield 1210 and/or a deflection guide 1210 .
- the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 is preferably stiff and rigid (and made of titanium, for example). The deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 can be used to protect the deflection rod 712 from damage during use.
- the deflection rod shield and deflection guide can be used to guide and limit and define the amount of deflection of the deflection rod.
- the deflection rod system 1100 includes a rod 1108 and an outer shell 1106 as shown for the deflection rod system 1100 in FIG. 69 .
- the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 can also be used to limit the amount of deflection of the deflection rod system 1100 as well as prevent the deflection rod system 1100 from becoming overextended during use. Referring now to FIG.
- the inner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 can be seen as being tapered wherein the diameter of the inner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 is greater at the ends 1214 , 1216 than at the center 1218 of the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 .
- the surface of the deflection rod system 1100 can touch the inner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 during use. Accordingly, the deflection rod shell 1210 can limit the movement of the deflection rod system 1100 and assist in spreading the load and strain on the deflection rod system 1100 along the entire length of the deflection rod system 1100 .
- the first horizontal rod 708 includes a cavity 1220 to encompass the deflection rod system 1100 within the deflection rod shield and deflection guide 1210 to give the first horizontal rod 708 a smaller profile when implanted into a patient. It is envisioned that the deflection rod system 1100 can be mounted to any other type of horizontal rod which would be obvious to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention.
- FIGS. 74-79B illustrate embodiments of a second horizontal rod 710 which can be used within the dynamic stabilization system 700 described above.
- the horizontal rod 710 can generally be seen as including a main body 1300 and two cylindrical shafts 1302 extending away from each side of the main body 1300 .
- the main body 1300 includes cylindrical slots 1304 adjacent to the ends 1306 , 1308 of the main body 1300 and sockets 1310 for accepting a cam 1312 .
- the cylindrical slots 1304 are about perpendicular to the cylindrical shafts 1302 .
- the two cylindrical shafts 1302 can be connected to the anchor system 702 while the cylindrical slots 1304 can be used to accept and secure the vertical rods 716 to the second horizontal rod 710 as shown in FIG. 48 .
- the cylindrical slot 1304 for accepting a vertical rod 716 and the socket 1310 for accepting a cam 1312 can be seen in greater detail.
- the cylindrical slot 1304 is located along the top surface 1314 of the main body 1300 and extends about perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the second horizontal rod 710 .
- a slit 1316 is located underneath the cylindrical slot 1304 in order to allow the sides of the cylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together around a vertical rod 716 in the deployed configuration of the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the socket 1310 for accepting a cam 1312 .
- One purpose of the cam 1312 is to provide a mechanical means to pinch the sides of the cylindrical slot 1304 together in order to secure the vertical rods 716 to the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the socket 1310 of this embodiment includes a flat front face 1318 , a rounded back face 1320 , and two rounded side faces 1322 , 1324 .
- the front face 1318 includes a groove 1328 while the back face 1320 includes a channel 1326 , both of which can be used to help keep the cam 1312 secured within the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the front and back faces 1318 , 1320 are also elevated from the side faces 1322 , 1324 .
- a cam 1312 having a first side tab 1330 and a second side tab 1332 (as shown in FIGS. 77A , 77 B) can be inserted into the socket 1310 wherein the side tabs 1330 , 1332 are initially placed adjacent to the side faces 1322 , 1324 of the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the cam 1312 can be twisted in order to position a first side tab 1332 within the groove 1328 of the front face 1318 and a second side tab 1330 within the channel 1326 of the back face 1320 .
- the first side tab 1332 and the second side tab 1334 of the cam 1312 secure the cam 1312 to the second horizontal rod 710 while also causing the sides of the cylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together, thereby securing the vertical rod 716 to the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the cam 1312 can also include a tapered ridge 1334 (as shown in FIGS. 77A , 77 B) which further helps to pinch the sides of the cylindrical slot 1204 together around the vertical rod 716 .
- the socket 1310 can also include an aperture 1340 , the aperture 1340 extending from the floor 1336 of the socket 1310 to the bottom surface 1342 of the second horizontal rod 710 .
- the aperture 1340 can include a first section 1344 and a second section 1346 .
- the diameter of the first section 1344 of the aperture 1340 is smaller than the diameter of the second section 1346 of the aperture 1340 .
- the height and diameter of the first section 1344 of the aperture 1340 can be designed to conform to the shape of a fastener located on the bottom of a cam which can be inserted therein.
- the cam 1312 shown in FIG. 77A includes fasteners 1348 located on the bottom of the cam 1312 .
- the cam fasteners 1348 include ends 1350 which extend away from the main body 1352 of the fasteners 1348 . In use, as the fasteners 1348 are inserted into the aperture 1340 of the socket 1310 , the fasteners 1348 pinch in until the ends 1350 of the fasteners 1348 extend past the first section 1344 of the aperture 1340 .
- the fasteners 1348 return to their relaxed configurations, and engage lip 1347 , wherein the main body 1352 of the fasteners 1348 engage the second horizontal rod 710 along the first section 1344 of the aperture 1340 while the ends 1350 of the fasteners 1348 and engage lip 1347 help prevent the cam 1312 from becoming disengaged from the second horizontal rod 710 .
- FIGS. 78-79C illustrate an alternative embodiment of a cam 1354 .
- the cam 1354 of this embodiment can be seen as including a top section 1356 , a cylindrical body 1358 and fasteners 1360 on the bottom of the cam 1354 .
- the top section 1356 further includes a restraining tab 1362 and a side tab 1364 located between two grooves 1366 , 1368 .
- FIG. 79A illustrates cam 1354 which has been force fit in the socket 1310 of the second horizontal rod 710 in its undeployed configuration.
- the cam 1354 is secured to the second horizontal rod 710 through the use of the fasteners 1360 in the same manner as set forth above for cam 1312 .
- 79B illustrates cam 1354 within the second horizontal rod 710 in its deployed configuration.
- the cam 1354 can be rotated until the side tab 1364 of the cam 1354 is aligned with the groove 1328 of the front face 1318 of the socket 1310 and the restraining tab 1362 of the cam 1354 is placed within an indentation 1370 of the front face 1318 of the socket 1310 .
- the side tab 1362 causes the sides of the cylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together, thereby securing the vertical rod 716 to the second horizontal rod 710 .
- FIGS. 80-85 illustrate an alternative embodiment of the second horizontal rod which can be used within the dynamic stabilization system 700 described above.
- a second horizontal rod 1400 (previously shown in FIG. 74 as second horizontal rod 710 ) includes a connector 1402 to secure the second horizontal rod 1400 to the vertical rod 716 .
- the connector 1402 of this embodiment includes a main body 1404 and a rotating link 1406 .
- FIGS. 81 and 82 illustrate the individual components included in this embodiment of the second horizontal rod 1400 as well as the connector 1402 .
- the main body 1404 of the connector 1402 can be seen as including a C-shaped slot 1408 for housing the rotating link 1406 along the front face 1410 of the main body 1404 .
- the main body 1404 also includes a first aperture 1412 and a second aperture 1416 .
- the first aperture 1412 is located along the back face 1414 of the main body 1404 and is configured to accept the vertical rod 716 .
- the second aperture 1416 is located at the top 1418 of the main body 1404 and can be threaded to accept a threaded fastening or set screw 1420 .
- the rotating link 1406 can be seen as including a saddle-shaped groove 1422 on the top surface of the rotating link 1446 which is positioned substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the rotating link 1406 .
- the saddle-shaped groove 1422 includes an aperture 1426 that extends from the top 1424 to the bottom surface 1428 of the rotating link 1406 .
- the rotating link 1406 includes an internal cylindrical bore 1430 for accepting the second horizontal rod 1400 which is positioned substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the rotating link 1406 .
- this embodiment of the second horizontal rod 1400 can be seen in its deployed configuration.
- the second horizontal rod 1400 is inserted into the cylindrical bore 1430 of the rotating link 1306 .
- the second horizontal rod 1400 can include a dowel pin 1432 (as shown in FIG. 82 ) that extends through the aperture 1426 along the bottom surface 1428 of the rotating link 1406 (as shown in FIG. 83 ) when the second horizontal rod 1400 is inserted into the rotating link 1406 .
- One purpose of the dowel pin 1432 is to keep the rotating link 1306 positioned on the rod 1400 with restricted motion longitudinally along the rod 1400 and circumferential about the rod 1400 as will be described in greater detail below. It can further be seen in FIG.
- the rotating link 1406 is placed within the C-shaped slot 1408 of the main body 1404 , with the vertical rod 716 being positioned within the saddle-shaped groove 1422 of the rotating link 1406 .
- the vertical rod 716 can be inserted into the aperture 1412 located along the back face 1414 of the main body 1404 perpendicular to the second horizontal rod 1400 and the rotating link 1406 .
- the extent that the vertical rod 716 is inserted into the aperture 1412 can be varied to accommodate the specific vertebrae being affected.
- the fastening screw 1420 is used to secure the vertical rod 716 and the rotating link 1406 to the main body 1404 .
- the second horizontal rod 1400 can also include a section 1434 having threads or grooves 1438 to engage threads or grooves 1436 on a vertical rod 716 .
- the threads or grooves 1438 on the section 1434 engage a recessed, threaded or grooved section 1436 of the vertical rod 716 on one side of the section 1434 , while a dowel pin 1432 extends on the opposing side, the dowel pin 1432 extending past the aperture 1426 along the bottom surface 1428 of the rotating link 1406 .
- the vertical rod 716 is allowed to have limited vertical movement within the main body 1404 of the connector 1402 .
- the dowel pin 1432 extends through the aperture 1426 of the rotating link 1406 , thereby limiting the degrees of freedom of motion and with the help of set screw 1420 , fix the position of the horizontal rod 1400 relative to the vertical rod 716 .
- An alternative embodiment of the connector can eliminate one or any combination of two or more of the rotating link 1406 , the dowel pin 1432 , the threads or grooves 1438 , and the threaded or grooved section 1436 .
- the second horizontal rod 1400 can be a straight rod having a constant diameter (as shown in FIG. 84 ) which is made of a stiff and rigid material (titanium, for example). It is also noted that other types of connectors can also be used which would be obvious to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention.
- FIGS. 86A-112 provide further embodiments of the dynamic spine stabilization system.
- horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a patient that is standing and vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing.
- this embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization system 1500 is a topping off system 1500 with components 1502 , 1504 that are associated with vertebrae that are associated with two disks which may be adjacent disks.
- System 1500 includes anchor systems 1506 , a first horizontal rod 1520 and a deflection rod 1522 , a first pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 , a second pair of horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 and a second pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 .
- the first component 1502 of the system 1500 is used in conjunction with a spinal fusion procedure.
- a spinal fusion procedure for example, bone or a fusion cage filled with bone can be placed in the disk space between adjacent vertebrae.
- the bone can unite with the vertebrae, forming a solid fusion between the adjacent vertebrae.
- the first component 1502 of the system 1500 can be used to stabilize the affected vertebrae.
- the pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 can be secured to the adjacent to-be-fused vertebrae using the anchor systems 1506 as shown in FIG. 86A .
- any one of the anchor systems described herein can be used.
- the vertical rods 1508 , 1510 serve to stabilize, support and maintain the desired amount of separation between the adjacent vertebrae in this configuration as the fusion between the vertebrae and through the disk space is forming.
- the second component 1504 of the system 1500 can be used as a topping off component that eases the transition between the fused area of the spine and the vertebrae adjacent to the fused vertebrae. This allows there to be a more gradual transition from a healthier portion of the spine to the portion of the spine that has been fused.
- the second component of the system 1500 includes the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 , the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 , and the first horizontal rod 1520 and the deflection rod 1522 , wherein the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 are incorporated into both the first component 1502 and the second component 1504 of the system.
- the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 , the first horizontal rod 1520 and the deflection rod 1522 can include any of the corresponding embodiments described herein.
- the first ends 1524 , 1526 of the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 are connected to the deflection rod 1522 , and the deflection rod is attached to the first horizontal rod 1520 .
- the first horizontal rod 1520 is also connected to a pair of anchor systems 1506 as shown in FIG. 86 . It is to be noted that with this embodiment as well as with other embodiments herein, that the horizontal rod 1520 can be rotated up to 360 degrees (arrow 1570 ) relative to the anchors 1506 and then locked into place in the anchors 1506 . This allows the system 1500 to additionally conform to the anatomy of the spine of the patient.
- the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be seen as being attached to the first ends 1528 , 1530 of the pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 respectively and the second ends 1532 , 1534 of the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 . More specifically, the first ends 1536 , 1538 of the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be pivotally attached to the first ends 1528 , 1530 of the pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 .
- 86A establishes a frame of reference including an x-axis, a y-axis and a z-axis, wherein the x-axis and the y-axis are both substantially parallel to the patient's body and perpendicular with respect to one another, and wherein the z-axis is perpendicular to the patient's body and perpendicular to both the x-axis and the y-axis.
- horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be fixed relative to vertical rods 1508 , 1510 and vertical rods 1516 , 1518 .
- the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be configured to pivot about the first ends 1528 , 1530 of the vertical rods 1508 , 1510 in the x-y plane, the x-y plane being substantially parallel to the patient's body after the system 1500 has been implanted (as indicated by dual-arrows 1552 , 1554 ).
- the second ends 1540 , 1542 of the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 are positioned in between the pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 when connected to the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 , respectively.
- the second ends 1540 , 1542 of the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be positioned outside of the pair of vertical rods 1508 , 1510 when connected to the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 , respectively.
- the second ends 1532 , 1534 of the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 can also be pivotally attached to the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 at any location between the first ends 1536 , 1538 and second ends 1540 , 1542 of the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 or directly on the second ends 1540 , 1542 of the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 .
- the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 can be configured to rotate about the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 along the y-z plane, the y-z plane being perpendicular to the x-y plane (as indicated by dual-arrows 1556 , 1558 ).
- separate connectors 1544 , 1546 are used to connect the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 to the pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 .
- system 1500 can be implanted with the flexibility of the horizontal and vertical rods movable relative to each other and then after implantation, the set screws can be used to lock the position of the vertical and respective horizontal rods relative to each other.
- connection between the vertical rods 1508 , 1510 and/or vertical rods 1516 , 1518 and the respective horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 can be rigid and not allow for movement between the vertical rods 1508 , 1510 and the respective horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 .
- horizontal rods 1512 and 1514 can be instead a single rod that is connected between the anchor screws.
- the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 would then be connected to the single rod.
- a single horizontal rod can be substituted for the horizontal rods 1512 , 1514 , with the single rod connected to and between the vertical rods 1508 , 1510 .
- the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 would then be connected to the single horizontal rod that is associated with the fused level.
- the deflection rods 1522 preferably used in this embodiment of the invention can include an inner core made of a super elastic material, preferably Nitinol (NiTi) and an outer shell which is made of a biocompatible material or polymer, preferably PEEK, which is less elastic than the inner core.
- the deflection rod 1522 can be comprised of a super elastic material.
- a shield and deflection guide can be placed over the deflection rod to form a deflection rod system.
- FIG. 86B is similar to FIG. 86A in that this embodiment of system 1500 is meant to be used as a topping off level that is auxiliary or adjacent to a fusion level. Elements of the system in FIG. 86B that are similar to the elements in the system in FIG. 86A have been similar reference numerals.
- System 1500 in FIG. 86B includes the deflection rod 1522 mounted on a horizontal rod 1520 .
- the horizontal rod is mounted at each end to an anchor 1506 which can include a bone screw anchor as described herein.
- the distal ends of the deflection rod 1522 are secured to vertical rods 1516 , 1518 by devices as described herein.
- the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 at their respective opposite ends are secured to anchors or bone screw anchors 1506 as described herein.
- the bone screw anchors 1506 to which the horizontal rod 1520 is secured are themselves deployed into a first vertebra, and the bone anchor screws 1506 at the opposite ends of the vertical rods 1516 , 1518 are deployed into a second vertebra which is preferably adjacent to the first vertebra.
- This embodiment can be used with a fusion system, such as two threaded fusion cages, 1580 that are deployed between preferably the second vertebra and an adjacent third vertebra. According the second vertebra and the third vertebra are fused together, with this system 1500 connected to the first and second vertebrae and used to top off the fusion, with the first vertebra dynamically secured and stabilized relative to the fused second and third vertebra.
- FIGS. 87A and 87B posterior and side views of the system 1500 can be seen.
- this embodiment of the system 1500 can be seen as including a deflection rod 1522 having corrugations or ribs 1550 ( FIGS. 88A , 88 B).
- the outer shell 1523 of the deflection rod 1522 includes corrugations or ribs 1550 .
- the corrugations or ribs 1550 can be machined or molded into the outer shell 1523 .
- the corrugated nature of the outer shell of the deflection rod 1522 helps to increase or decrease or define the flexibility of the deflection rod 1522 during use.
- the corrugations 1550 of the outer shell of the deflection rod 1522 have a consistent shape and size throughout the length of the deflection rod 1522 (as shown in FIG. 88A ).
- the corrugations 1550 of the outer shell of the deflection rod 1522 are narrower proximal to the mount 1548 of the first horizontal rod 1520 in comparison to the corrugations proximal to the second pair of vertical rods 1516 , 1518 (as shown in FIG. 88B ). In other words, the corrugations 1550 are narrower closer to the center of the deflection rod 1522 .
- the narrower corrugations 1550 allow the deflection rod 1522 to deflect to a greater degree near the center of the deflection rod 1522 .
- the corrugations 1550 of the outer shell of the deflection rod 1522 can have varying shapes and sizes and locations in order to define the flexibility of the outer shell 1523 and the deflection rod 1522 .
- the ends of the deflection rod 1522 located distally from the mount 1548 can have the corrugations 1550 with narrower widths and the corrugations 1550 located more closely to the mount 1548 can be wider, in order to provide more flexibility at the distal ends of the deflection rod 1522 .
- deflection rod 1522 of this system 1500 can otherwise be configured consistent with the other embodiments of the deflection rod 1100 described herein. Further, a shield and deflection guide can be placed about the deflection rod to form a deflection rod system.
- FIGS. 89 to 104 depict another embodiment of a deflection rod system of the invention and preferably a one level system.
- a one level system is preferably used to span one disk space and be secured to the vertebra above the disk space and secured to the vertebra below the disk space.
- a two level system spans two disk spaces with the system attached to the first and second vertebra which are on either side of a first disk space and also attached to the second and third vertebra which are on either side of a second disk space. It is to be understood that while a one level system will generally be attached to two adjacent vertebra and a two level system will generally be attached to 3 adjacent vertebra, that in other embodiments the systems can be attached to non-adjacent vertebra.
- the one level system can be secured to two vertebra that are not adjacent.
- the two level system can be attached to three vertebra, some or all of said vertebra not being adjacent to each other.
- the deflection rod system includes a deflection rod that has an inner rod with an outer sleeve, and with a shield and deflection guide positioned about the sleeve.
- the shield and deflection guide can also be referred to as a shield and/or a deflection guide.
- the inner rod can be made of a super elastic material such an Nitinol
- the outer sleeve can be make of a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK
- the shield and deflection guide can be made of a bio-compatible material such as titanium by way of example only.
- a mounting bracket is mounted with or included with the shield and deflection guide so that the deflection rod system can be conveniently mounted on a horizontal rod.
- the deflection rod system can be conveniently mounted on a wide variety of spine implant systems and other bone implant system and provide the novel attributes of the deflection rod system to that other system.
- the screw anchors and the horizontal rod can be mounted in the spine of a patient followed by the mounting of the deflection rod system to the horizontal rod.
- the deflection rod system can be designed with different amounts of stiffness, as is described herein. By selection of materials and dimensions the deflection rod system can be provided in a range from a highly rigid configuration to a very flexible configuration and still provide dynamic stability to the spine.
- a selected deflection rod system can be mounted onto a horizontal rod and depending on how rigid or stiff the deflection rod system is, the desired amount of flexibility or rigidity and/or stiffness can be provided to the patient. Further, each of the deflection rod systems can have a different stiffness or rigidity or flexibility. Thus, on the same horizontal rod, a first deflection rod system can have a first flexibility or stiffness or rigidity, and a second deflection rod system can have a second different flexibility or stiffness or rigidity. Such an arrangement could be used to correct for spines that are malformed by, for example, scoliosis.
- the embodiment of the system 1600 includes anchor systems 1602 (without depicting the set screws), a first horizontal rod 1604 , a second horizontal rod 1606 , vertical rods 1608 , 1610 , deflection rods 1612 , 1614 , mounted in shields and deflection guides 1616 , 1618 , respectively, which shields and deflection guides are connected to the first horizontal rod 1604 , and a pair of connectors 1620 , 1622 (without depicting the set screws) to connect the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 to the second horizontal rod 1604 .
- the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 in this embodiment can include an inner deflection rod, an outer shell and a shield and deflection guide, and the deflection rod can include an inner rod and an outer shell.
- the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 are located between the first and second horizontal rods.
- the first horizontal rod 1604 can be seen as including a main body 1624 and two cylindrical shafts 1626 , 1628 extending away from each side of the main body 1624 .
- the first horizontal rod 1604 also includes a pair of threaded bores 1696 , 1698 (as can be seen in FIG. 95 ) which are provided proximal to the ends 1630 , 1632 of the main body 1624 for receiving the set screws 1634 which are used to secure the shields and deflection guides 1616 , 1618 of the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 to the first horizontal rod 1604 .
- the two cylindrical shafts 1626 , 1628 can be attached to anchor systems 1602 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of the anchor systems 1602 which have been inserted into the vertebra of the patient.
- the horizontal rod and in particular the distally located cylindrical shafts 1626 , 1628 can rotate in the saddles or heads of the screw anchors in order to advantageously position the horizontal rod and the deflection rod systems relative to the anatomy of the patient as described herein.
- the anchor systems 1602 may include any one of the anchor systems illustrated and/or described herein.
- the main body 1624 has cube-shaped mounting sections ( FIG.
- the distal ends 1630 and 1632 can provide stops to assist in positioning the horizontal rod between bone screw anchors.
- the cylindrical shafts 1626 , 1628 extend past the distal ends, and the bone screw anchors can be attached to the cylindrical shafts 1626 , 1628 along the length of the cylindrical shafts.
- the horizontal rod can rotate relative to the anchors.
- the second horizontal rod 1606 can be seen as including a cylindrical bar having two ends 1636 , 1638 .
- the second horizontal rod 1606 can be attached to anchor systems 1602 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of the anchor systems 1602 which have been inserted into the vertebra of a patient.
- the anchors can receive the ends 1636 , 1638 of the second horizontal rod 1606 .
- the anchor systems 1602 may include any one of the anchor systems illustrated and/or described herein.
- the first and second horizontal rods 1604 , 1606 can be made of titanium, stainless steel or PEEK or another biocompatible material.
- the horizontal rods are implanted in a horizontal configuration relative to an erectly standing patient and the horizontal rods are mounted between two bone screw anchors that are implanted in one vertebra.
- the horizontal rods with for example the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 mounted thereto, can be provided between two bone screw anchors that are deployed in adjacent vertebra. In that configuration the horizontal rods would be mounted vertically with respect to the standing patient. Additionally the horizontal rods can be mounted between anchors such that the horizontal rod is provide at an angle between a horizontal angle and a vertical angle.
- the deflection rod system 1617 , 1619 itself can be mounted to any number of spine or bone implants and be within the sprit and scope to of the invention.
- the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 include cylindrical shafts, having first ends 1640 , 1642 and second ends 1644 , 1646 .
- the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 can be attached to the second horizontal rod 1606 proximal to the first ends 1640 , 1642 of the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 , while the second ends 1644 , 1646 of the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 can be attached to the deflection rods 1612 , 1614 as will be described in greater detail below.
- the connector 1620 used to connect the vertical rod 1608 to the second horizontal rod 1606 is illustrated in greater detail.
- the connector 1620 can be seen as including a substantially cylindrical body 1648 with a lower end 1650 having an aperture 1652 that can receive the second horizontal rod 1606 .
- the body 1648 includes an internal cylindrical bore 1654 which is parallel to a longitudinal axis of the body 1648 .
- the bore 1654 is threaded and can accept a set screw (not shown).
- U-shaped slots 1658 , 1660 that extend through the body 1648 from the outer surface 1662 to the bore 1654 .
- U-shaped slots 1658 , 1660 are also open to the distal end 1656 of the body 1648 in order to have the set screw accepted by threads of the bore 1654 .
- the U-shaped slots 1658 , 1660 accept a vertical rod 1608 within the body 1648 while the aperture 1652 within the lower end 1650 of the connector 1620 accepts the second horizontal rod 1606 .
- the vertical rod 1608 can be secured to the connector 1620 using a set screw to cap off the internal cylindrical bore 1654 .
- deflection rod 1612 includes a spherical ball or joint 1664 , an inner rod 1666 preferably made of, for example, a super elastic material such as Nitinol, and an outer shell 1668 made of, for example, PEEK. These elements can be fit into a shield and deflection guide (not depicted in FIG. 94A ) to make up the deflection rod system in this embodiment.
- the second ends 1644 , 1646 of the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 are shaped as disk-shaped housing.
- the first end 1670 of the inner rod 1666 can be passed through an aperture 1672 within the second end 1644 (disk-shaped housing of the vertical rod 1608 , wherein the diameter of the inner rod 1666 is smaller than the diameter of the aperture 1672 .
- the first end 1670 of the inner rod 1666 can be attached to the spherical ball or joint 1664 using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example.
- the diameter of the aperture 1672 is less than the diameter of the spherical ball or joint 1664 to prevent the spherical ball or joint 1664 from passing back through the aperture 1672 .
- a retaining ring 1674 can be threaded, fused, glued, press fit and/or laser welded, for example, to the second end 1644 of the vertical rod 1608 , thereby securing the spherical ball or joint 1664 (as well as the deflection rod 1612 ) to the vertical rod 1608 in a ball joint type connection (as shown in FIG. 94B ).
- the deflection rod 1612 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center which corresponds with the center of the spherical ball or joint 1664 .
- the shields and deflection guides 1616 , 1618 that secure the first horizontal rod 1604 to the deflection rods 1612 , 1614 are generally cylindrical and include arms 1676 , 1678 . Focusing on shield and deflection guide 1616 , the arm 1676 of the shield and deflection guide 1616 can be seen as being attached to the first horizontal rod 1604 using a fastener, for example a screw 1634 . As described herein ( FIG. 96 ) of the shield and deflection guide 1616 includes an internal bore 1688 for accepting the deflection rod 1612 , the bore 1688 being positioned parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shield and deflection guide 1616 in this embodiment.
- the deflection rod 1612 can be attached to the shield and deflection guide 1616 within the bore 1688 using threading, fusing, gluing, press fitting and/or laser welding techniques, for example.
- the system 1600 since the system 1600 includes a left deflection rod system including shield and deflection guide 1616 and a separate, independent right deflection rod system including shield and deflection guide 1618 , deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 having different stiffness and connectivities can be mixed and matched within the system including depending on the specific needs of the patient.
- deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 including shields and deflection guides 1680 , 1682 are positioned in between the first horizontal rod 1604 and the second horizontal rod 1606 .
- the deflection rod systems including the shields 1680 , 1682 can be positioned above the first horizontal rod 1604 so that the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 overlap the first horizontal rod 1604 before being secured to the second horizontal rod 1606 as shown in FIG. 92A .
- the shields 1680 , 1682 are positioned in between the first horizontal rod 1604 and the second horizontal rod 1606 as shown in FIG. 89 , however, the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 can be attached to the system 1600 outboard of the deflection rod systems ( FIG. 92C ), as opposed to inboard of the deflection rod systems 1616 , 1618 as shown in FIGS. 89 and 92A .
- FIG. 92C the deflection rod systems
- the inner rods 1612 , 1614 project out of the shields and deflection guides of the deflection rod systems so as to be directed at each other or directed medially.
- the inner rods 1612 , 1614 project out of the shields and deflection guides of the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 so as to be directed away from each other or directed laterally.
- the distance between the vertical rods can be increased to the width as depicted in FIG. 92B from that of FIG. 92A . This gives the implant a wider stance if needed for purposes of dynamic stability and in particular for side-to-side bending.
- FIG. 92C is similar to FIG. 92B as far as the inner rods projection away from each other and more laterally in order to increase the width between the vertical rods.
- the arms 1676 , 1678 that are used to secure the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 to the horizontal rod are located at the rear of the deflection rod system, distally from the end where the inner rod projects from the shield and deflection guide.
- FIG. 95 illustrates an embodiment of deflection rod system 1619 in greater detail.
- the arm 1678 of the deflection rod system 1619 includes a U-shaped slot 1692 that surrounds the first horizontal rod 1604 , helping to secure the deflection rod system 1619 to the horizontal rod 1604 .
- the first arm 1678 also includes an aperture 1694 for accepting the screw 1634 which is used to attach the system 1619 to the first horizontal rod 1604 .
- the slot defines a channel, that defines in this embodiment, a cube-shaped space that can mate with the cube-shaped region of the horizontal rod to provide a fit that with the set screw locks the deflection rod system 1619 to the horizontal rod 1604 in a fixed position.
- multiple bores 1696 , 1698 can be provided along the horizontal rod in order to selectively position the deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 , along the horizontal rod in accordance with the anatomy of the patient and in accordance with the desired attributes of dynamic stabilization such as the stiffness characteristics, that are desirable for the particular patient.
- FIG. 96 illustrates a sectional view of an embodiment of the deflection rod system 1617 through the inner rod 1666 .
- the inner rod of the deflection rod 1612 is cylindrical and the outer shell 1668 is tapered, and thus is configured to become gradually narrow going from the base 1686 to the end 1684 of the outer shell 1668 .
- the inner surface 1690 of the shield and deflection guide 1616 of the deflection system 1617 also serves as a guide for the deflection rod 1612 to effectively limit the degree of deflection for the deflection rod 1612 .
- the inner surface 1690 of the shield 1616 in this embodiment forms a cone shape with the diameter located closer to end 1686 being smaller than the diameter located closer to end 1684 being larger.
- the deflection rod 1612 can deflect until the outer shell comes in contact with the inner surface 1690 .
- the deflection rod 1612 deflects along the length of said deflection rod until that portion of the outer shell of the deflection rod comes in contact with the inner surface of the shield. Successive portions of the outer shell closer to the end 1684 can still deflect until such successive portions come into contact with the inner surface of the shield.
- the conical shape of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide controls the amount and location of deflection of the deflection rod along the deflection rod from the fixed end of the deflection rod to the free end of the deflection rod, where the inner rod extends past the outer shell of the deflection rod.
- the deflection rods 1612 , 1614 can have different deflection properties for each side of the system 1600 depending on the users needs. In other words, one side of the system 1600 may offer more resistance to movement than the other side based on the deflection rods 1612 , 1614 having different stiffness characteristics, if that configuration benefits the patient. This may be useful in correcting the shape of a malformed spine as can occur with scoliosis.
- FIG. 96 depicts a cross-section through the entire deflection rod system including the inner rod, the outer shell and the shield and deflection guide.
- the outer shell has a decreasing cross section from the about the midpoint of the outer shell toward the end of the outer shell where the inner rod projects past the outer shell.
- the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide has a diameter that increases as measured from a longitudinal axis of the shield and deflection guide in a direction toward the end of the deflection rod system where the inner rod projects past the outer shell.
- the outer shell has a smallest diameter for the outer shell at about where the inner rod projects past the outer shell and the surface of the shield and deflection guide has a maximum diameter as measured from the longitudinal axis of the shield and deflection guide at about the same location. Accordingly, the outer shell and the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide restrict limits and define the range of motion and the stiffness that are characteristic of this design of the deflection rod system. By changing the rate of change of the diameters and/or the diameters of the outer shell and the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide these characteristics can be changed.
- the stiffness of the deflection rod system can be, for example, increased by increasing the diameter of the outer shell and/or by decreasing the diameter of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide as both approach where the inner rod extends from the outer shell. Additionally, increasing the diameter of the inner rod will increase the stiffness of the deflection rod system while decreasing the diameter of the inner rod will decrease the stiffness of the deflection rod system.
- the taper of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide can be configured to approach the natural dynamic motion of the spine, while giving dynamic support to the spine in that region. In addition to changing the dimensions, changing the materials that comprise the components of the deflection rod system can also affect the stiffness and range of motion of the deflection rod system.
- making the inner rod out of titanium or steel would provide for more stiffness than making, for example, the inner rod out of Nitinol.
- making the outer shell out of a material that is stiffer than PEEK would provide for a stiffer outer shell.
- FIG. 98B is a graph showing a preferred deflection of the inner rod and outer shell in accordance with a deflection force on the inner rod where the vertical rod is connected to the inner rod.
- the diameter of the PEEK outer shell is about 0.165 inches at its largest diameter and the diameter of the inner rod make of Nitinol is about 0.080 inches.
- the working length of the deflection rod system is about 1.04 inches.
- the load/deflection graph or curve of FIG. 98B demonstrates that for the design of this deflection rod system that the system responds more stiffly as the load increases.
- FIG. 98B provides an example of a specific amount of deflection in response to a given load on the spine and the deflection rod system.
- the deflection rod system can be made in stiffness that can replicate a 70% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine, a 50% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine and a 30% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine for providing in a kit for a doctor to use. It is to be understood that different ranges of motion, flexibility and stiffness can be provided using for example the variations that have been indicated herein.
- the graph of FIG. 98B depicts a deflection rod system that is a little stiffer that a 70% stiffness deflection rod system. As is evident from FIG. 98B , the curve is a non-linear curve, with the greatest non-linear part of the curve being as the load increases.
- the deflection rod system of this example offers dynamic stabilization by providing a range of motion where the load supported increases about linearly as the deflection increases and then with increased deflection the load supported increases more rapidly in a non-linear manner in order to provide dynamic stabilization.
- the amount of deflection changes or decreases in a non-linear manner and/or the rate of change in the amount of deflection decreases in a non-linear manner.
- the deflection of the deflection rod system responds about linearly to the increase in the load. After about 0.060 inches of deflection, the deflection rod system responds in a non-linear manner. In this region a greater amount of load or force needs to be placed on the deflection rod system in order to obtain the same amount of deflection that was realized prior to this point. Further, the rate of change in the amount of deflection for based on the force applied can also be a non-linear function. The curve on this graph can be customized based on the choice of dimensions and materials as indicated herein.
- the deflection rod system can be designed, for example, to provide about 70 percent of motion of an intact spine, or about 50 percent of motion of an intact spine or about 30 percent of motion of an intact spine or other desired percentage of motion of an intact spine. Further in the deflection response and flexibility and motion of a left deflection rod system can be different from that of a right mounted deflection rod system in the disclosed embodiments.
- the characteristics of the deflection rod systems can also be changed by, for example, adjusting the inner surface of the shields and deflection guides asymmetrical ( FIG. 96A ) instead of the symmetrical shapes of FIG. 96 .
- a bias can be introduced in the deflection rod systems by having the inner surface be provided asymmetrically about the longitudinal axis of the inner rod 1666 . Accordingly, the inner rod 1666 and the outer shell 1668 could deflect more in one direction than in another direction.
- the deflection rod could deflect more when the spine was placed in flexion and could deflect less when the spine was placed in extension. In effect this arrangement would be more restrictive with respect to movement of the spine with the spine in extension and less restrictive with respect to the movement of the spine with the spine in flexion.
- the deflection rod could deflect more when the spine was placed in extension and could deflect less when the spine was placed in flexion. In effect, this arrangement would be more restrictive with respect to movement of the spine with the spine in flexion and less restrictive with respect to the movement of the spine, with the spine in extension.
- the outer shell 1668 of the deflection rods 1612 , 1614 has an overall length of 0.950 inches from the base 1686 to the end 1684 of the outer shell 1668 .
- the first 0.500 inches of the outer shell 1668 proximal to the base 1686 of the outer shell 1668 includes a diameter of 0 . 165 .
- the length of the outer shell 1668 that is to be engaged to the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide 1616 (as shown in FIG. 96 ) is 0.20 inches.
- the outer shell 1668 begins to taper at a 4.0° angle to the end 1684 of the outer shell 1668 .
- the working length of the inner rod 1666 of the deflection rod 1612 is approximately 0.840 inches. As shown in FIG. 98 , diameter of the inner rod 1666 is 0.080 inches and remains constant throughout the length of the deflection rod 1612 .
- dynamic stabilization system 1600 can, for example, be configured to be incorporated into a multi-level system.
- FIG. 99 a deflection rod system with a horizontal rod and vertical rods of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system is depicted.
- a dynamic spine stabilization system 1700 for use in a multi-level dynamic stabilization system is illustrated.
- the system 1700 with the addition of anchors at the ends of each of the vertical rods 1706 , 1708 and vertical rods 1710 , 1712 can comprise a double level system that is attached to three preferably adjacent vertebra and span the two disk spaces defined between the vertebra.
- the anchors depicted in FIG. 99 would be deployed in the central vertebra and anchors attached to the vertical rods 1706 and 1708 would be secured into the vertebra located on one side of the central vertebra, while anchors secured to the other vertical rods 1710 , 1712 can be secured to the vertebra located on the other side of the central vertebra.
- such a system can span more that two disk spaces with, for example, the anchors attached to the vertical rods being deployed in vertebra that are not adjacent to the central vertebra.
- systems can be configured and deployed in the spine that have two or more of the systems 1700 depicted in FIG. 99 .
- a first and second systems 1700 can be secured together with common vertical rods such as vertical rods 1706 and 1708 .
- the anchors extending from the systems 1700 can be secured into two respective central vertebra.
- the other vertical rods extending from above the first and second systems 1700 can secured to a third vertebra using anchors, while the vertical rods extending from below the first and second systems 1700 can be secured to a fourth vertebra.
- the system 1700 includes deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 , a first pair of vertical rods 1706 , 1708 , a second pair of vertical rods 1710 , 1712 , anchor systems 1714 , 1716 , a horizontal rod 1718 .
- the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 include deflection rods 1720 and 1722 , and 1724 and 1726 , respectively.
- vertical rods 1706 and 1708 can be vertical rods 1608 , 1610 from system 1600 as shown in FIG. 89 .
- System 1700 essentially includes the same components as system 1600 .
- the physical characteristics of the anchor systems 1714 , 1716 , the horizontal rod 1718 , the vertical rods 1706 , 1708 , 1710 and 1712 , and the deflection rods 1720 , 1722 , 1724 and 1726 can be the same as similar counterparts described herein.
- the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 in system 1700 are attached to the horizontal rod 1718 in a similar manner to that described herein with respect to system 1600 . Further, the shields and deflection guides 1728 and 1730 of the first deflection rod system 1702 are secured together with a common arm 1729 , which common arm includes a bore 1731 which can receive a screw for securing the deflection rod system to the horizontal rod. Similarly, the deflection rod system 1704 can include deflection rods 1732 and 1734 which are secured together by arm 1733 which arm includes a bore 1735 . Another screw can be deployed through bore 1735 to secure the second deflection rod system to the horizontal rod.
- the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 include shields and deflection guides 1728 , 1732 , and shields and deflection guides 1730 , 1734 , respectively.
- These shields and deflection guides include internal bores 1736 , 1738 and 1740 , 1742 , respectively, for accepting the deflection rods 1720 , 1722 and 1724 , 1726 , which deflection rods have an outer shell provided about the deflection rod.
- the shields and deflection guides 1728 , 1730 and 1732 , 1734 are located on either side of the horizontal rod 1718 and positioned parallel to the horizontal rod 1718 .
- Vertical rods 1706 , 1708 are attached to deflection rods 1720 , 1721 and extend vertically away from the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 .
- Vertical rods 1710 , 1712 are attached to deflection rods 1722 , 1726 and extend vertically away from the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 in the opposite direction of vertical rods 1706 , 1708 .
- one or both pairs of vertical rods 1706 , 1708 and 1710 , 1712 are secured to another horizontal rod that is attached to an adjacent vertebra as illustrated in FIG. 89 .
- one or both pairs of vertical rods 1706 , 1708 and 1710 , 1712 are attached to another pair of deflection rod systems similar to connectors 1702 , 1704 , thereby creating a series of deflection rod systems between a plurality of vertebrae along the spine.
- one or both pairs of vertical rods 1706 , 1708 and 1710 , 1712 are connected to deflection rods 1612 , 1614 which are connected to another horizontal rod 1604 .
- the pairs of vertical rods can be connected to bone anchors.
- the vertical rods 1706 , 1708 , 1710 and 1712 can be attached to the system 1700 where the deflection rods are directed outboard or laterally.
- FIGS. 100A , 100 B and 100 C sectional views of two of the shields and deflection guides 1730 , 1734 of the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 and the deflection rods 1724 , 1726 can be seen.
- the deflection rods 1722 , 1726 include an inner rod and an outer shell and the outer shell can be seen as being slightly tapered within the shields and deflection guides 1730 , 1734 of the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 to allow the deflection rods 1722 , 1726 to flex therein.
- the deflection rods 1722 , 1726 can each be seen as including an inner rod 1740 , 1742 , preferably made of a super elastic material such as Nitinol, and an outer shell 1736 , 1738 , preferably made of PEEK.
- the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 can be seen as including U-shaped slots 1744 , 1746 that envelop the horizontal rod 1718 , helping to secure the connectors 1702 , 1704 to the horizontal rod 1718 .
- the shields and deflection guides 1730 , 1734 can also be seen as including bevels 1748 , 1750 adjacent to the anchor system 1716 .
- the bevels 1748 , 1750 allow the deflection rod systems 1702 , 1704 to have a lower profile relative to the anchor system 1716 , while still allowing the anchor system 1716 to be connected to the horizontal rod 1718 at various angles without contacting the arms 1730 , 1734 .
- FIGS. 101A and 101B depict dynamic stabilization systems wherein the deflection rods 1720 , 1722 and 1724 , 1726 point laterally and away from each other.
- the inner rods of the deflection rods are directed laterally instead of medially.
- the vertical rods 1706 , 1710 and 1708 , 1712 can be positioned more laterally than medially in order to change the dynamic stabilization of the system and make the system more rigid in side to side bending.
- the embodiments in FIGS. 101A and 101B are similar in concept to embodiments in FIGS. 92C and 92B , respectively, in that the inner rod of the deflection rod extends past the outer shell in a lateral and not medial direction.
- each deflection rod system includes dual shields and deflection guides with dual deflection rods including inner rods and outer shells positioned in each of the dual shields and deflection rods.
- the common arm 1729 , 1733 extends from a location at the rear of the deflection rod systems distally from where the deflection rod extends from the shield and deflection guide.
- FIG. 102 a sectional view of an embodiment of the horizontal rod 1718 and the deflection rod system 1702 can be seen.
- the portion of the horizontal rod 1718 adjacent to the deflection rod system 1702 is cylindrical.
- the horizontal rod 1718 can also be seen as including a plurality of cogs or splines 1752 along the outer surface of the horizontal rod 1718 .
- the cogs 1752 can be engaged by the deflection rod system 1702 within the slot 1744 of the deflection rod system 1702 , which has correspondingly been configured to accept the cogs 1752 of the horizontal rod 1604 .
- the deflection rod system 1702 allows the deflection rod system 1702 to be positioned and secured to the horizontal rod 1718 at differing angles relative to the horizontal rod 1718 .
- the cogs 1752 are shaped like triangles, but it is to be understood that the cogs 1752 can have any shape such as the wide variety of gear shapes and still fall within the scope of this invention.
- this embodiment of the deflection rod system 1702 includes a plurality of bores 1754 , 1756 , 1758 for either accepting a screw at different locations along the deflection rod system 1702 or accepting a plurality of screws in two or more of the bores 1754 , 1756 , 1758 .
- This can provide the surgeon with even greater flexibility when implanting the system 1700 into a patient as the deflection rod system can be placed to a greater degree to one side or the other side of the horizontal rod.
- FIG. 104 is similar to FIG. 103 except that the single bore 1756 is elongated and includes scallops for capturing a securing set screw in several locations.
- the set screw can be captured in 3 different locations between the scallops.
- the deflection rod system can be centered on the horizontal rod.
- the deflection rod system can be moved relative to the horizontal rod. That is the deflection rod system can be moved in this embodiment vertically up or vertically down in order to accommodate the anatomy of the spine and where the anchor screws are implanted into the spine.
- FIG. 105 illustrates yet another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system.
- System 1900 can be seen as including a vertical rod 1902 , a bone screw 1904 including a head 1906 having an inner bore 1908 , and a deflection rod 1910 .
- the head with the bore which together is similar to the shield and deflection guide in other embodiments, in addition the deflection rod which includes the inner rod and the outer shell together comprise the deflection rod system 1905 .
- This deflection rod system 1905 can be similar in design and function as the deflection rod systems described herein.
- the deflection rod system is incorporated into the head of the bone screw anchor and is co-linear with the axis of the shank of the bone screw anchor or co-axial with the axis of the shank of the bone screw anchor.
- the system 1900 may in some configurations eliminate the need to have horizontal rods, as the adjacent vertebra can be secured to the adjacent deflection rod systems of the anchors that are implanted in the adjacent vertebra.
- the vertical rod 1902 of the system is secured directly to the bone screw 1904 using the deflection rod 1910 as opposed to being attached to a horizontal rod that is then attached to an anchor system having a bone screw as shown in, for example, FIG. 48 .
- the deflection rod 1910 includes a first end 1912 and a second end 1914 as shown in FIG. 106 .
- the vertical rod 1902 is attached to the first end 1912 of the deflection rod 1910 while the second end 1914 of the deflection rod 1910 is inserted into the inner bore 1908 within the anchor screw head 1906 and attached to the anchor screw 1094 therein using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example.
- the vertical rod 1902 is pivotally attached to the deflection rod 1910 , wherein the vertical rod 1902 can pivot about an axis corresponding to the longitudinal axis of the anchor screw 1904 .
- This pivoting connection can, for example, be a ball and socket arrangement as seen in other embodiments herein.
- the inner bore 1908 within the anchor screw head 1906 can be seen as being tapered and/or cone-shaped with the diameter of the inner bore 1908 being larger on the first end 1916 of the bore 1908 as opposed to the second end 1918 of the bore 1908 as described above with respect to FIG. 96 . Accordingly, the deflection rod 1910 is allowed to flex within the head 1906 of the anchor screw 1904 with the inner surface 1920 of the head 1906 acting as a distraction guide for the deflection rod 1910 to effectively limit the maximum degree of deflection for the deflection rod 1910 .
- FIG. 107 an embodiment of system 1900 is shown.
- vertical rods 1922 , 1924 have been attached to adjacent vertebrae 1926 , 1928 using anchor screws 1930 , 1932 and 1934 , 1936 , respectively, wherein deflection rods connect the vertical rods 1922 , 1924 to the anchor screws 1930 , 1932 and 1934 , 1936 , respectively, in the same manner as described above with respect to FIGS. 105 and 106 .
- the adjacent vertebrae 1926 , 1928 are both stabilized relative to one other, while motion between the adjacent vertebrae 1926 , 1928 is preserved.
- a method of implantation of the system in the spine of the human patient is as follows. First the vertebral levels that are to receive the system are identified. Then the anchor systems are implanted, generally two anchor systems for each level. The anchor systems can be implanted using a cannula and under guidance imaging such as x-ray imaging. Alternatively, the anchor system can be implanted using traditional spinal surgery techniques. Then the horizontal rods are inserted generally laterally and secured to the anchor systems. The horizontal rods can be inserted laterally through a cannula or with an incision and the use of, for example, a lead-in cone. Alternatively, the horizontal rods can be inserted using traditional techniques and a posterior to anterior approach when the anchor systems are implanted. Thereafter, the vertical rods can be connected to or pivoted, rotated or placed into communication with and secured to the appropriate horizontal rod.
- the system 100 can be revised by removing the horizontal rod 104 that includes the deflection rods or loading rods and replace it with a horizontal rod 106 which has the vertical rod mounts ( FIG. 34 ) and is thus substantially more rigid.
- a revision to a fusion configuration can be accomplished with minimal trauma to the bone and tissue structures of the spine.
- the individual deflection rod systems 1617 , 1619 can be fastened to the horizontal rod using set screw 1634 . Thereafter, the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 can be secured to the second vertical rods using connectors described herein.
- FIGS. 108A to 111B depict yet another embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system 2000 of the invention. It is to be understood that even though this embodiment is configured as a single level system, that with the elimination of the second horizontal rod and that this system can be used as a topping off system in conjunction with a spine fusion as described herein.
- System 2000 includes first and second horizontal rods 2004 and 2006 that are secured to the heads of bone screw anchor systems 2002 .
- the system 2000 also includes first and second deflection rod systems 2017 , 1019 which include inner rods, outer shells which make up the deflection rods 2012 , 2104 and a shields and deflection rod guides 2016 , 2018 which cover and in this embodiment surround the deflection rods 2012 , 2014 .
- the system 2000 includes vertical rods 1608 , 1610 which are connected to the deflection rods.
- the deflection rod systems 2017 , 2019 can be made as a preassembled unit and provided to the surgeon for implantation by fastening to an implanted horizontal rod.
- the surgeon can preassemble the deflection rod system to the horizontal rod prior to the implantation of the horizontal rod in a patient.
- the horizontal rods can be secured to the anchors with the set screws shown and the deflection rod systems can be secured to the first horizontal rod with the set screws 2034 .
- the vertical rods 1608 , 1610 can be connected to the second horizontal rod with connectors 2020 . Connectors 2020 ( FIG.
- the 110 include a J-shaped opening that can receive the second horizontal rod and a port 2042 that can receive a vertical rod.
- the connectors 2020 can include a threaded bore 2044 that can receive a set screw 2046 . With the second rod and the vertical rod received in the connector 2020 , the set screw 2046 can be tightened in order to securely force the vertical rod against the horizontal rod and against the connector 2020 . Additionally, sections of the horizontal and vertical rods and the connector and the set screw that are all locked together, can be knurled in order if desired to be part of the locking mechanism.
- FIG. 111A depicts a top view of deflection rod system 2019 and FIG. 111B depicts sectioned view of the deflection rod system 2019 taken down a longitudinal axis of the deflection rod.
- the deflection rod system 2019 is preassembled.
- FIG. 111B depicts preferred dimensions of this embodiment. In this embodiment the preferred dimensions include:
- Nitinol or nickel-titanium other super elastic materials include copper-zinc-aluminum and copper-aluminum-nickel. However for biocompatibility the nickel-titanium is the preferred material.
- the implant can, in part, be made of titanium or stainless steel.
- suitable material includes by way of example only polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polyetherketoneketone (PEKK), polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), and polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK).
- PEEK 450G is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. (Victrex is located at www.matweb.com or see Boedeker www.boedeker.com). Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India (www.ghardapolymers.com).
- thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Surgery (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Surgical Instruments (AREA)
- Prostheses (AREA)
Abstract
A dynamic stabilization, motion preservation spinal implant system includes an anchor system, a horizontal rod system and a vertical rod system. The systems are modular so that various constructs and configurations can be created and customized to a patient.
Description
- This application is a continuation of and claims priority to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,454, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System Dimensioned for Deflection to a Load Characteristic for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/942,162, filed Jun. 5, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/028,792, filed Feb. 14, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. Provisional Application 61/031,598, filed Feb. 26, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/057,340, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Spine Implant With A Deflection Rod System Aligned With A Bone Anchor And Method”.
- All of the afore-mentioned applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- This application is related to all of the following applications including:
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,260, filed Aug. 1, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,942,900 issued May 17, 2011, entitled “Shaped Horizontal Rod for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,273, filed Aug. 1, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,012,175 issued Sep. 6, 2011, entitled “Multi-directional Deflection Profile for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,305, filed Aug. 1, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,002,800 issued Aug. 23, 2011, entitled “A Horizontal Rod with a Mounting Platform for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implant System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,330, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Multi-dimensional Horizontal Rod for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,338, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “A Bone Anchor With a Yoke-Shaped anchor head for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,358, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “A Bone Anchor With a Curved Mounting Element for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,377, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Reinforced Bone Anchor for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,400, filed Aug. 1, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,635,380 issued Dec. 12, 2009, entitled “A Bone Anchor With a Compressor Element for Receiving a Rod for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,413, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method with a Deflection Rod”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,426, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method with a Deflection Rod Mounted in Close Proximity to a Mounting Rod”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,436, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,446, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Super-Elastic Deflection Rod for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,470, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Revision System and Method for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,485, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Revision System for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,494, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,517, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Implantation Method for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,527, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Modular Spine Treatment Kit for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation of the Spine”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,534, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Horizontally Loaded Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,548, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System with Horizontal Deflection Rod and Articulating Vertical Rods”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,557, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “An Anchor System for a Spine Implantation System That Can Move About three Axes”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/832,562, filed Aug. 1, 2007, entitled “Rod Capture Mechanism for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. Patent Application No. 12/130,335, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System For A Spine Implant Including An Inner Rod And An Outer Shell And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,359, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System With A Deflection Contouring Shield For A Spine Implant And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,367, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System With A Shielded Deflection Rod System And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,383, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System for a Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,377, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System For Spine Implant With End Connectors And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,395, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System For A Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,411, filed May 30, 2008, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,985,243 issued Jul. 26, 2011 entitled “A Deflection Rod System With Mount For Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,423, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System With A Non-Linear Deflection To Load Characteristic For Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,454, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System Dimensioned For Deflection To A Load Characteristic For Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,457, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Deflection Rod System for a Vertebral Fusion Implant for Dynamic Stabilization and Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System and Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,467, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Dual Deflection Rod System For Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,475, filed May 30, 2008, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,963,978, issued Jun. 21, 2011, entitled “Method For Implanting A Deflection Rod System And Customizing The Deflection Rod System For A Particular Patient Need For Dynamic Stabilization And Motion Preservation Spinal Implantation System”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,032, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Spine Implant With A Deflection Rod System Anchored To A Bone Anchor And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,095, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Spine Implant With A Deflection Rod System Including A Deflection Limiting Shield Associated With A Bone Screw And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,127, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Spine Implant With A Dual Deflection Rod System Including A Deflection Limiting Shield Associated With A Bone Screw And Method”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/130,152, filed May 30, 2008, entitled “A Spine Implant With A Deflection Rod System And Connecting Linkages And Method”.
- All of the afore-mentioned applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- The most dynamic segment of orthopedic and neurosurgical medical practice over the past decade has been spinal devices designed to fuse the spine to treat a broad range of degenerative spinal disorders. Back pain is a significant clinical problem and the annual costs to treat it, both surgical and medical, is estimated to be over $2 billion. Motion preserving devices to treat back and extremity pain has, however, created a treatment alternative to or in combination with fusion for degenerative disk disease. These devices offer the possibility of eliminating the long term clinical consequences of fusing the spine that is associated with accelerated degenerative changes at adjacent disk levels.
-
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 1A is a posterior view of the embodiment ofFIG. 1 implanted in a spine. -
FIG. 2 is a top view of the embodiment ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 4 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 5 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an anchor system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 6 is another perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system ofFIG. 5 . -
FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the anchor system of the invention for use with a dynamic spine stabilization system such as depicted inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 8 is a sectioned view of a portion of embodiment of the alternative anchor system ofFIG. 7 of the invention. -
FIG. 9 is a side view of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 depicting a degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 9A is an end view of the anchor system ofFIG. 9 . -
FIG. 10 is a side view of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 depicting another degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 11 is a side view of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 depicting yet another degree of freedom of movement of the anchor system ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 12 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention ofFIG. 12 . -
FIG. 14 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention ofFIG. 14 . -
FIG. 16 is another exploded perspective view of the embodiment of the anchor system of the invention ofFIG. 14 . -
FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 18 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention with another horizontal rod system. -
FIG. 19A is a perspective view of another horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted inFIG. 19 and partially shown in phantom form. -
FIG. 19B is an exploded perspective view of the embodiment ofFIG. 19 . -
FIG. 19C is a side view of the embodiment ofFIG. 19 . -
FIG. 20 is a top view of another embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization of the system of the invention ofFIG. 19 . -
FIG. 20A is a top side of the embodiment depicted inFIG. 19A . -
FIG. 21 is another perspective view of the embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization of the invention ofFIG. 19 . -
FIG. 22 is a side view the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted inFIG. 19 configured in a closed position for implantation. -
FIG. 22A is an end view of the embodiment depicted inFIG. 22 . -
FIG. 23 is a side view partially in phantom form of the horizontal rod system ofFIG. 22 . -
FIG. 24 is a side view of the embodiment ofFIG. 22 in an open position as used when the embodiment is deployed in a spine. -
FIG. 25 is an end view of the embodiment depicted inFIG. 24 . -
FIG. 26 is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 27 is a side view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention ofFIG. 26 . -
FIG. 28 is a perspective view of still another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 29 is a side view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention ofFIG. 28 . -
FIG. 30 is a top view of another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted inFIG. 1 with the horizontal rod system in an undeployed position ready for implantation. -
FIG. 31 is a top view of the embodiment of the horizontal rod system ofFIG. 30 in a deployed position after implantation. -
FIG. 32 is a side view, partially in phantom of the embodiment depicted inFIG. 30 . -
FIG. 33 is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 33A is a side view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 34 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 34A is a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 34B is a side view of the embodiment ofFIG. 34A . -
FIG. 34C is a top view of the embodiment ofFIG. 34A . -
FIG. 35 is a side view of still another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 36 is a side view of yet another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 37 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 38 is a side view of another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 39 is a side view of yet another alternative embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 39A is still another embodiment of the horizontal rod system and the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 39B is yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system and the anchor system of the invention. -
FIG. 40 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 41 is a perspective view of still another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 42 is a side view of an embodiment of a two level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 43 is a side view of yet another embodiment of a two level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 43A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 44 is a side view of an embodiment of a fusion system of the invention. -
FIG. 45 is a side view of an embodiment of a two level fusion system of the invention. -
FIGS. 45A , 45B are perspective and side views of still another fusion system of an embodiment of the invention that has a transition level. -
FIG. 46 is a flow chart of an embodiment of the method of the invention. -
FIG. 47 is yet another embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 48 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 49 is a posterior view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 50A is a perspective view of an embodiment of the horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 50B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 51 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 52 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 53 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 54 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 55A is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 55B is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 56A is a front view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 56B is a front view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 57 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 58 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a lock tab of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 59 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 60 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 61 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 62A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a sliding tab of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 62B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a sliding tab of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 64 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod of the invention. -
FIG. 65 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 66 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 67 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a vertical rod of the invention. -
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 69 is a perspective and exploded view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 70 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 71 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 72A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 72B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 72C is a partial sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 73B is a front view of an embodiment of horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 73C is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 74 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention. -
FIG. 75 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention. -
FIG. 76 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod of the invention. -
FIG. 77A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention. -
FIG. 77B is a top view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention. -
FIG. 78 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a cam of the invention. -
FIG. 79A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 79B is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 80 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 81 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 82 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 83 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a rotating link of a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 84 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 85 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a horizontal rod system, a vertical rod system and a connector of the invention. -
FIG. 86A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a topping off dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 86B is a perspective view of another embodiment of a topping off dynamic stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 87A is a posterior view of an embodiment of a bi-level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 87B is a side view of an embodiment of a topping off dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIGS. 88A and 88B are plan views of embodiments of the deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 89 is a posterior view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 90 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 91 is a side view of an embodiment of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIGS. 92A , 92B and 92C are posterior views of embodiments of a single level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 93 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the invention. -
FIGS. 94A and 94B are perspective views of an embodiment of a vertical rod attached to a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 95 is a perspective and partially exploded view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 96 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a deflection rod within a shield and deflection guide of the invention. -
FIG. 96A is a section view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a deflection rod within a shield and deflection guide of the invention. -
FIG. 97 is a front view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 98A is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod of the invention. -
FIG. 98B is a graph of deflection to deflection force for an embodiment of a deflection rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 99 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIGS. 100A-100C are sectional views of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIGS. 101A and 101B are top views of an embodiment of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 102 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system and a horizontal rod of the invention. -
FIGS. 103A and 104 are top views of embodiments of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 105 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 106 side view of an embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention wherein the head of the anchor screw is transparent. -
FIG. 107 is a posterior view of an embodiment of the dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention attached to vertebrae. -
FIGS. 108A , 108B are perspective views of another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system of the invention. -
FIG. 109A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a deflection rod system with a horizontal rod mount, and a vertical rod connected to the deflection rod system of the invention. -
FIG. 109B is a sectional view though a longitudinal axis of the deflection rod system ofFIG. 109A of the invention. -
FIG. 110 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a connector of the dynamic spine stabilization system ofFIGS. 108A , 108B of the invention. -
FIGS. 111A , 111B are top and sectional views respectively of an embodiment of the deflection rod system of the dynamic spine stabilization system ofFIGS. 108A , 108B of the invention. - Embodiments of the present invention include a system or implant and method that can dynamically stabilize the spine while providing for preservation of spinal motion. Alternative embodiments can be used for spine fusion.
- Embodiments of the invention include a construct with an anchoring system, a horizontal rod system that is associated with the anchoring system and a vertical rod system that is associated with the anchoring system and the horizontal rod system.
- An advantage and aspect of the system is that the anchoring system includes a head or saddle that allows for appropriate, efficient and convenient placement of the anchoring system relative to the spine in order to reduce the force that is placed on the anchoring system. The anchor system has enhanced degrees of freedom which contribute to the ease of implantation of the anchor system. Accordingly, the anchor system is designed to isolate the head and the screw from the rest of the dynamic stabilization system and the forces that the rest of the dynamic stabilization system can place on the anchor system and the anchor system/bone interface. Thus, the anchor system can provide a secure purchase in the spine.
- Another advantage and aspect of the system is that the horizontal rod system is in part comprised of a super elastic material that allows for convenient positioning of the horizontal rod system relative to the anchor system and allows for isolation of the horizontal rod system from the anchor system so that less force is placed on the anchor system from the horizontal rod system and on the anchor system/bone interface. Accordingly, unlike prior devices the anchor system stays secure in the bone of the spine.
- An aspect and advantage of the invention is the ability to maximize the range of motion of the spine after embodiments of the dynamic stabilization, motion preservation implant of the invention are implanted in a patient. While traditional solutions to back pain include fusion, discectomy, and artificial implants that replace spine structure, embodiments of the present invention preserve the bone and ligament structure of the spine and preserve a wide range of motion of the spine, while stabilizing spines that were heretofore unstable due to degenerative and other spinal diseases.
- Still another aspect of the invention is the preservation of the natural motion of the spine and the maintenance of the quality of motion as well as the wide range of motion so that the spine motion is as close to that of the natural spine as possible. The present embodiments of the invention allow for the selection of a less stiff, yet dynamically stable implant for use in a non-fusion situation. A less stiff, yet dynamically stable implant relates directly to a positive patient outcome, including patient comfort and the quality of motion of the spine.
- In another aspect of the invention, load sharing is provided by the embodiment, and, in particular, the deflection rod or loading rod of the embodiment. For embodiments of this invention, the terms “deflection rod” and “loading rod” can be used interchangeably. Accordingly this aspect of the invention is directed to restoring the normal motion of the spine. The embodiment provides stiffness and support where needed to support the loads exerted on the spine during normal spine motion, which loads, the soft tissues of the spine are no longer able to accommodate since these spine tissues are either degenerated or damaged. Load sharing is enhanced by the ability to select the appropriate stiffness of the deflection rod or loading rod in order to match the load sharing desired. By selecting the appropriate stiffness of the deflection rod or loading rod to match the physiology of the patient and the loads that the patient places on the spine, a better outcome is realized for the patient. Prior to implantation of the embodiment, the stiffness of the implant of the system can be selected among a number of loading rods. In other words, the stiffness is variable depending on the deflection rod or loading rod selected. In another aspect, the load sharing is between the spine and the embodiment of the invention.
- In another aspect of the invention, the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered. In another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a horizontal rod. In yet another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a horizontal rod that is connected between two anchors that are affixed to the same vertebra. In yet another aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is about parallel to the horizontal rod in a resting position. In still a further, aspect the deflection rod or loading rod is cantilevered from a mount on the horizontal rod and said deflection rod or loading rod is about parallel to the horizontal rod in a resting position.
- In another aspect of the invention the horizontal rod attached directly to opposite anchors is stiff and rigid, and the cantilevered deflection rod or cantilevered loading rod shares the load with the spine resulting from the motions of the body of the patient.
- In another aspect of embodiments of the invention, the load being absorbed or carried by the embodiment is being distributed along at least part of the length of the deflection rod or loading rod. In another aspect of the invention, the load being absorbed or carried by the embodiment is distributed along at least part of the length of the horizontal cantilevered deflection rod or horizontal cantilevered loading rod.
- As the load is carried horizontally along the deflection rod or loading rod, rather than vertically, the embodiments of the invention can be made smaller in order to fit in more spaces relative to the spine. Advantageously, the embodiments can fit in the L5-S1 space of the spine.
- An aspect of the invention is to preserve and not restrict motion between the pedicles of the spine through the use of appropriately selected horizontal and vertical rods of embodiments of the invention.
- An aspect of the invention is to provide for load bearing on horizontal elements such as horizontal rods instead of vertical elements or rods, and, in particular, vertical elements that are connected between bone anchoring systems.
- An aspect of the invention is the use of horizontal rods in the embodiments of the invention in order to isolate each level of the implantation system from the other so as not to put undue force and/or torque on anchoring systems of embodiment of the invention and associated bone, and so as to allow customization of the implantation system to the need of the patient. Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to provide for minimized loading on the bone/implantation system interface. Customization, in preferred embodiments, can be achieved by the selection of the horizontal rod with the desired stiffness and stiffness characteristics. Different materials and different implant configurations enable the selection of various stiffness characteristics.
- Another aspect of the invention is the ability to control stiffness for extension, flexion, lateral bending and axial rotation, and to control stiffness for each of these motions independently of the other motions.
- An aspect of the invention is to use the stiffness and load bearing characteristics of super elastic materials.
- Another aspect of the invention is to use super elastic materials to customize the implant to the motion preservation and the dynamic stabilization needs of a patient. An aspect of such embodiments of the invention is to provide for a force plateau where motion of the implantation system continues without placement of additional force of the bone anchor system, or, in other words, the bone/implantation system interface.
- Thus, an aspect of the invention is to use the horizontal bar to offset loading on the anchor system and on the implantation system in general.
- Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to be able to selectively vary the stiffness and selectively vary the orientation and direction that the stiffness is felt by varying the structure of the implantation system of the invention, and, in particular, to vary the stiffness of the horizontal rod system of the invention.
- Another aspect of embodiments of the invention is to prevent any off-axis implantation by allowing the implantation system to have enhanced degrees of freedom of placement of the implant. Embodiments of the invention provide for off-axis placement of bone anchor or pedicle screw systems.
- A further aspect of embodiments of the invention is to control stabilized motion from micro-motion to broad extension, flexion, axial rotation, and lateral bending motions of the spine.
- Yet another aspect of the embodiments of the invention is to be able to revise a dynamic stabilization implant should a fusion implant be indicated. This procedure can be accomplished by, for example, the removal of the horizontal rods of the implantation system and replacement of such rods with stiffer rods. Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to provide for a convenient path for a revision of the original implantation system, if needed.
- A further aspect of the invention, due to the ease of implanting the anchoring system and the ease of affixing vertical rods to the horizontal rods of the invention, is the ability to accommodate the bone structure of the spine, even if adjacent vertebra are misaligned with respect to each other.
- A further aspect of the invention is that the implant is constructed around features of the spine such as the spinous processes and, thus, such features do not need to be removed and the implant does not get in the way of the normal motion of the spine features and the spine features do not get in the way of the operation of the implant.
- Another aspect of embodiments of the invention is the ability to stabilize two, three and/or more levels of the spine by the selection of appropriate embodiments and components of embodiments of the invention for implantation in a patient. Further embodiments of the invention allow for fused levels (in conjunction with, if desired, bone graphs) to be placed next to dynamically stabilized levels with the same implantation system. Such embodiments of the invention enable vertebral levels adjacent to fusion levels to be shielded by avoiding an abrupt change from a rigid fusion level to a dynamically stable, motion preserved, and more mobile level.
- Accordingly, another aspect of the embodiments of the invention is to provide a modular system that can be customized to the needs of the patient. Horizontal rods can be selectively chosen for the particular patient as well the particular levels of the vertebrae of the spine that are treated. Further, the positioning of the various selected horizontal rods can be selected to control stiffness and stability.
- Another aspect of embodiments of the invention is that embodiments can be constructed to provide for higher stiffness and fusion at one level while allowing for lower stiffness and dynamic stabilization at another adjacent level.
- Yet a further aspect of the invention is to provide for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation while preserving the bone and tissues of the spine in order to lessen trauma to the patient and to use the existing functional bone and tissue of the patient as optimally as possible in cooperation with embodiments of the invention.
- Another object of the invention is to implant the embodiments of the invention in order to unload force from the spinal facets and other posterior spinal structures and also the intervertebral disk.
- A further aspect of the invention is to implant the embodiment of the invention with a procedure that does not remove or alter bone or tear or sever tissue. In an aspect of the invention the muscle and other tissue can be urged out of the way during the inventive implantation procedure.
- Accordingly, an aspect of the invention is to provide for a novel implantation procedure that is minimally invasive.
- A dynamic stabilization,
motion preservation system 100 embodiment of the invention is depicted inFIG. 1 and includes ananchor system 102, ahorizontal rod system 104, and avertical rod system 106. For these embodiments horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a human patient that is standing and vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing (FIG. 1A ). As will be more fully disclosed herein below, one embodiment for theanchor system 102 includes abone screw 108 which is mounted to a head orsaddle 110. Alternatively, thebone screw 108 can be replaced by a bone hook as more fully described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/801,871, entitled “An Implant Position Between the Lamina to Treat Degenerative Disorders of the Spine,” which was filed on Jun. 14, 2006, and is incorporated herein by reference and in its entirety. The mounting of the head orsaddle 110 to thebone screw 108 allows for multiple degrees of freedom in order that thebone screw 108 may be appropriately, conveniently, and easily placed in the bone of the spine and in order to assist in isolating thebone screw 108 from the remainder of thesystem 100 so that less force is placed on theanchor system 102 and on the bone screw/bone interface. Some prior art devices, which use such bone screws, have, on occasion, had the bone screws loosen from the spine, and the present embodiment is designed to reduce the force on the bone screw and on the bone screw/bone interface. Preferably, theanchor system 102 is comprised of titanium. However, other biocompatible materials such as stainless steal and/or PEEK can be used. - In the embodiment of
FIG. 1 , thehorizontal bar system 104 is preferably secured through thehead 110 of theanchor system 102 with a locking setscrew 112. This embodiment includes a firsthorizontal rod 114 and a secondhorizontal rod 116. The firsthorizontal rod 114 has first and second deflection rods orloading rods - Such an arrangement allows for the
horizontal rod system 104 to isolate forces placed thereon from the anchor systeml02 and, thus, isolate forces that could be placed on thebone screw 108 and the bone screw/bone interface of the spine, and, thus, prevent the loosening of thebone screw 108 in the spine. As shown inFIG. 1 the deflection rods orloading rods horizontal rod 114 to amount 122. Preferably, the deflection rods orloading rods mount 122. Alternatively, the deflection rods or loading rods may be screwed, glued, or laser welded to themount 122 and to bores placed in themount 122. Other fastening techniques are within the scope and spirit of the invention. As can be seen inFIGS. 1 , 3, and 4, the firsthorizontal rod 114 includes first andsecond ridges mount 122 and extend at least partially along the length of the firsthorizontal rod 114 toward the respective ends of thehorizontal rod 114. Theseridges mount 122 relative to the rest of thehorizontal rod system 104. - As seen in
FIG. 1 , the deflection rods orloading rods loading rods loading rods rods respective ends rods elastic rods system 100 by the spine. Preferably, the diameter of the deflection rods or loading rods continuously decreases in diameter. However, it can be understood that the diameter can decrease in discrete steps along the length, with the diameter of one step not being continuous with the diameter of the next adjacent step. Alternatively, for different force and load carrying criteria the diameters of the deflection rods or loading rods can continuously increase in diameter or can have discreet step increases in diameter along the length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods extent toward the respective ends 128, 130. Still further, the rods can have at least one step of decreasing diameter and at least one step of increasing diameter in any order along the length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods approach the respective ends 128, 130, as desired for the force and load carrying characteristics of the deflection rods orloading rods - With respect to
FIG. 3 , for example, thehorizontal rod system 104, and, in particular, thedeflection rods loading rods loading rods - It is to be understood that the load carried by the deflection or loading rods is distributed along at least part of the length of the deflection or loading rods. Preferably, the load is distributed along the entire length of the deflection or loading rods. Further, as the load is carried horizontally and the stiffness can be varied along a horizontal member, rather than vertically, the embodiments of the invention can be made smaller in order to fit in more spaces relative to the spine. Advantageously, embodiments can fit, for example, in the L5-S1 space of the spine in addition to generally less constrained spaces such as the L4-L5 space of the spine.
- With respect to the embodiment of the horizontal rod system of the invention as depicted for example in
FIG. 3 , the deflection rods orloading rods mount 122. Thus, thesedeflection rods mount 112, which mount is located on thehorizontal rod 114. As is evident inFIG. 3 , the cantilevereddeflection rods horizontal rod 114, and, in this embodiment, the horizontal rod is directly connected to the anchor systems and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of the anchor system. Preferably, thehorizontal rod 114 is stiff and rigid and, particularly, in comparison to the deflection rods. In this arrangement, the horizontal rod system and, in particular, thedeflection rods - As an alternate embodiment, the second
horizontal rod 116 could be replaced with ahorizontal rod 114 which has deflection rods or loading rods (FIG. 43A ). Thus, both horizontal rods would have deflection rods or loading rods. The deflection rods or loading rods mounted on one horizontal rod would be connected to vertical rods and the vertical rods would be connected to deflection rods or loading rods mounted on the other horizontal rod. Such an embodiment provides for more flexibility. Further, the deflection rods orloading rods - Further, as can be seen in
FIG. 1 , the vertical rod system is comprised of, in this embodiment, first and secondvertical rods second connectors ends loading rods vertical rods vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rod 116 by being received in C-shapedmounts set screws - Preferably, the vertical rods are only connected to the horizontal rods and not to the
anchoring system 102 in order to isolate theanchor system 102 and, in particular, theheads 110 from stress and forces that could be placed on the heads, and from forces transferred to the heads where the vertical rods connect to the heads. Thus, thesystem 100 through the vertical and horizontal rods allow for dynamic stability, and a wide range of motion without causing undue force to be placed on the heads of the anchor systems. These embodiments also allow for each level of the spine to move as freely as possible without being unduly restrictively tied to another level. - More lateral placement of the vertical rods toward the heads of the anchor system provides for more stiffness in lateral bending and an easier implant approach by, for example, a Wiltse approach as described in “The Paraspinal Sacraspinalis-Splitting Approach to the Lumber Spine,” by Leon L. Wiltse et al., The Journal of Bone & Joint Surgery, Vol. 50-A, No. 5, July 1968, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The stiffness of the
system 100 can preferably be adjusted by the selection of the materials and placement and diameters of the horizontal and vertical rods and also the deflection rods or loading rods. Larger diameter rods would increase the resistance of thesystem 100 to flexion, extension rotation, and bending of the spine, while smaller diameter rods would decrease the resistance of thesystem 100 to flexion, extension, rotation and bending of the spine. Further, continually or discretely changing the diameter of the rods such as the deflection rods or loading rods along the length of the rods changes the stiffness characteristics. Thus, with the deflection rods orloading rods mount 122 toward theends system 100. Further, all of the horizontal and vertical rods, in addition to the deflection rods or loading rods, can be made of titanium or stainless steel or PEEK should astiffer system 100 be required. Thus, it can be appreciated that thesystem 100 can easily accommodate the desired stiffness for the patient depending on the materials uses, and the diameter of the materials, and the placement of the elements of thesystem 100. - Should an implanted
system 100 need to be revised, that can be accomplished by removing and replacing the horizontal and/or vertical rods to obtain the desired stiffness. By way of example only, should a stiffer revised system be desired, more akin to a fusion, or, in fact, a fusion, then the horizontal rods having the deflection rods or loading rods can be removed and replaced by horizontal rods having deflection rods or loading rods made of titanium, or stainless steel, or non-super elastic rods to increase the stiffness of the system. This can be accomplished by leaving theanchor system 102 in place and removing the existing horizontal rods from theheads 110 and replacing the horizontal rods with stiffer horizontal rods and associated vertical rods. -
FIG. 3 depicts a view of thehorizontal rod 104 as previously described. In this embodiment theconnectors loading rods connectors slits FIG. 3 , theconnectors lower arms vertical rods aperture FIG. 1 ) for either fixedly or pivotally securing thevertical rods head screws - In order that the
system 100 has as low a profile as possible and extends from the spine as little as possible, it is advantageous to place the deflection rods orloading rods horizontal rod 114 as possible. In order to accomplish this low profile, preferablynotches horizontal rod 114 to accommodate theconnectors - Accordingly, the purpose for the notches is to provide for a horizontal rod with a low profile when implanted relative to the bones and tissues of the spine so that there is, for example, clearance for implant and the motion of the implant, and to keep the deflection rods or loading rods as close as possible to the horizontal rods in order to reduce any potential moment arm relative to the mounts on the horizontal rod.
-
FIG. 4 depicts another embodiment of thehorizontal rod 114 with deflection rods orloading rods different connectors Connectors lower arms connector FIG. 46 . This configuration allows for a three level system as will be described below. - A preferred embodiment of the
anchor system 102 invention can be seen inFIG. 5 . This is similar to theanchor system 102 depicted inFIG. 1 . In particular, thisanchor system 102 includes abone screw 108 with ahead 110 in the form of aU-shaped yoke 180 witharms bone screw 108. The hook embodiment is further described in the above referenced and incorporated provisional application. The hooks are used to hook to the bone, such as the vertebra instead of having screws anchored into the bone. Each of thearms yoke 180 includes anaperture pin 190 can be placed. Thepin 190 can be laser welded or force fit or glued into theyoke 180, as desired. Thepin 190 can be smooth or roughened as discussed below. Further, thepin 190 can be cylindrical or be comprised of a multiple sides as shown inFIG. 7 . InFIG. 7 ,pin 190 has six sides and one or more of theaccommodating apertures pin 190 in theyoke 180. Acompression sphere 200 is placed over thepin 190. Thecompression sphere 200 can have a roughened surface if desired to assist in locking the sphere in place as described below. Thecompression sphere 200 can include one ormore slits 202 to assist in compressing thesphere 200 about thepin 190. Thecompression sphere 200 can have an inner bore that is cylindrical or with multiple sides in order conform to and be received over thepin 190. As can be seen inFIG. 8 , one or more spacer rings 204 can be used to space the compression ring from theyoke 180 in order to assist in providing the range of motion and degrees of freedom that are advantageous to the embodiments of the invention. - Mounted about the
compression sphere 200 is the head orsaddle 110.Head 110 inFIGS. 7 , 8 is somewhat different fromhead 110 inFIG. 1 as will be described below.Head 110 inFIGS. 7 , 8 includes acylindrical body 206 with a lower end having anaperture 208 that can receive thecompression sphere 200. Theaperture 208 can have a concave surface as depicted inFIGS. 7 , 8. Accordingly, thecompression sphere 200 fits inside of the concave surface ofaperture 208 and is free to move therein until restrained as described below. As is evident from the figures, the lower end of thecylindrical body 206 about theaperture 208 has some of the material that comprisedwall 224 removed in order to accommodate the motion of theyoke 180 of thebone screw 108. Essentially, the portion of thewall 224 adjacent to thearms yoke 180 has been removed to accommodate theyoke 180 and the range of motion of the yoke. - The
head 110 of theanchor system 102 includes an internalcylindrical bore 210 which is preferably substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of thehead 110. This bore 210 is open to theaperture 208 and is open and preferably substantially perpendicular to thedistal end 212 of thehead 110. At thedistal end 212 of thehead 110, thebore 210 is threaded and can accept theset screw 112. Along the side of thehead 110 are defined aligned U-shaped slots that extend through thehead 110 from the outer surface to thebore 210. These U-shaped slots are also open to thedistal end 212 of thehead 110 in order to have the setscrew 112 accepted by the threads of thebore 210. Located in thebore 210 between theset screw 112 and thecompression sphere 200 is a compressor element orcradle 220. The compressor element orcradle 220 can slide somewhat in thebore 210, but the compressor element orcradle 220 is restrained by a pin 222 (FIG. 7 ) received through thewall 224 of thehead 110 and into the compressor element orcradle 220. Thus, the compressor element orcradle 220, until locked into position, can move somewhat in thebore 210. - The compressor element or
cradle 220 has a generally cylindrical body so that thecompressor element 220 can fit intobore 210. Anupper end 226 of thecompressor element 220 includes aconcave surface 228. Thissurface 228 is shaped to fit thehorizontal rod system 104 and, in particular, ahorizontal rod compressor element 220 includes aconcave surface 230 which can accommodate thecompression sphere 200. The lower end of thecompressor element 220 adjacent to theconcave surface 230 has an additional concave surface 232 (FIG. 8 ) which is used to accommodate the motion of the upper end of theyoke 180 as thehead 110 is moved relative to thebone screw 108. Theconcave surfaces head 110 relative to thebone screw 108. In this embodiment (FIGS. 5 , 6) there is no top compression element or cradle (see, for example,FIGS. 7 , 13) in order to reduce the profile of the head of the anchor system. - As is evident from the figures, with the
anchor system 102 assembled and with ahorizontal rod U-shaped slot 216, the set screw can press against thehorizontal rod horizontal rod cradle 220, which compressor element orcradle 220 can press against thecompression sphere 220, which compression sphere can press against thepin 190 in order to lock thehorizontal rod head 110 and to lock thehead 110 relative to thebone screw 108. It is to be understood that all of the surfaces that are in contact, can be roughened to enable this locking, if desired. Alternatively, the surfaces may be smooth with the force of theset screw 112 urging of the elements together and the resultant locking. - As can be seen in
FIGS. 5 , 6 an alternativehorizontal rod horizontal rod concave openings vertical rods 132, 134 (FIG. 1 ). Thehorizontal rod concave openings concave openings concave openings FIG. 34 ). If desired, the short retaining bars can also have concave openings that conform to the shape of, and receive at least part of, the vertical rods in order to retain the vertical rods in place with thesystem 100 implanted in a patient. - Turning again to
FIGS. 1 , 2, 5, 6, thehead 110 depicted is a preferred embodiment and is somewhat different from thehead 110 as seen inFIG. 8 . In particular thehead body 206, theouter surface 218 of the head and thehead wall 224, have been configured in order to prevent splaying of thehead 110 when theset screw 112 locks theanchor system 102 as explained above. As seen inFIGS. 1 , 2, thehead 110 and, in particular, thewall 224 is reinforced about theU-shaped slot 216 that received thehorizontal bar system 104. By reinforcing or bulking up the area of the wall about theU-shaped slot 216, splaying of thehead 110 when force is applied to theset screw 214, in order to lock theanchor system 102, is avoided. Thehead 110 can use a number of shapes to be reinforced in order to prevent splaying. The exemplary embodiment ofFIGS. 1 , 2, includes a pitched roof shape as seen in the top view looking down ondistal end 212 of thehead 110. In particular, the wall about theU-shaped slot 216 is thickened, while the portion of the head distal from the U-shaped slot can be less thick if desired in order to reduce the bulk and size of thehead 110 and, thus, give the head 110 a smaller profile relative to the bone and tissue structures when implanted in a patient. Further, the small profile allows greater freedom of motion of thesystem 100 as described below. Also, it is to be understood that due to the design of theanchor system 102, as described above, thehead 110 can be shorter and, thus, stand less prominently out of the bone when thebone screw 108 in implanted in a spine of a patient for example. - In order to accommodate embodiments of the
horizontal rod systems 104 of the invention, to allow greater freedom in placing the horizontal rod systems and theanchor systems 102 relative to, for example, the spine of a patient, and to provide for a smaller implanted profile in a patient, theanchor system 102 includes a number of degrees of freedom of motion. These degrees of freedom of motion are depicted inFIGS. 9 , 9A, 10, 10A, and 11, 11A. -
FIG. 9 establishes a frame of reference including a longitudinal axis x which is along the longitudinal length of thebone screw 108, a y axis that extends perpendicular to the x axis, and a lateral axis z which is perpendicular to both the x axis and the y axis and extends outwardly from and parallel to thepin 190 of theyoke 180 of theanchor system 102. As depicted in the figures and, in particular,FIGS. 9 , 9A, thesystem 100 due to the embodiments as disclosed herein is able to have thehead 110 rotate about the z axis from about 80 degrees to about zero degrees and, thus, in line with the x axis and from the zero degree position to about 80 degrees on the other side of the x axis. Accordingly, the head is able to rotate about 160 degrees about the z axis relative to thebone screw 108. As seen inFIGS. 10 , 10A thehead 110 is able to tilt about 0.08 inches (2 mm) relative to and on both sides of the x axis. Accordingly, thehead 110 can tilt from about 12 degrees to zero degrees where thehead 110 is about parallel to the x axis and from zero degrees to 12 degrees about the y axis and on the other side of the x axis. Thus, the head can tilt through about 24 degrees about the y axis. As can be seen inFIGS. 11 , 11A, thehead 110 can swivel for a total of about 40 degrees about the x axis. With respectFIG. 11A , thehead 110 can swivel about the x axis from about 20 degrees to one side of the z axis to zero degrees and from zero degrees to about 20 degrees on the other side of the z axis. The head is able to substantially exercise all of these degrees of freedom at once and, thus, can have a compound position relative to the bone screw by simultaneously moving the head within the ranges of about 160 degrees about the z axis (FIG. 9 ), about 24 degrees from the y axis (FIG. 10 ) and about 40 degrees about the x axis (FIG. 11A ). - Thus, with respect to
FIGS. 9 , 9A the range of motion in the axial plane is about 180 degrees or about 90 degrees on each side of the centerline. InFIGS. 10 , 10A the range of motion in the Caudal/Cephalad orientation is about 4 mm or about 2 mm on each side of the centerline or about 24 degrees or about 12 degrees on each side of the centerline. InFIGS. 11 , 11A the range of motion in the coronal plane is about 40 degrees or about 20 degrees on each side of the centerline. -
FIGS. 12 , 13 depict yet another embodiment of theanchor system 102 of the invention where elements that are similar to elements of other embodiments and have similar reference numbers. - As can be seen in
FIG. 13 , this embodiment includes a lower cradle orcompressor element 220 that is similar to the cradle orcompressor element 220 of the embodiment ofFIG. 7 with thehead 110 similar to thehead 110 as seen inFIG. 7 . Thecompression sphere 200 is similar to thecompression sphere 200 inFIG. 7 with the compression sphere including a plurality of slits provided about the axis ofrotation 238 of thesphere 200. In this embodiment, theslits 202 have openings that alternate between facing the north pole of the axis of rotation of thesphere 200 and facing the south pole of the axis of rotation of thesphere 200. Alternatively, the slits can be provided in the sphere and have no opening relative to the north or south pole of the axis of rotation of thesphere 200. Still further, the slits can open relative to only one of the north or south poles. - In the embodiment of
FIGS. 12 , 13, there is also an upper cradle orcompressor element 240 which is positioned adjacent to the set screw 214 (see alsoFIG. 7 ). The upper cradle orcompressor element 240 has a generally cylindrical body which can slide in the cylindrical bore of thehead 110 with an upperend having fingers 242 extending therefrom. Thefingers 242 can spring over a bore formed in the lower surface of theset screw 214 in order to retain thecradle 240 relative to theset screw 214 and to allow thecradle 240 to rotate relative to theset screw 214. The lower surface of thecradle 240 includes aconcave surface 244 which can mate with ahorizontal rod head 110 and thehead 110 relative to thebone screw 108. If desired, theconcave surface 244 can be roughened to assist in locking thesystem 100. - Further, in
FIGS. 12 , 13, a retainingring 246 is depicted. The retaining ring can be force fit over theouter surface 218 of thehead 110, or pop over and snap under aridge 248 at thedistal end 212 of thehead 110, or can have internal threads that mate with external threads located on the outer surface of the 218 of thehead 110. With theanchor system 102 in place in a patient and with thehorizontal rod set screw 214 is tightened in order to lock the horizontal rod and the anchor system, the retainingring 246 can be attached to thehead 110 in order to prevent splaying of thehead 110 as theset screw 214 locks thesystem 110. - Further embodiments of the
anchor system 102 which can side load thehorizontal rods FIGS. 14 , 15, and 16, where similar elements from other embodiments of the anchor system are given similar numeral references. With respect to the embodiment inFIG. 15 , thehead side wall 224 includes a lateral orside opening 250 which communicates with thecylindrical bore 210 which is located inhead 110. The lateral or side opening preferably extends more than 180 degrees about the outer surface of the head. Theside opening 250 includes alip 252 and the side opening extends down below the lip into communication with thecylindrical bore 210 and follows the outline of theconcave surface 228 of thecradle 220. Accordingly, ahorizontal rod side opening 250 and urged downwardly into contact with theconcave surface 228 of thecradle 220. In this embodiment thecradle 220 includes a downward projectingpost 254. Also, this embodiment does not include a compression sphere, and instead thepin 190, which can have a larger diameter than apin 190 in other embodiments, comes in direct contact with thepost 254 when theset screw 112 locks theanchor system 100. If desired thepin 190 can have a roughenedsurface 256 to assist in the locking of theanchor system 100. As is evident fromFIGS. 14 , 15, 16, as this embodiment has aside loading head 110, the distal end of the head is a fully cylindrical without communicating with any lateral U-shaped slots of the other embodiments. Accordingly, this embodiment does not include any retaining ring or reinforced areas that can be used to prevent splaying. -
FIG. 17 depicts yet another embodiment of theanchor system 102 that has a lateral orside loading head 110. In this embodiment, acompression cylinder 258 is placed over thepin 190. Such acompression cylinder 258 may offer less freedom of motion of theanchor system 100 with added stability. Thecompression cylinder 258 can slide along thelongitudinal axis 260 of thepin 190, if desired. Thehead 110 can rotate about thepin 190 and thecompression cylinder 258. Thehead 110 can also slide or translate along thelongitudinal axis 260 of the pin as well as the longitudinal axis of thecompression cylinder 258.Compression cylinder 258 hasslits 262 that can be configured similarly as theslits 202 of the other embodiments of theanchor system 100 described and depicted herein. -
FIG. 18 depicts still another embodiment of theanchor system 100 that has a lateral orside loading head 110. This embodiment includes acompression sphere 200 provided over apin 190 which is similar to theother compression spheres 200 depicted and described herein. Accordingly, this embodiment has the freedom of motion described with respect to the other embodiments which use a compression sphere. - It is to be understood that although each embodiment of the anchor system does not necessarily depict all the elements of another embodiment of the anchor system, that one of ordinary skill in the art would be able to use elements of one embodiment of the anchor system in another embodiment of the anchor system.
- Embodiments of the
horizontal rod system 104 of the invention include the embodiments describes above, in addition to the embodiments that follow. An aspect of thehorizontal rod system 104 is to isolate theanchor system 102 and reduce the stress and forces on the anchor system. This aspect is accomplished by not transmitting such stresses and forces placed on the horizontal rod system by, for example, flexion, extension, rotation or bending of the spine to the anchor system. This aspect thus maintains the integrity of the placement of the anchor system in, for example, the spine and prevents loosening of the bone screw or bone hook of the anchor system. In addition, various horizontal rod systems can be used to control the rigidity, stiffness and/or springiness of thedynamic stabilization system 100 by the various elements that comprise the horizontal rod system. Further the horizontal rod system can be used to have one level of rigidity, stiffness and/or springiness in one direction and another level in a different direction. For example, the horizontal rod system can offer one level of stiffness in flexion of the spine and a different level of stiffness in extension of the spine. Additionally, the resistance to lateral bending can be controlled by the horizontal rod system. Select horizontal rod systems allow for more resistance to lateral bending with other select horizontal rod systems allow for less lateral bending. As discussed below, placement of the vertical rods also effects lateral bending. The more laterally the vertical rods are placed, the more stiff the embodiment is to lateral bending. - As is evident from the figures, the horizontal rod system connects to the heads of the anchor system without the vertical rod system connecting to the heads. Generally, two anchor systems are secured to each vertebral level with a horizontal rod system connected between the two anchor systems. This further ensures that less stress and force is placed on the anchor systems secured to each level and also enables dynamic stability of the vertebra of the spine. Accordingly, movement of the vertebra relative to each other vertebra, as the spine extends, flexes, rotates and bends, is stabilized by the horizontal rods and the
entire system 100 without ulacing excessive force or stress on the anchor system as there are no vertical rods that connect the anchor systems of one vertebra level with the anchor system of another vertebra. - With respect to
FIG. 19 throughFIG. 25 another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 304 of thedynamic stabilization system 300 is depicted as used with ananchor system 102 of the embodiment depicted inFIG. 1 . Also shown inFIGS. 19 , 19A, is thevertical rod system 306. Thehorizontal rod system 304 includes first and secondhorizontal rods FIG. 19A shows a second image of only thehorizontal rod 308 in a first undeployed position and thatFIG. 19 shows a deployed position with thehorizontal rod 308 connected withvertical rods 306 and, thus, theentire system 300. - The
horizontal rod 308 includes first and second alignedend rods rod 316 located between the first andsecond end rods horizontal rod 308 looks much like a yoke with the offset rod joining each of theend rods curved section first end rod 312 and the offsetrod 316 is afirst bore 322 which is aligned with thefirst end rod 312, and at the junction of thesecond end rod 314 and the offsetrod 316 is asecond bore 324 which is aligned with thesecond end rod 314 and, thus, aligned with thefirst end rod 312. Positioned in and extending from thefirst bore 322 is a first deflection rod orloading rod 326 and positioned in and extending from thesecond bore 324 is a second deflection rod orloading rod 328. As with the other deflection rods or loading rods, preferably deflection rods orloading rods system 300 is comprised of titanium, stainless steel, a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK or other biocompatible material. In addition to Nitinol or nickel-titanium (NiTi), other super elastic materials include copper-zinc-aluminum and copper-aluminum-nickel. However, for biocompatibility the nickel-titanium is the desired material. The super elastic material has been selected for the deflection rods as the stress or force/deflection chart for a super elastic material has a plateau where the force is relatively constant as the deflection increases. Stated differently, a super elastic rod has a load (y) axis/deflection (x) axis curve which has a plateau at a certain level where the load plateaus or flattens out with increased deflection. In other words, the rod continues to deflect with the load staying constant at the plateau. In one embodiment, the load plateau is about 250 Newtons to about 300 Newtons. It is to be understood that the plateau can be customized to the needs of the patient by the selection of the type and composition of the super elastic material. For some patients, the plateau should be lower, and, for others, the plateau should be higher. Accordingly, and, for example, at the plateau, additional force is not put on theanchor system 102 and, thus, additional force is not put on the area of implantation of thebone screw 108 and the surrounding bone of the spine where thebone screw 108 is implanted. The deflection rods orloading rods bores - The first and second deflection rods or
loading rods respective bores connector 330. The Y-shapedconnector 330 includes a base 332 which has opposed and alignedbores loading rods loading rods connector 330 includes first and second arms that preferably end in threadedbores vertical bar system 306 as described below. Just behind the threaded bores 342, 344 arerecesses 346, 348 (FIG. 24 ) which are shaped to accept the offsetrod 316 with thehorizontal rod 308 in the undeployed configuration depicted inFIG. 19A . In the undeployed configuration, thehorizontal rod 308 can be more easily implanted between the tissues and bones of the spine and, in particular, guided between the spinous processes. Once the firsthorizontal rod 308 is implanted, the Y-shapedconnector 330 can be deployed by rotating it about 90 degrees or as required by the anatomy of the spine of the patient and connected with thevertical rod system 306. - The second
horizontal rod 310 is similar to the secondhorizontal rod 116 of the embodiment ofFIG. 1 . This secondhorizontal rod 310 is preferably comprised of titanium or other biocompatible material and includes first andsecond mounts vertical rod system 306. Themounts respective recesses vertical rods vertical rod system 306. Themounts tabs vertical rods respective recesses tabs mounts - The first and second
vertical rods vertical rods connector 330 of the firsthorizontal bar 308 and the first and second vertical rods can be captured or otherwise secured to the secondhorizontal bar 310. -
FIGS. 26 , 27, andFIGS. 28 , 29 depict yet more alternative embodiments of the horizontal rod systems of the invention. Thehorizontal rod 370 inFIG. 26 , 27 is similar to thehorizontal rod 118 inFIG. 1 .Horizontal rod 370 includes amount 372 which has bores that can receive first and second deflection rods orloading rods loading rods -
FIGS. 28 , 29 depict ahorizontal rod 380 withfirst mount 382 andsecond mount 384. Each of themounts 382, 884, includes a bore that is substantially parallel to thehorizontal rod 380. First and second deflection rods orloading rods second mounts loading rods horizontal rod 380 and are directed toward each other. Alternatively, the deflection rods orloading rods mounts horizontal rod 380. -
FIGS. 30 , 31, 32 depict yet another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 390 of the invention which is similar to thehorizontal bar system 104 as depicted inFIG. 1 .Horizontal bar system 390 includes tapered deflection rods orloading rods mount 396 toward the ends of thehorizontal rod 390. As previously discussed the deflection rods or loading rods can taper continuously or in discrete steps and can also have an decreasing diameter from the ends of the deflection rods or loading rods towards themount 396. In other words, a reverse taper than what is depicted inFIG. 30 . Connected to the deflection rod orloading rods vertical rods vertical rods loading rods - The conically shaped or tapered deflection rods or loading rods can be formed by drawing or grinding the material which is preferably a super elastic material. The tapered shape of the deflection rods or loading rods distributes the load or forces placed by the spine on the system evenly over the relatively short length of the deflection rods or loading rods as the rods extend from the central mount outwardly toward the ends of the horizontal rod. In this embodiment, in order to be operatively positioned relative to the spine and between the anchor systems, the deflection rods or loading rods are less than half the length of the horizontal rods.
-
FIG. 30 depicts thevertical rods horizontal rod 390 and with thevertical rods horizontal rod 390. In this position thehorizontal rod 390 can be more conveniently directed through the bone and tissue of the spine and, for example, directed between the spinous processes to the implant position. Once in position, thevertical rods horizontal rod 390 as depicted inFIG. 31 . Accordingly, this embodiment can be inserted from the side of the spine in the undeployed configuration depicted inFIG. 30 and then the vertical rods can be rotated or deployed by about 90 degrees (fromFIG. 30 toFIG. 31 ) each into the coronal plane of the patient. The vertical rods are also free to rotate about 180 degrees about the deflection rods and in the sagittal plane of patient. This allows this embodiment to conform to the different sagittal contours that may be encountered relative to the spine of a patient. The deflection rods or loading rods are rigidly connected to the horizontal rod allowing for an easier surgical technique as sections of the spine and, in particular, the spinous processes and associated ligaments and tissues do not have to be removed in order to accommodate theimplantation system 100. The moving action of the system, and, in particular, the flexing of the deflection rods and the motion of the vertical rods connected to the deflection rods or loading rods, takes place about the spinous processes and associated tissues and ligaments, and, thus, the spinous processes do not interfere with this motion. Further, having the horizontal rods more lateral than central also allows for a more simple surgical technique through, for example, a Wiltse approach. - To assist in implantation, a
cone 406 can be slipped over the end of thehorizontal rod 390 and thevertical rod 402 to assist in urging the tissues and bone associated with the spine out of the way. Once the horizontal rod is implanted thecone 406 can be removed. Thecone 406 includes anend 408 which can be pointed or bulbous and thecone 406 has an increasing diameter in the direction to thesleeve 410 portion of thecone 406. The sleeve can be cylindrical and receive the end of the horizontal rod and the end of the deflection rod orloading rod 402. -
FIG. 32 depicts how the connectors 412, 414 are secured to therespective deflection rods deflection rod 392. The connectors 412, 414 can snap over and be retained between respective pairs of flanges. -
FIG. 33 depicts yet another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 430 of the invention. Thehorizontal rod system 430 includeshorizontal rod 432 which is preferably comprised of a super elastic material such as Nitinol. Thehorizontal rod 432 includes a generallycentral platform 434, and on each side of thecentral platform 434 are first and second upwardly facing scallops or recesses 436, 438. On each side of the upwardly facing scallop orrecess 436 are downwardly facing scallops or recesses 440, 442. On each side of the upwardly facing scallop orrecess 438 are downwardly facing scallops or recesses 444, 446. Theplatform 434 accepts a connector for connecting the horizontal rod to vertical rods (FIG. 40 ) as will be explained below, and thescallops platform 434 act as a spring and thescallop platform 434 acts as a spring. These springs assist the platform in carrying the load that the spine can place on the horizontal rod and isolate theanchor systems 102 from that load. That isolation has the advantage of preventing loosening of the anchor system as implanted in the patient. It is to be understood that by varying the pattern of the scallops, that the stiffness or rigidity of the horizontal bar can be varied and customized for each patient. Fewer scallops will generally result in a more stiff horizontal bar and more scallops will generally result in a less rigid horizontal bar. Additionally, the stiffness can be different depending on the direction of the force that is placed on the horizontal bar depending on the orientation and location of the scallops. For the embodiment depicted inFIG. 33 , with thescallops scallops platform 434 is and tapering to the ends of thehorizontal rod 432, or having a large diameter at the ends of thehorizontal rod 432, tapering to a smaller diameter at theplatform 434. In this embodiment with a substantially uniform diameter, the scallops are formed within the uniform diameter. In other forms, the scallops are molded into the horizontal rod or machined out of the preformed horizontal rod. With this configuration, the horizontal rod is more easily inserted into the spine and between bones and tissues of the spine. Further, this horizontal rod can be more easily delivered to the spine through a cannula due to the substantially uniform diameter. For purposes of forming the scallops a machining technique known as wire electric discharge machining or wire EDM can be used. Thus, an approach for shaping the super elastic material is through wire EDM followed by electro-polishing. Additionally, the super elastic material in this and the other embodiments can be cold rolled, drawn or worked in order to increase the super elastic property of the material. - In this embodiment, the deflection takes place almost exclusively in the middle portion of the horizontal rod and principally at the platform and spring thus relieving the load or force on the ends of the horizontal rod and on the anchor system/bone interface.
- Accordingly, in this preferred embodiment, there are two superior scallops pointing upwardly having a relatively gentler radius compared to the tighter radii of the inferior scallops pointing downwardly. It is to be understood that in this preferred embodiment, the inferior scallops are not symmetrical the way the superior scallops are. The lateral most cuts in both of the most lateral inferior scallops are steep and not radiused. These cuts allow the rod to bend at these points enhancing the spring effect. The ratio of the radii of the superior scallop to the inferior scallop in this preferred embodiment is two to one. The result is to create two curved and flat (in cross-section) sections, one on each side of the platform and these two flat sections in this preferred embodiment have about the same uniform thickness. Again, in this embodiment, the scallops and the platform is formed into an otherwise uniformly diametered cylindrical rod. Accordingly, none of these formed elements in this preferred embodiment extend beyond the diameter of the rod. In this preferred embodiment, the diameter of the horizontal rod is about 4 mm.
- If desired, the rod could be bent in such a way that the platform and/or the scallops extend outside of the diameter of the cylindrical rod. However that configuration would not be as suitable for implantation through a cannula or percutaneously as would the horizontal rod as shown in
FIG. 33 and described above. - It is to be understood that to have enhanced flexibility, that the torsion rod and connector elements used in the horizontal rod embodiment of
FIG. 1 can be used with the horizontal rod ofFIG. 33 . In this embodiment (FIG. 47 ), the connector is secured to the platform of the horizontal rod ofFIG. 33 with the two deflection rods or loading rods extending toward the ends of the horizontal rod ofFIG. 33 and about parallel to that horizontal rod. - Another embodiment of the
horizontal rod 433 is depicted inFIG. 33A . In this embodiment thehorizontal rod 433 is similar to the horizontal rod inFIG. 33 with the exception that the platform and scallops are replaced with a reduced diametercentral potion 448. Each end of thecentral portion 448 gradually increases in diameter until the diameter is the full diameter of the ends of thehorizontal rod 433. This embodiment can be formed of a super elastic material and ground to the reduced diameter shape from a rod stock of the super elastic material. The rod stock could also be drawn to this shape. Generally after such operations the horizontal rod would be electro polished. In this embodiment, a connector such as the connector shown inFIG. 40 could be used to connect vertical rods to preferably the middle of thecentral portion 448. -
FIGS. 34A , 34B, 34C depict yet an alternative embodiment of ahorizontal rod 280 such ashorizontal rod 116 as shown inFIG. 1 that is meant to rigidly hold the vertical rods secured thereto. Themounts horizontal rod 280 include a body that can be formed with therod 280. The mounts are then provided with amovable capture arm screws -
FIG. 40 depicts adynamic stabilization system 450 that uses thehorizontal rod system 454 of the invention. Thesystem 450 additionally uses theanchor system 102 as depicted in FIG. 1 and the otherhorizontal rod 310 as depicted inFIGS. 19 , 34. Aconnector 452 is secured to theplatform 434 of thehorizontal rod 454 and vertical rods are connected to the connector and to the otherhorizontal rod 310. InFIG. 40 for thehorizontal rod 454, the scallops are formed by bending a bar and not by forming the scallops in a straight horizontal bar as depicted in thehorizontal bar 432 ofFIG. 33 . Thehorizontal rod 430 ofFIG. 33 could also be used in the embodiment ofFIG. 40 . -
FIG. 35 depicts an alternative embodiment of ahorizontal rod system 460 of the invention.Horizontal rod system 460 includes ahorizontal rod 462 with acentral platform 464 and first and second spring regions 466, 468 located on either side of theplatform 464. Extending outwardly from each spring region are respective ends of thehorizontal rod 462. The spring regions include coils that are wound about the longitudinal axis of thehorizontal rod 462. If desired, the entirehorizontal rod 462 can be comprised of a rod wound around a longitudinal axis with theplatform 464 and the ends of the horizontal rod being more tightly wound and/or with a smaller diameter and the spring regions 466, 468 more loosely wound and/or with a larger diameter. Such ahorizontal rod 462 can preferably be comprised of super elastic material such as Nitinol or alternatively titanium or other biocompatible material which demonstrates the ability to flex repeatedly. -
FIG. 36 depicts yet another alternative embodiment of ahorizontal rod system 480 which includes first and secondhorizontal rods 482, 484 which can be flat rods if desired. Thehorizontal rods 482, 484, includespring region central platform 486 and between thehorizontal rods 482, 484 arespacers horizontal rods 482, 484 in order to form thehorizontal rod system 480. Thissystem 480 can be comprised of super elastic materials or other materials that are biocompatible with the patient. -
FIG. 37 depicts another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 500 including ahorizontal rod 502. In this embodiment, recesses 504 are formed in the horizontal rod in order to define the stiffness of thehorizontal rod 502. This system can be formed of a super elastic material or other biocompatible material. -
FIG. 38 depicts still another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 520 of the invention with ahorizontal rod 522. Thehorizontal rod 522 includesdimples 524 distributed around and along thehorizontal rod 522. As this other embodiment, depending on the distribution of the dimples, the stiffness of thehorizontal rod 522 can be determined. Further is more dimples are placed on the lower surface than on the upper surface, when placed in a patient, thehorizontal rod 522 would tend to be stiffer in extension and less stiff in flexion. Thishorizontal rod 522 can also be made of a super elastic material or other biocompatible material. -
FIG. 39 depicts another embodiment of thehorizontal rod system 530 of the invention which has ahorizontal rod 532 which is similar to thehorizontal rod 432 ofFIG. 33 and, thus, similar elements will number with similar numbers. In addition, theends horizontal rod 532 are curved so as to create hooks that can fit around portions of the vertebra so as to secure thehorizontal rod 532 to the vertebra. In this embodiment, preferably the rod is comprised of super elastic material or other biocompatible material. In order to implant the rod, the hooks at ends 534, 536 are sprung open and allowed to spring closed around the vertebra. An anchor system which includes a hook (as discussed above) could be used with this system. -
FIGS. 39A , 39B are similar toFIG. 39 . InFIGS. 39A , 39B, ahorizontal rod 532 is held in place relative to the spine by twoanchor systems 102. The anchor systems are similar to the anchor systems depicted inFIG. 1 . Theanchor systems 102 include an anchor orbone screw 108 or bone hook 109 with spikes 111 (FIG. 39B ), as well as thehead 110 into which the horizontal rod is received. Aset screw 112 secures the horizontal rod relative to the anchor systems. -
FIG. 41 depicts another embodiment of thedynamic stabilization system 540 of the invention. This embodiment includes sideloading anchor systems 542 as described above, although top loading anchor systems would also be appropriate for this embodiment. In this embodiment thehorizontal rods horizontal rods second connectors Vertical rods second connectors points 556 with screws, rivets or other devices so that the connection is rigid or, alternatively, so that thevertical rods - Embodiments of vertical rod systems of the invention such as
vertical rod system 106 are presented throughout this description of the invention. Generally, the vertical rod systems are comprised of vertical rods that can be pivoted or inserted into position after the horizontal rods are deployed in the patient. The vertical rods are preferably connected to the horizontal rods and not to the anchor systems in order to reduce the forces and stress on the anchor systems. The vertical rods are connected to the horizontal rod systems, which horizontal rod systems include mechanisms as described herein that reduce the forces and stresses on the anchor systems. The vertical rods can generally be comprised of titanium, stainless steel, PEEK or other biocompatible material. Should more flexibility be desired, the vertical rods can be comprised of a super elastic material. -
FIGS. 42 and 43 depict multi-leveldynamic stabilization systems systems system 560 ofFIG. 42 the middle levelhorizontal rod 562 is secured to a vertebra and includes ahorizontal rod system 104 having first and second deflection rods or loading rods such as that depicted inFIG. 4 , whereby a first pair ofvertical rods 564 can extend upwardly from horizontal rod system and a second pair ofvertical rods 566 can extend downwardly from the horizontal rod system. The vertical rods that extend upwardly are connected to an upperhorizontal rod 568 such as depicted inFIG. 34 and the vertical rods that extend downward are connected to a lowerhorizontal rod 568 such as depicted inFIG. 34 . The upperhorizontal rod 568 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located above the vertebra to which the middle levelhorizontal rod 562 is secured. The lowerhorizontal rod 570 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located below the vertebra to which the middle levelhorizontal rod 562 is secured. This embodiment offers more stability for the middle level vertebra relative to the upper and lower vertebra while allowing for extension, flexion, rotation and bending relative to the middle level vertebra. -
FIG. 43 depicts another multi-leveldynamic stabilization system 580. All of these systems use anchor systems as described herein. Insystem 580 ofFIG. 43 , the middle levelhorizontal rod 582 is secured to a vertebra and includes a horizontal rod such as that depicted inFIG. 34 . The upper and lowerhorizontal rods horizontal rod 114 including the deflection rods or loading rods and deflection rod or loading rod mount depicted inFIG. 3 . Vertical rods are pivotally and rotationally mounted to the upper and lowerhorizontal rods horizontal rod 582. The upperhorizontal rod 586 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located above the vertebra to which the middle levelhorizontal rod 582 is secured. The lowerhorizontal rod 590 is secured with anchor systems to a vertebra located below the vertebra to which the middle levelhorizontal rod 582 is secured. This embodiment offers more dynamic stability for the upper and lower vertebra relative to the middle level vertebra while allowing for extension, flexion, rotation and bending relative to the middle level vertebra. Alternatively, the middle levelhorizontal rod 582 has four mounts instead of the two mounts depicted inFIG. 34 orFIG. 34A so that a first pair ofvertical rods 588 can extend upwardly from a lowerhorizontal rod 590 and a second pair ofvertical rods 566 extending downwardly from the upperhorizontal rod 586, can be secured to the middle levelhorizontal rod 582. -
FIGS. 44 , 45 depict one and two level systems that are more preferably used for fusion. The system 600 depicted inFIG. 44 resembles the system depicted inFIG. 41 . When PEEK is used for thehorizontal rods horizontal rods vertical rods 606 can be rigidly attached to the horizontal rods through the use of a horizontal rod with mounts, as depicted inFIG. 34 , so that thevertical rods 606 do not move or pivot with respect to the horizontal rods. -
FIG. 45 depicts a twolevel system 620 that is more preferably used for a two level fusion. Each level can use an anchor system for example described with respect toanchor system 102 ofFIG. 1 . Thehorizontal rods FIG. 34 with either two vertical rod mounts for the upper and lowerhorizontal rods horizontal rod 624. For this embodiment, thevertical rods FIG. 34 so that thevertical rods Vertical rods 628 extend between the upper and middlehorizontal rods vertical rods 630 extend between the middle and lowerhorizontal rods system 620 depicted inFIG. 44 resembles the system depicted inFIG. 41 , but with respect to three levels. When PEEK is used for thehorizontal rods horizontal rods - With respect to
FIG. 45 , to ease the transition to a one level fused area of the spine this two level system can be modified by replacing thehorizontal rod 622 with a horizontal rod 115 (FIGS. 45A , 45B), which is much likehorizontal rod 104 with deflection orloading rods FIG. 1 . This embodiment is depicted inFIG. 45A . Thus, fusion is accomplished between the two lowerhorizontal rods 117 which rods are like those depicted inFIG. 34 , or likehorizontal rods 116 inFIG. 1 , and made of, preferably, titanium, and flexibility is provided by the upperhorizontal rod 115 that is likehorizontal rod 114 with deflection or loading rods that are shown inFIG. 1 . Accordingly, there is more gradual transition from a healthier portion of the spine located abovehorizontal rod 115 throughhorizontal rod 115 to the fused part of the spine located betweenhorizontal rod 624 andhorizontal rod 606 ofFIG. 45 or between the horizontal rods 117 (FIG. 45A ). - Various embodiments of the dynamic stabilization system have been shown and described above.
FIGS. 48-85 provide further embodiments of the dynamic stabilization system. Referring now toFIGS. 48 and 49 , perspective and posterior views of another embodiment of adynamic stabilization system 700 can be seen. Generally, as with the embodiments described above, thedynamic stabilization system 700 includes ananchor system 702, ahorizontal rod system 704 and avertical rod system 706. For these embodiments horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a human patient that is standing and vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing. Thehorizontal rod system 704 can include a firsthorizontal rod 708, a secondhorizontal rod 710 and adeflection rod system 712. Thevertical rod system 706 can includevertical rods 716 which are used withseparate connectors 718 to attach thevertical rods 716 to thedeflection rod system 712 attached to the firsthorizontal rod 708 and can useconnector 1210 to attachvertical rods 716 to the secondhorizontal rod 710. - As shown in
FIGS. 48-49 , thedeflection rod system 712 is attached, in this embodiment, to the center of the firsthorizontal rod 708 within amount 714, while being connected to thevertical rods 716 at theends deflection rod system 712. Thedeflection rod system 712 is positioned about parallel to the firsthorizontal rod 708, the firsthorizontal rod 708 being attached to theanchor systems 702 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of theanchor system 702. Preferably, thehorizontal rods FIG. 50A ) and a polymer such as PEEK (outer shell 721), for example). In this configuration, thehorizontal rod system 704 and, in particular, thedeflection rod system 712 shares and distributes the load resulting from the motions of the body of the patient. Various embodiments of thevertical rods 716, theconnectors deflection rod system 712, and thehorizontal rods dynamic stabilization system 700 as will be described in greater detail below. -
FIGS. 50A-55B illustrate an embodiment of adeflection rod system 712, avertical rod 716 and aconnector 718 used within thedynamic stabilization system 700. Referring now toFIGS. 50A-55B , thedeflection rod system 712 includes aninner deflection rod 720 having afirst end 722 and asecond end 724, a retainingring 726 and a spherical ball or joint 728. As will be further described with regard toFIGS. 68-71 , thedeflection rod system 712 includes aninner rod 720 preferably made of, for example, a super elastic material such as Nitinol, and anouter shell 721 made of a polymer such as PEEK. In this embodiment, thefirst end 722 of theinner deflection rod 720 of thedeflection rod system 712 can be passed through the retainingring 726 and attached to the spherical ball or joint 728 (as shown inFIG. 51 ) using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example. In this embodiment, the spherical ball or joint 728 is only connected to thedeflection rod 720 and not to theouter shell 721 of thedeflection rod system 712. The spherical joint 728 can then be positioned within thesocket chamber 768 of theconnector 718. Once the spherical joint 728 is positioned within theconnector 718, the retainingring 726 can be threaded, fused, glued, press fit and/or laser welded, for example, to theconnector 718, thereby securing thedeflection rod 712 to the connector 718 (as shown inFIG. 52 ) in a ball joint type connection. In this configuration, thedeflection rod system 712 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center which corresponds with the center of the spherical ball or joint 728. - Referring to
FIGS. 51 and 52 , thevertical rod 716 used in this embodiment of thedynamic stabilization system 700 includes ahead 730 having anaperture 732 that can accept ascrew 734 and a rectangular shell orrecess 736 for accepting theconnector 718. Turning additionally toFIGS. 53 and 54 , theaperture 732 of thevertical rod 716 includes afirst bore 738 and asecond bore 740. Thefirst bore 738 of theaperture 732 can be configured to encase thehead 742 of theconnector screw 734 while thesecond section 740 can be configured to capture theneck 735 of thescrew 734. Accordingly, thefirst section 738 of theaperture 732 has a larger diameter than thesecond bore 740 of theaperture 732, the overall shape of theaperture 732 conforming to the shape of theconnector screw 734. - Referring back to
FIG. 52 , the rectangular shell orrecess 736 of thevertical rod head 730 is configured to fixedly receive and encase theconnector 718. Accordingly, the inner surface of the rectangular shell orrecess 736 includes atop surface 746, inner side surfaces 748, 750, and inner front andback surfaces front 752 and back 754 inner surfaces are flat and rectangular in shape, while the inner sides surfaces 748, 750 are flat with a saddle-shaped cut-out which can allow for movement of thedeflection rod system 712 and/or thevertical rod 716 relative to each other. Also in this embodiment, thebottom surface 756 of thehead 730 is elevated from thebottom surface 758 of thevertical rod shaft 760 in order to provide a space for theconnector 718 to be attached to the bottom of thehead 730. The extent of elevation can vary depending on the size of theconnector 718 attached thereto. - Referring back to
FIG. 51 , theconnector 718 used in this embodiment of thedynamic stabilization system 700 includes a threadedaperture 762 for accepting theconnector screw 734 and ahousing 764 for accepting thedeflection rod system 712. In its deployed position, theaperture 762 within theconnector 718 is lined up with and placed adjacent to theaperture 732 located on thevertical rod 716, theconnector screw 734 being inserted into bothapertures connector 718 to thevertical rod 716. -
FIGS. 51 and 52 further illustrates thehousing 764 of theconnector 718 as having a generally cylindricalexterior surface 765 with a flattop surface 766. Thehousing 764 also includes anopening 770 on thefront face 772 of theconnector 718 leading to a socket orspherical chamber 768 formed within thehousing 764. The socket orspherical chamber 768 can be configured to engage the spherical ball or joint 728 of thedeflection rod system 712. In this configuration, the spherical ball or joint 728 of thedeflection rod system 712 is allowed to be pivotally engaged to theconnector 718 within the socket orspherical chamber 768 while thedeflection rod 720 is allowed to extend away from theconnector 718 through theopening 770 of thefront face 772 of thehousing 764. The retainingring 726 holds theball 728 in place in theconnector 718. - Referring back to
FIG. 52 , as theaperture 732 in thevertical rod 716 is aligned with theaperture 762 in theconnector 718, the vertical rod recess or shell 736 can also be aligned with thehousing 764 of theconnector 718. Theconnector housing 764 can be inserted into the vertical rod recess orshell 736 until theconnector housing 764 engages the top 750 andsides vertical rod shell 736. In this configuration, movement of theconnector 718 within thehead 730 of thevertical rod 716 is minimized and/or eliminated. This configuration also allows thevertical rod shell 736 to absorb any pressure resulting from movements of thedeflection rod system 712 andvertical rod 716 during use, thereby limiting the pressure placed on thescrew 734 during use. -
FIG. 55A further illustrates the connection between thedeflection rod system 712, theconnector 718 and thevertical rod 716 in this embodiment. As can be seen inFIG. 55A , theretainer ring 726 has an outer diameter which is slightly smaller than the diameter of theopening 770 on thefront face 772 of theconnector 718. Theretainer ring 726 has a flatfront surface 774, while the inner surface of the retainingring 726 includes acurved section 776, the radius of curvature for thecurved section 776 being the same as the radius of curvature of the spherical ball or joint 728. Accordingly, the retainingring 726 can be inserted into theopening 770 through thefront face 772 of theconnector 718 until it is in sliding engagement with the spherical joint ball or 728. Theconnector 718 can also include aridge 778 on its inner surface which limits the depth of insertion of theretainer ring 726 into theconnector 718. Theretainer ring 726 can then be screwed, fused, glued, force fit, and/or laser welded to theconnector 718. -
FIG. 55B illustrates an alternative fastening technique. In this embodiment, the spherical ball or joint 728 is inserted into theconnector 718 through anopening 780 on theback face 780 of theconnector 718 while thedeflection rod 720 is inserted into theconnector 718 through anopening 770 on thefront face 772 of theconnector 718. Once the parts have been inserted, the spherical joint 728 and thedeflection rod 720 are connected within theconnector 718. Alternatively, the spherical ball or joint 728 and thedeflection rod 720 can be preassembled by, for example, screwing, gluing, force fitting and/or laser welding before the spherical joint 728 is placed in theconnector 718. Aretainer ring 726 can then be used to prevent the spherical joint 728 from exiting theconnector 718 through theopening 780 on theback face 782 of theconnector 718. Theretainer ring 726 may be screwed, fused, glued, force fit and/or laser welded to theconnector 718. Other fastening techniques are also within the scope and spirit of the invention. - Once the
deflection rod system 712 is secured to theconnector 718, theconnector 718 can then be secured to thevertical rod 716 as shown inFIG. 53 . In this configuration, theconnector 718 is mated with thehead 730 of thevertical rod 716. When mating theconnector 718 to thehead 730 of thevertical rod 716, theaperture 732 in thevertical rod 716 is aligned with theaperture 762 of theconnector 718. Theconnector screw 734 then can secure thevertical rod 716 to theconnector 718. -
FIGS. 56A-59 illustrate another embodiment of adeflection rod system 800, avertical rod 802 and aconnector 804 that can be used within thedynamic stabilization system 700. In this embodiment, a cylindrically-shapedconnector 804 including aU-shaped slot 810 is used to attach thevertical rod 802 to thedeflection rod system 800 as will be described in greater detail below. - Referring now to
FIGS. 56A and 56B , theconnector 804 in this embodiment is shown as including acylindrical body 806 having an internalcylindrical bore 808, aU-shaped slot 810 and alock tab 812. Thedeflection rod system 800 in this embodiment includes a deflection rod 814 (preferably made of Nitinol, Niti or other super elastic material) having an outer shell 815 (preferably made of PEEK or other comparable polymer) and a spherical ball or joint 816. Theconnector 804 includes asocket chamber 818 which is formed within theU-shaped slot 810 for receiving the spherical ball or joint 816 of thedeflection rod system 800. Once the spherical ball or joint 816 of thedeflection rod system 800 is positioned within thesocket chamber 818, theexterior panel 820 of thelock tab 812 can be moved from its open, undeployed configuration (as shown inFIG. 56A ) to its closed, deployed configuration (as shown inFIG. 56B ), thereby closing the opening of theU-shaped slot 810 around the spherical ball or joint 816 of thedeflection rod system 800 to secure thedeflection rod system 800 to theconnector 804. The specific mechanism employed to move theexterior panel 820 of thelock tab 812 in this embodiment of the invention is illustrated inFIG. 59 , which is described in greater detail below. In the deployed configuration of theconnector 804, thedeflection rod system 800 is pivotally engaged to theconnector 804 within thesocket chamber 818 while thedeflection rod shaft 814 extends away from theconnector 804. Consequently, thevertical rod 802 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center that corresponds with the center of thespherical joint 816. -
FIG. 57 illustrates thevertical rod 802 used in this embodiment of the invention. Thevertical rod 802 includes avertical rod shaft 822, a threadedband 824, and anend cap 826 having acavity 828 for accepting thelock tab 812 of theconnector 804. In this embodiment, the threadedband 824 and theend cap 826 are both located adjacent to thefirst end 830 of thevertical rod shaft 822. The diameter of the threadedband 824 can be greater than the diameter of thevertical rod shaft 822 and theend cap 826. In an embodiment, thevertical rod 802 may not include anend cap 826 at all, in which case the threadedband 824 will include a cavity for accepting thelock tab 814 of theconnector 804. -
FIG. 58 provides a detailed illustration of thelock tab 812 used in this embodiment of the invention. Thelock tab 812 includes theexterior panel 820, acylindrical platform 832 and aknob 834. In this embodiment, theexterior panel 820 can include a convexouter surface 836 and a concaveinner surface 838. Thecylindrical platform 832 is located along theinner surface 838 of theexterior panel 820, thetop surface 840 of thecylindrical platform 832 being parallel to thetop surface 842 of theexterior panel 820. Theknob 834 is centrally located along thetop surface 842 of thecylindrical platform 832. In use within theconnector 804, theknob 834 can be used to fasten thelock tab 812 to thevertical rod 802, whereby theinner surface 838 of theexterior panel 820 and theknob 834 both conform to the shape of theend cap 826 of thevertical rod 802 as shown inFIG. 59 . In order to secure theknob 834 to thevertical rod 802 theknob 834 includes acylindrical base 844 having a bevel-shapedcollar 846 and aU-shaped slit 848. As theknob 834 is inserted into thecavity 828 within theend cap 826 of thevertical rod 802, theU-shaped slit 848 allows theends 850 of theknob 834 to pinch in until thecollar 846 extends past the top of theend cap 826 of the hollowvertical rod 802. Once thecollar 846 extends past the top of theend cap 826, thecollar 846 catches under lip 84 and returns to its original unpinched configuration, thereby securing thevertical rod 802 to the lock tab 812 (as shown inFIG. 59 ). - Referring to
FIG. 59 , a cross-sectional view of thedeflection rod system 800 and thevertical rod 802 within theconnector 804 can be seen. Theconnector 804 has an internalcylindrical bore 808 for accepting thevertical rod 802 which is positioned substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of thecylindrical body 806. The interior surface of thecylindrical body 806 includesthreads 852 for engaging the threadedband 824 of thevertical rod 802. In this embodiment, thevertical rod 802 can be screwed into thecylindrical body 806 until theend cap 826 of thevertical rod 802 is placed in sliding engagement with thelock tab 812knob 834. Engagement of thevertical rod 802 to thelock tab 812 is accomplished, as set forth above, by inserting theknob 834 into thecavity 828 of theend cap 826 of thevertical rod 802 until thecollar 846 of theknob 834 extends past thelip 847 of theend cap 826, whereby thecollar 846 of theknob 834 secures thevertical rod 802 to thelock tab 812. In this configuration, theend cap 826 of thevertical rod 802 is free to rotate around theknob 834 of thelock tab 812 while thevertical rod 802 remains engaged to thelock tab 812. Once thevertical rod 802 is placed in engagement with thelock tab 812, thelock tab 812 can be moved up and down by way of threaded movement of thevertical rod 802 within thecylindrical body 806 of theconnector 804. In the deployed configuration of theconnector 804, the spherical ball or joint 816 of thedeflection rod system 800 is inserted into theU-shaped slot 810 of the connector. Once theball 816 of thedeflection rod system 800 is positioned therein, theexterior panel 820 and thelocking tab 812 can be moved down to block the opening of theU-shaped slot 810 of theconnector 804. In an embodiment, the lowerinner surface 854 of thelock tab 812 can be concave and rounded to engage the spherical ball or joint 816 of thedeflection rod system 800. -
FIGS. 60-64 illustrate another embodiment of thedeflection rod system 900, thevertical rod 902 and theconnector 904 used within thedynamic stabilization system 700. As shown inFIG. 60 , thedeflection rod system 900 used in this embodiment includes adeflection rod 906 having anouter shell 907, thedeflection rod 900 further including spool-shapedend caps 908 attached thereto, havingcircumferential retaining ridges 915, attached to the ends of theend cap 908. Theend cap 908 can be screwed, glued, force fit, fused and/or laser welded onto thedeflection rod 906. In this embodiment, the spool-shapedcap 908 is not connected to theshell 907. Instead, theshell 907 extends along therod 906 and is short of theend cap 908. As with other embodiments, thedeflection rod 906 can be comprised of a super elastic material and theshell 907 can be comprised of a polymer such as PEEK. Theshell 907 protects therod 906 and adds rigidity to thedeflection rod system 900, and therod 906 includes the deflection and recovery properties of a super elastic material. One of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate that other embodiments of thedeflection rod system 900, such as the ones illustrated inFIGS. 68-71 or any other embodiments described herein, can be used in this embodiment of thedynamic stabilization system 700 without deviating from the scope of this invention. -
FIG. 60 illustrates theconnector 904 used in an embodiment of the invention. Theconnector 904 can be seen as including a C-shapedslot 910 for accepting the spool-shapedend cap 908 of thedeflection rod system 900 and a slidingtab 912 which can close the opening of the C-shapedslot 910 to secure the spool-shapedend cap 908 of thedeflection rod system 900 to theconnector 904. - Referring now to
FIG. 61 , a detailed illustration of this embodiment of theconnector 904 is provided. Theconnector 904 can be seen as including the C-shapedslot 910 including twochannels 914 adjacent to the side surfaces 916 of theconnector 904. Thechannels 914 allow the C-shapedslot 910 to conform to the shape of theend cap 908 of the deflection rod system 900 (as shown inFIG. 60 ) and receives the circumferential retainingridges 915 of theend cap 908. This configuration defines the movement of thedeflection rod 900 within theconnector 904. Theconnector 904 further includes L-shapedtab restraints 918 having a pair ofgrooves 920 along the inner surface of thetab restraints 918 as well as agroove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shapedslot 910. The L-shapedtab restraints 918 andvarious grooves tab 912 to theconnector 904 as will be described in greater detail below. - Referring now to
FIG. 62A andFIG. 62B , the embodiment of the slidingtab 912 shown inFIG. 60 is illustrated in greater detail. The slidingtab 912 of this embodiment includes afirst end 924 and asecond end 926. The slidingtab 912 further including aU-shaped slot 928 atend 924, side knobs 930, abottom lip 932 atend 926 and arear restraint 934. TheU-shaped slot 928, located adjacent to thefirst end 924 of the slidingtab 912, is positioned parallel to the longitudinal axis of the slidingtab 912. TheU-shaped slot 928 allows thefirst end 924 of the slidingtab 912 to pinch together within the L-shapedtab restraints 918 of the connector 904 (shown inFIG. 61 ) as the slidingtab 912 is being placed in its deployed position. The side knobs 930 are located on the side surfaces 936 of the slidingtab 912 and conform to thegrooves 920 along the inner surface of thetab restraints 918 of the connector 904 (shown inFIG. 61 ). Thebottom lip 932, located adjacent to thesecond end 924 of the slidingtab 912, conforms to and can be received in thegroove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shapedslot 910 of the connector 904 (shown inFIG. 61 ). Referring toFIG. 62B , theback surface 938 of the slidingtab 912 can be seen as including acurved section 940 which can be configured to conform to the cylindrical shape of the spool-shapedend cap 908. Theback surface 938 of the slidingtab 912 can also include therear restraint 934. In this embodiment, therear restraint 934 can be inserted into a slot 948 within the vertical rod 902 (shown inFIG. 64 ) to position thevertical rod 902 relative to theconnector 904 for deployment into a patient. The side knobs 930 and thebottom lip 932 also facilitate securing the slidingtab 912 to the connector 904 (as shown inFIG. 63 ). -
FIG. 63 illustrates theconnector 904 in its deployed configuration. As shown, thedeflection rod system 900 is secured to theconnector 904 within the C-shapedslot 910 using the slidingtab 912. In this configuration, the side knobs 930 are mated with thegrooves 920 along the inner surface of thetab restraints 918 and thebottom lip 932 is mated with thegroove 922 along the lower inner surface of the C-shapedslot 910, thereby locking the slidingtab 912 into its deployed position within theconnector 904 and locking theconnector 904 about the spool-shapedend cap 904. Accordingly, the vertical rod can rotate about theend cap 904 and thus rotate about the longitudinal axis of thetorsion rod system 900. - As shown in
FIG. 64 , thevertical rod 902 used in this embodiment of the invention includes a vertical rod shaft 944, a first slot 946 for accepting theconnector 904 and a second slot 948 for accepting therear restraint 934 of the slidingtab 912. Thevertical rod 902 also includes an aperture 950 for accepting a screw, rivet or pin. In this embodiment, the back of theconnector 904 can be shaped to conform to the shape of thevertical rod 902. Accordingly, thevertical rod 902 can be mated with theconnector 904 as shown inFIG. 60 , and a screw, rivet or pin can be inserted through the aperture 950 of thevertical rod 902 into theconnector 904 to secure thevertical rod 902 to theconnector 904 and/or allow thevertical rod 902 to pivot about the screw, rivet or pin (see arrows 905) and relative to thehorizontal rod 900. Therear restraint 934 can be held in the slot 948 prior to the slidingtab 912 being lockingly deployed to capture the spool-shapedend cap 918 in the C-shapedslot 910. -
FIGS. 65-67 illustrate yet another embodiment of thedeflection rod system 1000, thevertical rod 1002 and theconnector 1004 which can be used as a part of thedynamic stabilization system 700. Referring now toFIG. 65 , thedeflection rod system 1000 can be seen as including adeflection rod 1006 having spool-shapedend caps 1008 attached to the ends of theshaft 1006 andshell 1007 similar to the embodiment depicted inFIG. 60 . It is noted that one of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate that other embodiments of thedeflection rod system 1000, such as the ones illustrated inFIGS. 68-71 or any other embodiments described herein, can be used in this embodiment of thedynamic stabilization system 700 without deviating from the scope of this invention. -
FIG. 66 illustrates theconnector 1004 of this embodiment of the invention. Theconnector 1004 can be seen as having aU-shaped slot 1010 on thefirst end 1012 of theconnector 1004, and a clamp, generally numbered 1014, on thesecond end 1016 of theconnector 1004. TheU-shaped slot 1010 can be configured to accept thevertical rod 1002. In an embodiment, theconnector 1004 includesapertures U-shaped slot 1010 for accepting a pin orscrew 1022. Once an aperture 1036 (FIG. 67 ) of thevertical rod 1002 is placed within theU-shaped slot 1010, the pin orscrew 1022 can be inserted into theapertures connector 1004 as well as thevertical rod 1002 to either fixedly or pivotally secure thevertical rod 1002 to theconnector 1004. The pin orscrew 1022 can be fused, glued, screwed, force fit and/or laser welded to theconnector 1004. - The
clamp 1014 includes a C-shapedarm 1024 as well as a C-shapedlocking paw 1026 that is pivotally attached to theconnector 1004 using apivot pin 1028. Theclamp 1014 also includes a clamp setscrew 1030 which can adjust the position of thelocking paw 1026. In this embodiment, theend cap 1008 of thedeflection rod 1000 can be secured to theconnector 1004 between the C-shapedarm 1024 and thelocking paw 1026 in the closed configuration of theclamp 1014 as shown inFIG. 65 and held in place byset screw 1030. Accordingly, the vertical rod can pivot about thedeflection rod 1006 with theend cap 1008 retained in theclamp 1014. - Referring now to
FIG. 67 , thevertical rod 1002 used in this embodiment of the invention can be seen as including acylindrical shaft 1032, ahead 1034 having anaperture 1036 for accepting a pin or screw, and aspacer 1038 located between thehead 1034 and theshaft 1032. In this embodiment, thehead 1034 of thevertical rod 1002 conforms to theU-shaped slot 1010 of theconnector 1004. -
FIGS. 68-71 illustrate another embodiment ofdeflection rod system 1100 which can be used within the embodiments of thedynamic stabilization systems 700 described herein. Thedeflection rod system 1100 generally includes adeflection rod 1108 and twoend caps 1104. Theend cap 1104 can be, for example, spool-shaped or spherically-shaped as illustrated with respect to other embodiments. Thedeflection rod system 1100 can also include anouter shell 1106. In an embodiment, thedeflection rod 1108 is cylindrical and made of a super elastic material, preferably Nitinol (NiTi). The diameter of thedeflection rod 1108 is constant in this embodiment. In this embodiment, theouter shell 1106 of thedeflection rod system 1100 is made of a biocompatible material or polymer, preferably PEEK, which is less elastic than thedeflection rod 1108. In this embodiment, thedeflection rod shell 1106 includes a hollow tube which is generally tapered. The tube increases in diameter from theends 1118 of theshell 1106 to thecentral portion 1110 of theouter shell 1106. A channel 1112 can be provided at the central portion of theshell 1106 to facilitate the retention of thedeflection rod system 1100 in a mount on a horizontal rod such as, for example, mount 714 onhorizontal rod 708 inFIG. 45 . Instead of a channel 1112, a ring-shaped plateau or land can be defined having the largest diameter of the shell 1106 (FIG. 70 ). Either the channel 1112 or the plateau can be received in themount 714 of the horizontal rod system as seen inFIG. 48 . In an embodiment, theend caps 1104 can be made of titanium, stainless steel, a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK or another biocompatible material. In this embodiment, theend caps 1104 are spool shaped or cylindrical shaped and include acentral channel 1114. - The
deflection rod 1108 can be inserted into theouter shell 1106 of thedeflection rod system 1100 so that theends 1116 of thedeflection rod 1108 extend past from theends 1118 of theouter shell 1106. The end caps 1104 can then be attached to theend 1116 of thedeflection rod 1108. The purpose of thedeflection rod shell 1106 is to protect thedeflection rod 1108, which is made of the super elastic material and to support and restrict the motion of therod 1108. Theouter shell 1106 also serves to reduce the strain on thedeflection rod 1108 as force is applied to theends 1116 of thedeflection rod 1108. As increased strain is placed on theends 1116 of thedeflection rod 1108, and spread along the entire length of thedeflection rod 1108, thedeflection rod shell 1106 can resist such strain along the entire length of theshell 1106. Theouter shell 1106 of thedeflection rod system 1100 helps to limit the maximum amount of deflection allowed by thedeflection rod system 1100 as well as support and protect thedeflection rod 1108. -
FIGS. 70 and 71 illustrate other embodiments of thedeflection rod system 1100. Referring first toFIG. 70 , this embodiment of thedeflection rod system 1100 is similar to thedeflection rod system 1100 embodied inFIG. 68 . However, in this embodiment, the central portion of thedeflection rod shell 1106 includes a central ring orplateau 1120 as opposed to a channel. Referring now toFIG. 71 , this embodiment of thedeflection rod system 1100 includes adeflection rod shaft 1122 having a constant diameter and twoend caps 1124 also having constant diameters. As can be seen inFIG. 71 , the diameter of thedeflection rod shaft 1122 is larger than the diameter of theend caps 1124. It is noted that as with thedeflection rod system 1100 illustrated inFIGS. 68 and 69 , the embodiments of the deflection rod systems illustrated inFIGS. 70-71 include a deflection rod orcore 1108 and adeflection rod shell 1106 as described above. The embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 68-71 are not intended to be limiting and it is envisioned that thedeflection rod system 1100 may include other embodiments which would be evident to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention. -
FIGS. 72A-73C illustrate alternative embodiments of the firsthorizontal rod 708. Referring now toFIG. 72A , an embodiment of the firsthorizontal rod 708 is shown as including amount 714, a pair of guide or deflection restraining rings 1200 and a pair ofgrooves 1202 proximal to and outboard of the guide rings 1200. In this embodiment, thedeflection rod system 712 is secured to the firsthorizontal rod 708 within themount 714. Thedeflection rod system 712 is further contained within the guide rings 1200 proximal to the ends of thedeflection rod system 712. The guide rings 1200 can be used to limit the amount of deflection of thedeflection rod system 712 in use as well as to prevent thedeflection rod system 712 from becoming overextended during use. In this embodiment, the guide rings 1200 are elliptical rings wherein the vertical diameters of the guide rings 1200 are greater than the horizontal diameters of the guide rings (FIG. 72C ). Again, horizontal referring to a horizontal orientation with respect to a patient that is standing and vertical referring to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing. The configuration of theguide ring 1200 allows thedeflection rod system 712 to have a greater amount of vertical deflection than horizontal deflection. It is envisioned that the guide rings 1200 can have other configurations and still fall within the scope of this invention. - The first
horizontal rod 708 also includes thegrooves 1202 which can be mated withcorresponding knobs 1204 located on theend caps 1206 of avertical rods 716 to keep the ends caps 1206 and/or thevertical rods 716 aligned during deployment into the patient. Alternatively, such initial alignment technique can be dispensed with. In this embodiment, thevertical rod 716 includes anend cap 1206 and a mainvertical shaft 1208 wherein the mainvertical shaft 1208 can be screwed into theend cap 1206. It is to be understood that the horizontal system can first be inserted into a patient without the mainvertical shaft 1208 being attached (as shown inFIG. 72B ). Once the horizontal system has successfully been inserted, the mainvertical shafts 1208 can be attached to theend caps 1206, wherein thegrooves 1202 and theknobs 1204 can act to align and steady theend caps 1206 as the mainvertical shafts 1208 are inserted into the end caps 1206 (as shown inFIG. 72C ). - Referring now to
FIGS. 73A-73C , another embodiment of the first horizontal rod is illustrated. As can be seen inFIGS. 73A and 73B , the firsthorizontal rod 708 of this embodiments includes a deflection rod collar or shield anddeflection guide 1210 that wraps around thedeflection rod system 1100. The shield anddeflection guide 1210 also may be identified herein as ashield 1210 and/or adeflection guide 1210. The deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 is preferably stiff and rigid (and made of titanium, for example). The deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 can be used to protect thedeflection rod 712 from damage during use. Further, as described herein, the deflection rod shield and deflection guide can be used to guide and limit and define the amount of deflection of the deflection rod. Thedeflection rod system 1100 includes arod 1108 and anouter shell 1106 as shown for thedeflection rod system 1100 inFIG. 69 . The deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 can also be used to limit the amount of deflection of thedeflection rod system 1100 as well as prevent thedeflection rod system 1100 from becoming overextended during use. Referring now toFIG. 73C , theinner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 can be seen as being tapered wherein the diameter of theinner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 is greater at theends center 1218 of the deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210. In this configuration, the surface of thedeflection rod system 1100 can touch theinner surface 1212 of the deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 during use. Accordingly, thedeflection rod shell 1210 can limit the movement of thedeflection rod system 1100 and assist in spreading the load and strain on thedeflection rod system 1100 along the entire length of thedeflection rod system 1100. Also in this embodiment, the firsthorizontal rod 708 includes acavity 1220 to encompass thedeflection rod system 1100 within the deflection rod shield anddeflection guide 1210 to give the first horizontal rod 708 a smaller profile when implanted into a patient. It is envisioned that thedeflection rod system 1100 can be mounted to any other type of horizontal rod which would be obvious to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention. -
FIGS. 74-79B illustrate embodiments of a secondhorizontal rod 710 which can be used within thedynamic stabilization system 700 described above. Referring now toFIG. 74 , thehorizontal rod 710 can generally be seen as including amain body 1300 and twocylindrical shafts 1302 extending away from each side of themain body 1300. Themain body 1300 includescylindrical slots 1304 adjacent to theends main body 1300 andsockets 1310 for accepting acam 1312. In this embodiment, thecylindrical slots 1304 are about perpendicular to thecylindrical shafts 1302. The twocylindrical shafts 1302 can be connected to theanchor system 702 while thecylindrical slots 1304 can be used to accept and secure thevertical rods 716 to the secondhorizontal rod 710 as shown inFIG. 48 . - Referring now to
FIG. 75 , thecylindrical slot 1304 for accepting avertical rod 716 and thesocket 1310 for accepting acam 1312 can be seen in greater detail. As shown inFIG. 75 , thecylindrical slot 1304 is located along thetop surface 1314 of themain body 1300 and extends about perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the secondhorizontal rod 710. In this embodiment, aslit 1316 is located underneath thecylindrical slot 1304 in order to allow the sides of thecylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together around avertical rod 716 in the deployed configuration of the secondhorizontal rod 710. - Located adjacent to the
cylindrical slot 1304 is thesocket 1310 for accepting acam 1312. One purpose of thecam 1312 is to provide a mechanical means to pinch the sides of thecylindrical slot 1304 together in order to secure thevertical rods 716 to the secondhorizontal rod 710. Thesocket 1310 of this embodiment includes aflat front face 1318, arounded back face 1320, and two rounded side faces 1322, 1324. Thefront face 1318 includes agroove 1328 while theback face 1320 includes achannel 1326, both of which can be used to help keep thecam 1312 secured within the secondhorizontal rod 710. The front and back faces 1318, 1320 are also elevated from the side faces 1322, 1324. In this configuration, acam 1312 having afirst side tab 1330 and a second side tab 1332 (as shown inFIGS. 77A , 77B) can be inserted into thesocket 1310 wherein theside tabs horizontal rod 710. As avertical rod 716 is placed within thecylindrical slot 1304, thecam 1312 can be twisted in order to position afirst side tab 1332 within thegroove 1328 of thefront face 1318 and asecond side tab 1330 within thechannel 1326 of theback face 1320. In this configuration, thefirst side tab 1332 and thesecond side tab 1334 of thecam 1312 secure thecam 1312 to the secondhorizontal rod 710 while also causing the sides of thecylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together, thereby securing thevertical rod 716 to the secondhorizontal rod 710. In an embodiment, thecam 1312 can also include a tapered ridge 1334 (as shown inFIGS. 77A , 77B) which further helps to pinch the sides of thecylindrical slot 1204 together around thevertical rod 716. - Referring now to
FIG. 76 , thesocket 1310 can also include anaperture 1340, theaperture 1340 extending from thefloor 1336 of thesocket 1310 to thebottom surface 1342 of the secondhorizontal rod 710. Theaperture 1340 can include afirst section 1344 and a second section 1346. In this embodiment, the diameter of thefirst section 1344 of theaperture 1340 is smaller than the diameter of the second section 1346 of theaperture 1340. The height and diameter of thefirst section 1344 of theaperture 1340 can be designed to conform to the shape of a fastener located on the bottom of a cam which can be inserted therein. For example, thecam 1312 shown inFIG. 77A includesfasteners 1348 located on the bottom of thecam 1312. Thecam fasteners 1348 include ends 1350 which extend away from themain body 1352 of thefasteners 1348. In use, as thefasteners 1348 are inserted into theaperture 1340 of thesocket 1310, thefasteners 1348 pinch in until theends 1350 of thefasteners 1348 extend past thefirst section 1344 of theaperture 1340. Once theends 1350 of thefasteners 1348 extend past thefirst section 1344 of theaperture 1340, thefasteners 1348 return to their relaxed configurations, and engagelip 1347, wherein themain body 1352 of thefasteners 1348 engage the secondhorizontal rod 710 along thefirst section 1344 of theaperture 1340 while theends 1350 of thefasteners 1348 and engagelip 1347 help prevent thecam 1312 from becoming disengaged from the secondhorizontal rod 710. -
FIGS. 78-79C illustrate an alternative embodiment of acam 1354. Referring now toFIG. 78 , thecam 1354 of this embodiment can be seen as including atop section 1356, acylindrical body 1358 andfasteners 1360 on the bottom of thecam 1354. Thetop section 1356 further includes arestraining tab 1362 and aside tab 1364 located between twogrooves FIG. 79A illustratescam 1354 which has been force fit in thesocket 1310 of the secondhorizontal rod 710 in its undeployed configuration. Thecam 1354 is secured to the secondhorizontal rod 710 through the use of thefasteners 1360 in the same manner as set forth above forcam 1312.FIG. 79B illustratescam 1354 within the secondhorizontal rod 710 in its deployed configuration. In this configuration, once thevertical rod 716 is placed in thecylindrical slot 1304 of the secondhorizontal rod 710, thecam 1354 can be rotated until theside tab 1364 of thecam 1354 is aligned with thegroove 1328 of thefront face 1318 of thesocket 1310 and therestraining tab 1362 of thecam 1354 is placed within anindentation 1370 of thefront face 1318 of thesocket 1310. Theside tab 1362 causes the sides of thecylindrical slot 1304 to pinch together, thereby securing thevertical rod 716 to the secondhorizontal rod 710. -
FIGS. 80-85 illustrate an alternative embodiment of the second horizontal rod which can be used within thedynamic stabilization system 700 described above. Referring now toFIG. 80 , a second horizontal rod 1400 (previously shown inFIG. 74 as second horizontal rod 710) includes aconnector 1402 to secure the secondhorizontal rod 1400 to thevertical rod 716. Theconnector 1402 of this embodiment includes amain body 1404 and arotating link 1406.FIGS. 81 and 82 illustrate the individual components included in this embodiment of the secondhorizontal rod 1400 as well as theconnector 1402. - Referring now to
FIG. 81 , themain body 1404 of theconnector 1402 can be seen as including a C-shapedslot 1408 for housing therotating link 1406 along thefront face 1410 of themain body 1404. Themain body 1404 also includes afirst aperture 1412 and asecond aperture 1416. Thefirst aperture 1412 is located along theback face 1414 of themain body 1404 and is configured to accept thevertical rod 716. Thesecond aperture 1416 is located at the top 1418 of themain body 1404 and can be threaded to accept a threaded fastening or setscrew 1420. - Referring now to
FIG. 83 , therotating link 1406 can be seen as including a saddle-shapedgroove 1422 on the top surface of the rotating link 1446 which is positioned substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of therotating link 1406. The saddle-shapedgroove 1422 includes anaperture 1426 that extends from the top 1424 to thebottom surface 1428 of therotating link 1406. Finally, therotating link 1406 includes an internalcylindrical bore 1430 for accepting the secondhorizontal rod 1400 which is positioned substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of therotating link 1406. - Referring back to
FIG. 80 , this embodiment of the secondhorizontal rod 1400 can be seen in its deployed configuration. In this configuration, the secondhorizontal rod 1400 is inserted into thecylindrical bore 1430 of therotating link 1306. In this embodiment, the secondhorizontal rod 1400 can include a dowel pin 1432 (as shown inFIG. 82 ) that extends through theaperture 1426 along thebottom surface 1428 of the rotating link 1406 (as shown inFIG. 83 ) when the secondhorizontal rod 1400 is inserted into therotating link 1406. One purpose of thedowel pin 1432 is to keep therotating link 1306 positioned on therod 1400 with restricted motion longitudinally along therod 1400 and circumferential about therod 1400 as will be described in greater detail below. It can further be seen inFIG. 80 that therotating link 1406 is placed within the C-shapedslot 1408 of themain body 1404, with thevertical rod 716 being positioned within the saddle-shapedgroove 1422 of therotating link 1406. In this embodiment, thevertical rod 716 can be inserted into theaperture 1412 located along theback face 1414 of themain body 1404 perpendicular to the secondhorizontal rod 1400 and therotating link 1406. The extent that thevertical rod 716 is inserted into theaperture 1412 can be varied to accommodate the specific vertebrae being affected. Thefastening screw 1420 is used to secure thevertical rod 716 and therotating link 1406 to themain body 1404. - As shown in
FIGS. 82 , 84 and 85, the secondhorizontal rod 1400 can also include asection 1434 having threads orgrooves 1438 to engage threads orgrooves 1436 on avertical rod 716. In this embodiment, the threads orgrooves 1438 on thesection 1434 engage a recessed, threaded orgrooved section 1436 of thevertical rod 716 on one side of thesection 1434, while adowel pin 1432 extends on the opposing side, thedowel pin 1432 extending past theaperture 1426 along thebottom surface 1428 of therotating link 1406. In this configuration, thevertical rod 716 is allowed to have limited vertical movement within themain body 1404 of theconnector 1402. Thedowel pin 1432 extends through theaperture 1426 of therotating link 1406, thereby limiting the degrees of freedom of motion and with the help ofset screw 1420, fix the position of thehorizontal rod 1400 relative to thevertical rod 716. An alternative embodiment of the connector can eliminate one or any combination of two or more of therotating link 1406, thedowel pin 1432, the threads orgrooves 1438, and the threaded orgrooved section 1436. It is noted that the secondhorizontal rod 1400 can be a straight rod having a constant diameter (as shown inFIG. 84 ) which is made of a stiff and rigid material (titanium, for example). It is also noted that other types of connectors can also be used which would be obvious to one skilled in the art without deviating from the scope of the invention. - Various embodiments of the dynamic spine stabilization system have been shown and described herein.
FIGS. 86A-112 provide further embodiments of the dynamic spine stabilization system. For these embodiments horizontal refers to a horizontal orientation with respect to a patient that is standing and vertical refers to a vertical orientation with respect to a patient that is standing. - Referring now to
FIG. 86A , this embodiment of the dynamicspine stabilization system 1500 is a topping offsystem 1500 withcomponents System 1500 includesanchor systems 1506, a firsthorizontal rod 1520 and adeflection rod 1522, a first pair ofvertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods first component 1502 of thesystem 1500 is used in conjunction with a spinal fusion procedure. During a spinal fusion procedure, for example, bone or a fusion cage filled with bone can be placed in the disk space between adjacent vertebrae. In time, the bone can unite with the vertebrae, forming a solid fusion between the adjacent vertebrae. To facilitate the spinal fusion process, thefirst component 1502 of thesystem 1500 can be used to stabilize the affected vertebrae. To achieve this function, the pair ofvertical rods anchor systems 1506 as shown inFIG. 86A . In this embodiment, any one of the anchor systems described herein can be used. Thevertical rods - The
second component 1504 of thesystem 1500 can be used as a topping off component that eases the transition between the fused area of the spine and the vertebrae adjacent to the fused vertebrae. This allows there to be a more gradual transition from a healthier portion of the spine to the portion of the spine that has been fused. As shown inFIG. 86A , the second component of thesystem 1500 includes thehorizontal rods vertical rods horizontal rod 1520 and thedeflection rod 1522, wherein thehorizontal rods first component 1502 and thesecond component 1504 of the system. In this embodiment, the pair ofvertical rods horizontal rod 1520 and thedeflection rod 1522 can include any of the corresponding embodiments described herein. In this embodiment, the first ends 1524, 1526 of thevertical rods deflection rod 1522, and the deflection rod is attached to the firsthorizontal rod 1520. The firsthorizontal rod 1520 is also connected to a pair ofanchor systems 1506 as shown inFIG. 86 . It is to be noted that with this embodiment as well as with other embodiments herein, that thehorizontal rod 1520 can be rotated up to 360 degrees (arrow 1570) relative to theanchors 1506 and then locked into place in theanchors 1506. This allows thesystem 1500 to additionally conform to the anatomy of the spine of the patient. - Turning now to the
horizontal rods horizontal rods vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods FIG. 86A establishes a frame of reference including an x-axis, a y-axis and a z-axis, wherein the x-axis and the y-axis are both substantially parallel to the patient's body and perpendicular with respect to one another, and wherein the z-axis is perpendicular to the patient's body and perpendicular to both the x-axis and the y-axis. In an embodiment,horizontal rods vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods system 1500 has been implanted (as indicated by dual-arrows 1552, 1554). In this embodiment, the second ends 1540, 1542 of thehorizontal rods vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rods horizontal rods horizontal rods vertical rods horizontal rods separate connectors horizontal rods vertical rods - The pivotal attachment between the
vertical rods horizontal rods 1512 1514 can remain so that the horizontal and vertical rods can pivot relative to each other after implantation. Otherwise, set screws can be provided to lock the horizontal rods relative to the respective vertical rods after implantation in the spine of a patient so that the connection is rigid. Accordingly,system 1500 can be implanted with the flexibility of the horizontal and vertical rods movable relative to each other and then after implantation, the set screws can be used to lock the position of the vertical and respective horizontal rods relative to each other. Alternatively, the connection between thevertical rods vertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods horizontal rods - It is to be understood that in an alternative embodiment
horizontal rods vertical rods horizontal rods vertical rods vertical rods - As with the
deflection rods 1100 illustrated inFIGS. 68-71 and described above, thedeflection rods 1522 preferably used in this embodiment of the invention can include an inner core made of a super elastic material, preferably Nitinol (NiTi) and an outer shell which is made of a biocompatible material or polymer, preferably PEEK, which is less elastic than the inner core. Alternatively, thedeflection rod 1522 can be comprised of a super elastic material. Still further, a shield and deflection guide can be placed over the deflection rod to form a deflection rod system. -
FIG. 86B is similar toFIG. 86A in that this embodiment ofsystem 1500 is meant to be used as a topping off level that is auxiliary or adjacent to a fusion level. Elements of the system inFIG. 86B that are similar to the elements in the system inFIG. 86A have been similar reference numerals.System 1500 inFIG. 86B includes thedeflection rod 1522 mounted on ahorizontal rod 1520. The horizontal rod is mounted at each end to ananchor 1506 which can include a bone screw anchor as described herein. The distal ends of thedeflection rod 1522 are secured tovertical rods vertical rods horizontal rod 1520 is secured are themselves deployed into a first vertebra, and the bone anchor screws 1506 at the opposite ends of thevertical rods system 1500 connected to the first and second vertebrae and used to top off the fusion, with the first vertebra dynamically secured and stabilized relative to the fused second and third vertebra. - Referring now to
FIGS. 87A and 87B , posterior and side views of thesystem 1500 can be seen. Referring specifically toFIG. 87A , this embodiment of thesystem 1500 can be seen as including adeflection rod 1522 having corrugations or ribs 1550 (FIGS. 88A , 88B). More specifically theouter shell 1523 of thedeflection rod 1522 includes corrugations orribs 1550. With theouter shell 1523 of thedeflection rod 1522 made of for example PEEK, the corrugations orribs 1550 can be machined or molded into theouter shell 1523. The corrugated nature of the outer shell of thedeflection rod 1522 helps to increase or decrease or define the flexibility of thedeflection rod 1522 during use. In an embodiment, thecorrugations 1550 of the outer shell of thedeflection rod 1522 have a consistent shape and size throughout the length of the deflection rod 1522 (as shown inFIG. 88A ). In another embodiment, thecorrugations 1550 of the outer shell of thedeflection rod 1522 are narrower proximal to themount 1548 of the firsthorizontal rod 1520 in comparison to the corrugations proximal to the second pair ofvertical rods 1516, 1518 (as shown inFIG. 88B ). In other words, thecorrugations 1550 are narrower closer to the center of thedeflection rod 1522. In this configuration, thenarrower corrugations 1550 allow thedeflection rod 1522 to deflect to a greater degree near the center of thedeflection rod 1522. It is to be understood that thecorrugations 1550 of the outer shell of thedeflection rod 1522 can have varying shapes and sizes and locations in order to define the flexibility of theouter shell 1523 and thedeflection rod 1522. Alternatively, and by way of example the ends of thedeflection rod 1522 located distally from themount 1548 can have thecorrugations 1550 with narrower widths and thecorrugations 1550 located more closely to themount 1548 can be wider, in order to provide more flexibility at the distal ends of thedeflection rod 1522. It is also to be understood that thedeflection rod 1522 of thissystem 1500 can otherwise be configured consistent with the other embodiments of thedeflection rod 1100 described herein. Further, a shield and deflection guide can be placed about the deflection rod to form a deflection rod system. -
FIGS. 89 to 104 depict another embodiment of a deflection rod system of the invention and preferably a one level system. A one level system is preferably used to span one disk space and be secured to the vertebra above the disk space and secured to the vertebra below the disk space. A two level system spans two disk spaces with the system attached to the first and second vertebra which are on either side of a first disk space and also attached to the second and third vertebra which are on either side of a second disk space. It is to be understood that while a one level system will generally be attached to two adjacent vertebra and a two level system will generally be attached to 3 adjacent vertebra, that in other embodiments the systems can be attached to non-adjacent vertebra. Thus the one level system can be secured to two vertebra that are not adjacent. Similarly the two level system can be attached to three vertebra, some or all of said vertebra not being adjacent to each other. In this embodiment the deflection rod system includes a deflection rod that has an inner rod with an outer sleeve, and with a shield and deflection guide positioned about the sleeve. As in other embodiments the shield and deflection guide can also be referred to as a shield and/or a deflection guide. The inner rod can be made of a super elastic material such an Nitinol, the outer sleeve can be make of a biocompatible polymer such as PEEK, and the shield and deflection guide can be made of a bio-compatible material such as titanium by way of example only. In this embodiment a mounting bracket is mounted with or included with the shield and deflection guide so that the deflection rod system can be conveniently mounted on a horizontal rod. For that matter by changing the bracket as appropriate for other spine implants systems, the deflection rod system can be conveniently mounted on a wide variety of spine implant systems and other bone implant system and provide the novel attributes of the deflection rod system to that other system. In this embodiment as the deflection rod system is not pre-mounted to the horizontal rod, the screw anchors and the horizontal rod can be mounted in the spine of a patient followed by the mounting of the deflection rod system to the horizontal rod. Such an arrangement can enhance the ease by which such a system can be implanted in a patient. Additionally, the deflection rod system can be designed with different amounts of stiffness, as is described herein. By selection of materials and dimensions the deflection rod system can be provided in a range from a highly rigid configuration to a very flexible configuration and still provide dynamic stability to the spine. In other words, a selected deflection rod system can be mounted onto a horizontal rod and depending on how rigid or stiff the deflection rod system is, the desired amount of flexibility or rigidity and/or stiffness can be provided to the patient. Further, each of the deflection rod systems can have a different stiffness or rigidity or flexibility. Thus, on the same horizontal rod, a first deflection rod system can have a first flexibility or stiffness or rigidity, and a second deflection rod system can have a second different flexibility or stiffness or rigidity. Such an arrangement could be used to correct for spines that are malformed by, for example, scoliosis. - In
FIGS. 89-91 the embodiment of thesystem 1600 includes anchor systems 1602 (without depicting the set screws), a firsthorizontal rod 1604, a secondhorizontal rod 1606,vertical rods deflection rods horizontal rod 1604, and a pair ofconnectors 1620, 1622 (without depicting the set screws) to connect thevertical rods horizontal rod 1604. Thedeflection rod systems deflection rod systems - Referring to
FIGS. 89-92A , the firsthorizontal rod 1604 can be seen as including amain body 1624 and twocylindrical shafts main body 1624. The firsthorizontal rod 1604 also includes a pair of threadedbores 1696, 1698 (as can be seen inFIG. 95 ) which are provided proximal to theends main body 1624 for receiving theset screws 1634 which are used to secure the shields and deflection guides 1616, 1618 of thedeflection rod systems horizontal rod 1604. In the deployed configuration of thehorizontal rod 1604, the twocylindrical shafts systems 1602 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of theanchor systems 1602 which have been inserted into the vertebra of the patient. The horizontal rod and in particular the distally locatedcylindrical shafts anchor systems 1602 may include any one of the anchor systems illustrated and/or described herein. In this embodiment, themain body 1624 has cube-shaped mounting sections (FIG. 95 ) where thebores distal ends main body 1624 has a cylindrical shaped center located between the cube-shaped mounting section. The distal ends 1630 and 1632 can provide stops to assist in positioning the horizontal rod between bone screw anchors. Thecylindrical shafts cylindrical shafts - The second
horizontal rod 1606 can be seen as including a cylindrical bar having twoends horizontal rod 1604, in the deployed configuration of the secondhorizontal rod 1606, the secondhorizontal rod 1606 can be attached to anchorsystems 1602 and, in particular, to the heads or saddles of theanchor systems 1602 which have been inserted into the vertebra of a patient. The anchors can receive theends horizontal rod 1606. Theanchor systems 1602 may include any one of the anchor systems illustrated and/or described herein. In a preferred embodiment, the first and secondhorizontal rods - It is to be noted that with this embodiment and the other embodiments described herein that the horizontal rods are implanted in a horizontal configuration relative to an erectly standing patient and the horizontal rods are mounted between two bone screw anchors that are implanted in one vertebra. It is to be understood that in other configurations, that the horizontal rods, with for example the
deflection rod systems deflection rod system - The
vertical rods vertical rods horizontal rod 1606 proximal to the first ends 1640, 1642 of thevertical rods vertical rods deflection rods - Referring now to
FIG. 93 , theconnector 1620 used to connect thevertical rod 1608 to the secondhorizontal rod 1606 is illustrated in greater detail. In this embodiment, theconnector 1620 can be seen as including a substantiallycylindrical body 1648 with alower end 1650 having anaperture 1652 that can receive the secondhorizontal rod 1606. Thebody 1648 includes an internalcylindrical bore 1654 which is parallel to a longitudinal axis of thebody 1648. At thedistal end 1656 of thebody 1648, thebore 1654 is threaded and can accept a set screw (not shown). Along the side of thebody 1648 are alignedU-shaped slots body 1648 from theouter surface 1662 to thebore 1654. TheseU-shaped slots distal end 1656 of thebody 1648 in order to have the set screw accepted by threads of thebore 1654. In the deployed configuration ofsystem 1600, theU-shaped slots vertical rod 1608 within thebody 1648 while theaperture 1652 within thelower end 1650 of theconnector 1620 accepts the secondhorizontal rod 1606. Thevertical rod 1608 can be secured to theconnector 1620 using a set screw to cap off the internalcylindrical bore 1654. - Referring now to
FIG. 94A , the connection betweenvertical rod 1608 anddeflection rod 1612 is illustrated in greater detail. As with thedeflection rod 720 illustrated inFIGS. 50A-50B ,deflection rod 1612 includes a spherical ball or joint 1664, aninner rod 1666 preferably made of, for example, a super elastic material such as Nitinol, and anouter shell 1668 made of, for example, PEEK. These elements can be fit into a shield and deflection guide (not depicted inFIG. 94A ) to make up the deflection rod system in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the second ends 1644, 1646 of thevertical rods first end 1670 of theinner rod 1666 can be passed through anaperture 1672 within the second end 1644 (disk-shaped housing of thevertical rod 1608, wherein the diameter of theinner rod 1666 is smaller than the diameter of theaperture 1672. Once thefirst end 1670 of theinner rod 1666 has been passed through theaperture 1672, thefirst end 1670 of theinner rod 1666 can be attached to the spherical ball or joint 1664 using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example. The diameter of theaperture 1672 is less than the diameter of the spherical ball or joint 1664 to prevent the spherical ball or joint 1664 from passing back through theaperture 1672. Once the spherical ball or joint 1664 is positioned within thesecond end 1644 of thevertical rod 1608, aretaining ring 1674 can be threaded, fused, glued, press fit and/or laser welded, for example, to thesecond end 1644 of thevertical rod 1608, thereby securing the spherical ball or joint 1664 (as well as the deflection rod 1612) to thevertical rod 1608 in a ball joint type connection (as shown inFIG. 94B ). In this configuration, thedeflection rod 1612 is allowed to rotate and/or have tilting and/or swiveling movements about a center which corresponds with the center of the spherical ball or joint 1664. - Referring back to
FIGS. 89-92A , the shields and deflection guides 1616, 1618 that secure the firsthorizontal rod 1604 to thedeflection rods arms deflection guide 1616, thearm 1676 of the shield anddeflection guide 1616 can be seen as being attached to the firsthorizontal rod 1604 using a fastener, for example ascrew 1634. As described herein (FIG. 96 ) of the shield anddeflection guide 1616 includes aninternal bore 1688 for accepting thedeflection rod 1612, thebore 1688 being positioned parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shield anddeflection guide 1616 in this embodiment. Thedeflection rod 1612 can be attached to the shield anddeflection guide 1616 within thebore 1688 using threading, fusing, gluing, press fitting and/or laser welding techniques, for example. In an embodiment, since thesystem 1600 includes a left deflection rod system including shield anddeflection guide 1616 and a separate, independent right deflection rod system including shield anddeflection guide 1618,deflection rod systems FIG. 89 ,deflection rod systems horizontal rod 1604 and the secondhorizontal rod 1606. In another embodiment, the deflection rod systems including theshields horizontal rod 1604 so that thevertical rods horizontal rod 1604 before being secured to the secondhorizontal rod 1606 as shown inFIG. 92A . In yet another embodiment, theshields horizontal rod 1604 and the secondhorizontal rod 1606 as shown inFIG. 89 , however, thevertical rods system 1600 outboard of the deflection rod systems (FIG. 92C ), as opposed to inboard of thedeflection rod systems FIGS. 89 and 92A . InFIG. 92A theinner rods FIG. 92B theinner rods deflection rod systems deflection rod systems FIG. 92B from that ofFIG. 92A . This gives the implant a wider stance if needed for purposes of dynamic stability and in particular for side-to-side bending. This also allows the implant to be deployed to accommodate various anomalies of various patients.FIG. 92C is similar toFIG. 92B as far as the inner rods projection away from each other and more laterally in order to increase the width between the vertical rods. In this embodiment, thearms deflection rod systems -
FIG. 95 illustrates an embodiment ofdeflection rod system 1619 in greater detail. In this embodiment, thearm 1678 of thedeflection rod system 1619 includes aU-shaped slot 1692 that surrounds the firsthorizontal rod 1604, helping to secure thedeflection rod system 1619 to thehorizontal rod 1604. Thefirst arm 1678 also includes anaperture 1694 for accepting thescrew 1634 which is used to attach thesystem 1619 to the firsthorizontal rod 1604. The slot defines a channel, that defines in this embodiment, a cube-shaped space that can mate with the cube-shaped region of the horizontal rod to provide a fit that with the set screw locks thedeflection rod system 1619 to thehorizontal rod 1604 in a fixed position. It is to be understood that by changing the shape of the channel and the shape of the mating portion of the horizontal rod, such that both have a mating spline type attachment, as described herein, that the position of the deflection rod system relative to the horizontal rod can be secured at various orientations and angles. Additionallymultiple bores deflection rod systems -
FIG. 96 illustrates a sectional view of an embodiment of thedeflection rod system 1617 through theinner rod 1666. As can be seen inFIG. 96 , the inner rod of thedeflection rod 1612 is cylindrical and theouter shell 1668 is tapered, and thus is configured to become gradually narrow going from thebase 1686 to theend 1684 of theouter shell 1668. This partially provides thedeflection rod 1612 with aspace 1688 to flex from the shield anddeflection guide 1616 with thedeflection rod system 1617 in use. Theinner surface 1690 of the shield anddeflection guide 1616 of thedeflection system 1617 also serves as a guide for thedeflection rod 1612 to effectively limit the degree of deflection for thedeflection rod 1612. Theinner surface 1690 of theshield 1616 in this embodiment forms a cone shape with the diameter located closer to end 1686 being smaller than the diameter located closer to end 1684 being larger. Thus, with this cone shape and the taper or cone shape of theouter shell 1688, thedeflection rod 1612 can deflect until the outer shell comes in contact with theinner surface 1690. In particular, and as is described herein, thedeflection rod 1612 deflects along the length of said deflection rod until that portion of the outer shell of the deflection rod comes in contact with the inner surface of the shield. Successive portions of the outer shell closer to theend 1684 can still deflect until such successive portions come into contact with the inner surface of the shield. Accordingly, the conical shape of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide controls the amount and location of deflection of the deflection rod along the deflection rod from the fixed end of the deflection rod to the free end of the deflection rod, where the inner rod extends past the outer shell of the deflection rod. In an embodiment, thedeflection rods system 1600 depending on the users needs. In other words, one side of thesystem 1600 may offer more resistance to movement than the other side based on thedeflection rods - Again,
FIG. 96 depicts a cross-section through the entire deflection rod system including the inner rod, the outer shell and the shield and deflection guide. As is evident the outer shell has a decreasing cross section from the about the midpoint of the outer shell toward the end of the outer shell where the inner rod projects past the outer shell. The inner surface of the shield and deflection guide has a diameter that increases as measured from a longitudinal axis of the shield and deflection guide in a direction toward the end of the deflection rod system where the inner rod projects past the outer shell. In other words in this embodiment, the outer shell has a smallest diameter for the outer shell at about where the inner rod projects past the outer shell and the surface of the shield and deflection guide has a maximum diameter as measured from the longitudinal axis of the shield and deflection guide at about the same location. Accordingly, the outer shell and the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide restrict limits and define the range of motion and the stiffness that are characteristic of this design of the deflection rod system. By changing the rate of change of the diameters and/or the diameters of the outer shell and the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide these characteristics can be changed. Thus, the stiffness of the deflection rod system can be, for example, increased by increasing the diameter of the outer shell and/or by decreasing the diameter of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide as both approach where the inner rod extends from the outer shell. Additionally, increasing the diameter of the inner rod will increase the stiffness of the deflection rod system while decreasing the diameter of the inner rod will decrease the stiffness of the deflection rod system. The taper of the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide can be configured to approach the natural dynamic motion of the spine, while giving dynamic support to the spine in that region. In addition to changing the dimensions, changing the materials that comprise the components of the deflection rod system can also affect the stiffness and range of motion of the deflection rod system. For example, making the inner rod out of titanium or steel would provide for more stiffness than making, for example, the inner rod out of Nitinol. Further, making the outer shell out of a material that is stiffer than PEEK would provide for a stiffer outer shell. -
FIG. 98B is a graph showing a preferred deflection of the inner rod and outer shell in accordance with a deflection force on the inner rod where the vertical rod is connected to the inner rod. InFIG. 98B the diameter of the PEEK outer shell is about 0.165 inches at its largest diameter and the diameter of the inner rod make of Nitinol is about 0.080 inches. The working length of the deflection rod system is about 1.04 inches. The load/deflection graph or curve ofFIG. 98B demonstrates that for the design of this deflection rod system that the system responds more stiffly as the load increases.FIG. 98B provides an example of a specific amount of deflection in response to a given load on the spine and the deflection rod system. It is contemplated, for example, that the deflection rod system can be made in stiffness that can replicate a 70% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine, a 50% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine and a 30% range of motion and flexibility of the natural intact spine for providing in a kit for a doctor to use. It is to be understood that different ranges of motion, flexibility and stiffness can be provided using for example the variations that have been indicated herein. The graph ofFIG. 98B depicts a deflection rod system that is a little stiffer that a 70% stiffness deflection rod system. As is evident fromFIG. 98B , the curve is a non-linear curve, with the greatest non-linear part of the curve being as the load increases. That is to say as the load increases, the stiffness of the deflection rod system increase at a more rapid and non-linear way in response to the load placed on the spine and thus on the deflection rod system. Accordingly, the deflection rod system of this example offers dynamic stabilization by providing a range of motion where the load supported increases about linearly as the deflection increases and then with increased deflection the load supported increases more rapidly in a non-linear manner in order to provide dynamic stabilization. Stated differently, as the load or force on the deflection rod system increases, the amount of deflection changes or decreases in a non-linear manner and/or the rate of change in the amount of deflection decreases in a non-linear manner. Thus as depicted inFIG. 98B and for this embodiment, as load or force is first applied to the deflection rod system by the spine, the deflection of the deflection rod system responds about linearly to the increase in the load. After about 0.060 inches of deflection, the deflection rod system responds in a non-linear manner. In this region a greater amount of load or force needs to be placed on the deflection rod system in order to obtain the same amount of deflection that was realized prior to this point. Further, the rate of change in the amount of deflection for based on the force applied can also be a non-linear function. The curve on this graph can be customized based on the choice of dimensions and materials as indicated herein. Thus, the deflection rod system can be designed, for example, to provide about 70 percent of motion of an intact spine, or about 50 percent of motion of an intact spine or about 30 percent of motion of an intact spine or other desired percentage of motion of an intact spine. Further in the deflection response and flexibility and motion of a left deflection rod system can be different from that of a right mounted deflection rod system in the disclosed embodiments. - It is to be noted that the characteristics of the deflection rod systems can also be changed by, for example, adjusting the inner surface of the shields and deflection guides asymmetrical (
FIG. 96A ) instead of the symmetrical shapes ofFIG. 96 . For example, a bias can be introduced in the deflection rod systems by having the inner surface be provided asymmetrically about the longitudinal axis of theinner rod 1666. Accordingly, theinner rod 1666 and theouter shell 1668 could deflect more in one direction than in another direction. For example, if the upper portion of the inner surface was more distantly spaced from the longitudinal axis of the inner rod than the lower portion of the inner surface the deflection rod could deflect more when the spine was placed in flexion and could deflect less when the spine was placed in extension. In effect this arrangement would be more restrictive with respect to movement of the spine with the spine in extension and less restrictive with respect to the movement of the spine with the spine in flexion. Similarly, and, for example, if the lower portion of the inner surface was more distantly spaced from the longitudinal axis of the inner rod than the upper portion of the inner surface, the deflection rod could deflect more when the spine was placed in extension and could deflect less when the spine was placed in flexion. In effect, this arrangement would be more restrictive with respect to movement of the spine with the spine in flexion and less restrictive with respect to the movement of the spine, with the spine in extension. - Referring now to
FIGS. 97 and 98A , the preferred dimensions of theouter shell 1668 of thedeflection rods FIG. 97 , theouter shell 1668 has an overall length of 0.950 inches from thebase 1686 to theend 1684 of theouter shell 1668. The first 0.500 inches of theouter shell 1668 proximal to thebase 1686 of theouter shell 1668 includes a diameter of 0.165. The length of theouter shell 1668 that is to be engaged to the inner surface of the shield and deflection guide 1616 (as shown inFIG. 96 ) is 0.20 inches. After the first 0.500 inches proximal to thebase 1686, theouter shell 1668 begins to taper at a 4.0° angle to theend 1684 of theouter shell 1668. The working length of theinner rod 1666 of thedeflection rod 1612 is approximately 0.840 inches. As shown inFIG. 98 , diameter of theinner rod 1666 is 0.080 inches and remains constant throughout the length of thedeflection rod 1612. - It can be desired to employ a multi-level dynamic stabilization system as opposed to a single-level system. If that is the case,
dynamic stabilization system 1600 can, for example, be configured to be incorporated into a multi-level system. InFIG. 99 a deflection rod system with a horizontal rod and vertical rods of a double level dynamic spine stabilization system is depicted. - Referring now to
FIG. 99 , a dynamicspine stabilization system 1700 for use in a multi-level dynamic stabilization system is illustrated. In this embodiment, thesystem 1700 with the addition of anchors at the ends of each of thevertical rods vertical rods FIG. 99 would be deployed in the central vertebra and anchors attached to thevertical rods vertical rods systems 1700 depicted inFIG. 99 . By way of example only, a first andsecond systems 1700 can be secured together with common vertical rods such asvertical rods systems 1700 can be secured into two respective central vertebra. Then the other vertical rods extending from above the first andsecond systems 1700 can secured to a third vertebra using anchors, while the vertical rods extending from below the first andsecond systems 1700 can be secured to a fourth vertebra. - The
system 1700 includesdeflection rod systems vertical rods vertical rods anchor systems horizontal rod 1718. Thedeflection rod systems vertical rods vertical rods system 1600 as shown inFIG. 89 .System 1700 essentially includes the same components assystem 1600. Accordingly, the physical characteristics of theanchor systems horizontal rod 1718, thevertical rods deflection rods - The
deflection rod systems system 1700 are attached to thehorizontal rod 1718 in a similar manner to that described herein with respect tosystem 1600. Further, the shields and deflection guides 1728 and 1730 of the firstdeflection rod system 1702 are secured together with acommon arm 1729, which common arm includes a bore 1731 which can receive a screw for securing the deflection rod system to the horizontal rod. Similarly, thedeflection rod system 1704 can includedeflection rods arm 1733 which arm includes abore 1735. Another screw can be deployed throughbore 1735 to secure the second deflection rod system to the horizontal rod. Thedeflection rod systems internal bores deflection rods horizontal rod 1718 and positioned parallel to thehorizontal rod 1718.Vertical rods deflection rods 1720, 1721 and extend vertically away from thedeflection rod systems Vertical rods deflection rods deflection rod systems vertical rods vertical rods FIG. 89 . In another embodiment, one or both pairs ofvertical rods connectors vertical rods deflection rods horizontal rod 1604. In yet another embodiment the pairs of vertical rods can be connected to bone anchors. In still another embodiment, thevertical rods system 1700 where the deflection rods are directed outboard or laterally. - Referring now to
FIGS. 100A , 100B and 100C, sectional views of two of the shields and deflection guides 1730, 1734 of thedeflection rod systems deflection rods FIGS. 100A , 100B and 100C (and as has been previously described herein) thedeflection rods deflection rod systems deflection rods deflection rods inner rod outer shell FIG. 100C , thedeflection rod systems U-shaped slots horizontal rod 1718, helping to secure theconnectors horizontal rod 1718. The shields and deflection guides 1730, 1734 can also be seen as includingbevels anchor system 1716. Thebevels deflection rod systems anchor system 1716, while still allowing theanchor system 1716 to be connected to thehorizontal rod 1718 at various angles without contacting thearms -
FIGS. 101A and 101B depict dynamic stabilization systems wherein thedeflection rods vertical rods FIGS. 101A and 101B are similar in concept to embodiments inFIGS. 92C and 92B , respectively, in that the inner rod of the deflection rod extends past the outer shell in a lateral and not medial direction. In the embodiments ofFIGS. 101A and 101B each deflection rod system includes dual shields and deflection guides with dual deflection rods including inner rods and outer shells positioned in each of the dual shields and deflection rods. InFIG. 101A , thecommon arm - Referring now to
FIG. 102 , a sectional view of an embodiment of thehorizontal rod 1718 and thedeflection rod system 1702 can be seen. In this embodiment, the portion of thehorizontal rod 1718 adjacent to thedeflection rod system 1702 is cylindrical. Thehorizontal rod 1718 can also be seen as including a plurality of cogs or splines1752 along the outer surface of thehorizontal rod 1718. In this configuration, thecogs 1752 can be engaged by thedeflection rod system 1702 within theslot 1744 of thedeflection rod system 1702, which has correspondingly been configured to accept thecogs 1752 of thehorizontal rod 1604. This configuration allows thedeflection rod system 1702 to be positioned and secured to thehorizontal rod 1718 at differing angles relative to thehorizontal rod 1718. InFIG. 102 , thecogs 1752 are shaped like triangles, but it is to be understood that thecogs 1752 can have any shape such as the wide variety of gear shapes and still fall within the scope of this invention. - Referring now to
FIGS. 103 , 104, top views of an embodiment ofdeflection rod system 1702 is illustrated. In this embodiment, instead of having a single bore for accepting a screw to secure thedeflection rod system 1702 to thehorizontal rod 1718, this embodiment of thedeflection rod system 1702 includes a plurality ofbores deflection rod system 1702 or accepting a plurality of screws in two or more of thebores system 1700 into a patient as the deflection rod system can be placed to a greater degree to one side or the other side of the horizontal rod. -
FIG. 104 is similar toFIG. 103 except that thesingle bore 1756 is elongated and includes scallops for capturing a securing set screw in several locations. In the embodiment ofFIG. 101B the set screw can be captured in 3 different locations between the scallops. Thus, with the screw in the central scallop as with the screw in central bore ofFIG. 101A the deflection rod system can be centered on the horizontal rod. With the screw in one of the scallops located on either side of the central scallop or in thebores 1754, 1758 (FIG. 103 ) located on either side of thecentral bore 1756, the deflection rod system can be moved relative to the horizontal rod. That is the deflection rod system can be moved in this embodiment vertically up or vertically down in order to accommodate the anatomy of the spine and where the anchor screws are implanted into the spine. -
FIG. 105 illustrates yet another embodiment of a dynamic spine stabilization system.System 1900 can be seen as including avertical rod 1902, abone screw 1904 including ahead 1906 having aninner bore 1908, and adeflection rod 1910. The head with the bore, which together is similar to the shield and deflection guide in other embodiments, in addition the deflection rod which includes the inner rod and the outer shell together comprise thedeflection rod system 1905. Thisdeflection rod system 1905 can be similar in design and function as the deflection rod systems described herein. In this embodiment the deflection rod system is incorporated into the head of the bone screw anchor and is co-linear with the axis of the shank of the bone screw anchor or co-axial with the axis of the shank of the bone screw anchor. Which such an arrangement, thesystem 1900 may in some configurations eliminate the need to have horizontal rods, as the adjacent vertebra can be secured to the adjacent deflection rod systems of the anchors that are implanted in the adjacent vertebra. In this embodiment, thevertical rod 1902 of the system is secured directly to thebone screw 1904 using thedeflection rod 1910 as opposed to being attached to a horizontal rod that is then attached to an anchor system having a bone screw as shown in, for example,FIG. 48 . More specifically, thedeflection rod 1910 includes afirst end 1912 and asecond end 1914 as shown inFIG. 106 . Thevertical rod 1902 is attached to thefirst end 1912 of thedeflection rod 1910 while thesecond end 1914 of thedeflection rod 1910 is inserted into theinner bore 1908 within theanchor screw head 1906 and attached to the anchor screw 1094 therein using threading, fusing, gluing, press fit and/or laser welding techniques, for example. In an embodiment, thevertical rod 1902 is pivotally attached to thedeflection rod 1910, wherein thevertical rod 1902 can pivot about an axis corresponding to the longitudinal axis of theanchor screw 1904. This pivoting connection can, for example, be a ball and socket arrangement as seen in other embodiments herein. - Referring now to
FIG. 106 , in an embodiment, theinner bore 1908 within theanchor screw head 1906 can be seen as being tapered and/or cone-shaped with the diameter of theinner bore 1908 being larger on thefirst end 1916 of thebore 1908 as opposed to thesecond end 1918 of thebore 1908 as described above with respect toFIG. 96 . Accordingly, thedeflection rod 1910 is allowed to flex within thehead 1906 of theanchor screw 1904 with theinner surface 1920 of thehead 1906 acting as a distraction guide for thedeflection rod 1910 to effectively limit the maximum degree of deflection for thedeflection rod 1910. - Referring now to
FIG. 107 , an embodiment ofsystem 1900 is shown. In this embodiment,vertical rods adjacent vertebrae anchor screws vertical rods FIGS. 105 and 106 . Accordingly, in this configuration ofsystem 1900, theadjacent vertebrae adjacent vertebrae - A method of implantation of the system in the spine of the human patient is as follows. First the vertebral levels that are to receive the system are identified. Then the anchor systems are implanted, generally two anchor systems for each level. The anchor systems can be implanted using a cannula and under guidance imaging such as x-ray imaging. Alternatively, the anchor system can be implanted using traditional spinal surgery techniques. Then the horizontal rods are inserted generally laterally and secured to the anchor systems. The horizontal rods can be inserted laterally through a cannula or with an incision and the use of, for example, a lead-in cone. Alternatively, the horizontal rods can be inserted using traditional techniques and a posterior to anterior approach when the anchor systems are implanted. Thereafter, the vertical rods can be connected to or pivoted, rotated or placed into communication with and secured to the appropriate horizontal rod.
- Should a dynamic stabilization system such as
system 100 be initially implanted and then should there be a desire to make the system more rigid or to accomplish a fusion, thesystem 100 can be revised by removing thehorizontal rod 104 that includes the deflection rods or loading rods and replace it with ahorizontal rod 106 which has the vertical rod mounts (FIG. 34 ) and is thus substantially more rigid. Thus a revision to a fusion configuration can be accomplished with minimal trauma to the bone and tissue structures of the spine. - With a
system 1600, as depicted inFIG. 92A , after the anchor and horizontal rods are deployed, the individualdeflection rod systems screw 1634. Thereafter, thevertical rods -
FIGS. 108A to 111B depict yet another embodiment of a single level dynamicspine stabilization system 2000 of the invention. It is to be understood that even though this embodiment is configured as a single level system, that with the elimination of the second horizontal rod and that this system can be used as a topping off system in conjunction with a spine fusion as described herein.System 2000 includes first and secondhorizontal rods screw anchor systems 2002. Thesystem 2000 also includes first and seconddeflection rod systems 2017, 1019 which include inner rods, outer shells which make up thedeflection rods 2012, 2104 and a shields and deflection rod guides 2016, 2018 which cover and in this embodiment surround thedeflection rods system 2000 includesvertical rods deflection rod systems set screws 2034. Thevertical rods connectors 2020. Connectors 2020 (FIG. 110 ) include a J-shaped opening that can receive the second horizontal rod and aport 2042 that can receive a vertical rod. Further, theconnectors 2020 can include a threadedbore 2044 that can receive aset screw 2046. With the second rod and the vertical rod received in theconnector 2020, theset screw 2046 can be tightened in order to securely force the vertical rod against the horizontal rod and against theconnector 2020. Additionally, sections of the horizontal and vertical rods and the connector and the set screw that are all locked together, can be knurled in order if desired to be part of the locking mechanism. -
FIG. 111A depicts a top view ofdeflection rod system 2019 andFIG. 111B depicts sectioned view of thedeflection rod system 2019 taken down a longitudinal axis of the deflection rod. Preferably thedeflection rod system 2019 is preassembled.FIG. 111B depicts preferred dimensions of this embodiment. In this embodiment the preferred dimensions include: -
- Inner rod having a diameter of about 0.080 inches.
- Outer shell having a major diameter of about 0.165 inches and the tapered portion tapers at about 2.5 degrees per side.
- Shield and deflection guide having a housing diameter of about 0.265 inches.
- The deflection rod is secured to the deflection guide along a length of about 0.200 inches from the end of the deflection rod system.
- The deflection rod system has a working length from the end of the system to the center of the ball joint of about 1.040 less the press fit length of about 0.200 which is length of about 0.840.
- The overall length of the deflection rod system is about 1.100 inches.
- The spherical ball in the ball and socket joint that secures the vertical rod to the deflection rod system has a diameter of about 0.188 inches.
- The vertical rod has a diameter of about 0.150 inches.
- In addition to Nitinol or nickel-titanium (NiTi) other super elastic materials include copper-zinc-aluminum and copper-aluminum-nickel. However for biocompatibility the nickel-titanium is the preferred material.
- As desired, the implant can, in part, be made of titanium or stainless steel. Other suitable material includes by way of example only polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polyetherketoneketone (PEKK), polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), and polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK). Still, more specifically, the material can be PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. (Victrex is located at www.matweb.com or see Boedeker www.boedeker.com). Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India (www.ghardapolymers.com).
- As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention.
- Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the spacer can be made to the following documents. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.”
- The foregoing description of preferred embodiments of the present invention has been provided for the purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications that are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the claims and their equivalents.
Claims (39)
1.-9. (canceled)
10. A dynamic spine stabilization implant adapted to be implanted in a spine of a patient comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into bone of the patient;
a body including a shield with a shield cavity, the shield cavity having a first end and an open end and a shield cavity axis, said body extending from said anchor;
a deflection rod having a first end and a proximal end and a longitudinal axis, the deflection rod mounted in said shield cavity such that the first end of the deflection rod is connected to the first end of the shield cavity, and the proximal end extends out of the open end of the shield cavity; and the longitudinal axis is aligned with the shield cavity axis;
the deflection rod including a shaft extending from the connection of the deflection rod and the shield cavity and out of the open end of the shield cavity;
said shield cavity extending along said shaft of said deflection rod;
a gap defined between said deflection rod and said shield, said gap extending from the open end of the shield cavity at least partway along the shield cavity towards the first end of the shield cavity and said gap extending along the shaft of said deflection rod;
said gap being configured to allow deflection of the deflection rod within the shield cavity to thereby allow deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod away from alignment with the shield cavity axis in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod; and
wherein said deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod away from alignment with the shield cavity axis is limited by contact between the shaft of the deflection rod and the shield cavity.
11. The implant of claim 10 , wherein said deflection rod increases in effective stiffness after an amount of deflection of said proximal end of the deflection rod.
12. The implant of claim 10 , wherein said gap is an annular gap.
13. A dynamic spine stabilization implant adapted to be implanted in a spine of a patient comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into bone of the patient;
a body including a shield with a shield cavity, the shield cavity having a first end and an open end, said body extending from said anchor;
a deflection rod having a first end and a proximal end and a longitudinal axis, the deflection rod mounted in said shield cavity such that the first end is secured in the first end of the shield cavity and the proximal end extends out of the open end of the shield cavity; and
said deflection rod being spaced from said shield along a first portion of said deflection rod extending from the proximal end such that said first portion of said deflection rod is configured for deflection perpendicular to the longitudinal axis in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod, said deflection of said first portion of said deflection rod being limited by the shield cavity.
14. A dynamic spine stabilization implant adapted to be implanted in a spine of a patient comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into bone of the patient;
a body including a shield with a shield cavity, the shield cavity having a first end and an open end and a shield cavity axis, said body extending from said anchor;
a deflection rod having a first end and a proximal end and a longitudinal axis, the deflection rod mounted in said shield cavity such that the first end is secured in the first end of the shield cavity, and the proximal end extends out of the open end of the shield cavity;
a gap defined between said deflection rod and said shield, said gap extending from the open end of the shield cavity at least partway along the shield cavity towards the first end of the shield cavity, said gap extending along said deflection rod;
said gap being configured to allow deflection of the deflection rod within the shield cavity to thereby allow deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod; and
wherein said deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod is limited by contact between the deflection rod and the shield cavity.
15. A dynamic spine stabilization implant comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into the bone of a patient, the anchor having a longitudinal axis;
an anchor head extending from said anchor;
a deflection cavity in said anchor head, said deflection cavity having a deflection cavity wall, and an open end and a closed end;
a deflection rod having a first end secured at the closed end of the deflection cavity and a proximal end extending out of the open end of the deflection cavity and said cavity wall extends along said deflection rod;
wherein the dynamic spine stabilization implant is configured such that a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod causes resilient deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod; and
wherein resilient deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod is limited by contact between the proximal end of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity wall.
16. The implant of claim 15 , wherein the deflection cavity is cone-shaped and decreases in diameter going in a direction away from the open end of said deflection cavity.
17. The implant of claim 15 , wherein the spine implant is configured such that a load applied to the proximal portion of the deflection rod causes resilient deflection of the proximal portion of the deflection rod away from alignment with the longitudinal axis of the bone anchor by bending of the deflection rod.
18. The implant of claim 15 , further comprising a connector at the proximal end of the deflection rod configured for mounting a spinal rod to the deflection rod without preventing deflection of the deflection rod.
19. The implant of claim 15 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting perpendicular to the deflection rod.
20. The implant of claim 15 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force action inside of the cavity located between the open end and the closed end of the deflection cavity.
21. The implant of claim 15 wherein the contact which limits resilient deflection between the proximal portion of the deflection rod and the deflection wall cavity occurs between the open end of the deflection cavity and the closed end of the deflection cavity along the cavity wall.
22. The implant of claim 15 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting inside of said cavity.
23. The implant of claim 15 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a material located inside of said cavity.
24. A dynamic spine stabilization implant comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into the bone of a patient, the anchor having a longitudinal axis;
an anchor head extending from said anchor;
said anchor head including a deflection cavity aligned with the longitudinal axis of the anchor;
said deflection cavity having a deflection cavity wall, a first end with an opening through the anchor head and a second end internal to the anchor head;
a deflection rod provided in said deflection cavity;
said deflection rod having a distal portion connected to the deflection cavity and a proximal portion extending out of the opening of the deflection cavity;
the deflection rod including a shaft extending from the connection of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity and through the opening in the anchor head;
said cavity wall extending along said shaft of said deflection rod;
wherein the dynamic spine stabilization implant is configured such that a load applied to the proximal portion of the deflection rod causes resilient deflection of the proximal portion of the deflection rod; and
wherein resilient deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod is limited by contact along said shaft between the proximal portion of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity wall.
25. The implant of claim 24 wherein said deflection cavity diminishes in diameter going from the first end toward the second end.
26. The implant of claim 24 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting perpendicular to the deflection rod.
27. The implant of claim 24 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting inside of the cavity located between the first end and the second end of the deflection cavity.
28. The implant of claim 24 wherein the contact which controls resilient deflection between the proximal portion of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity occurs between the first end of the deflection cavity and the second end of the deflection cavity along the cavity wall.
29. The implant of claim 24 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting inside of said cavity.
30. The implant of claim 24 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a material located inside of said cavity.
31. A dynamic spine stabilization implant comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into the bone of a patient;
an anchor head extending from said anchor;
said anchor head including a deflection cavity;
the deflection cavity having an open end, a closed end, a longitudinal axis and a cavity wall;
a deflection rod provided in said deflection cavity;
a distal end of the deflection rod connected to the closed end of the deflection cavity;
a proximal end of the deflection rod extending out of the open end of the deflection cavity;
the deflection rod including a shaft extending from the connection of the distal end of the deflection rod and the closed end of the deflection cavity past the open end of the deflection cavity;
said cavity wall extending along said shaft of said deflection rod;
the deflection rod being spaced from the wall of the deflection cavity at the open end by a gap which diminishes in size toward the closed end of the deflection cavity;
wherein said dynamic spine implant is configured such that the proximal end of the deflection rod can resiliently deflect in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod; and
wherein contact along said shaft with the cavity wall limits resilient deflection of the proximal end of the deflection rod in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod.
32. The implant of claim 31 , further comprising a connector at the proximal end of the deflection rod configured for mounting a spinal rod to the deflection rod without preventing deflection of the deflection rod.
33. The implant of claim 31 , wherein the longitudinal axis of the deflection cavity is in-line with a longitudinal axis of the anchor.
34. The implant of claim 31 wherein the resilient deflection is caused by a force acting perpendicular to the deflection rod.
35. The implant of claim 31 wherein the resilient deflection is caused by a force action perpendicular to the cavity wall located between the open end and the closed end of the deflection cavity.
36. The implant of claim 31 wherein the contact which limits resilient deflection between the proximal portion of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity wall occurs between the open end of the deflection cavity and the closed end of the deflection cavity along the cavity wall.
37. The implant of claim 31 wherein the resilient deflection is caused by a force acting inside of said cavity.
38. The implant of claim 31 wherein the resilient deflection is caused by a material located inside of said cavity.
39. A dynamic spine stabilization implant comprising:
an anchor adapted to be inserted into the bone of a patient;
an anchor head having a deflection cavity, the deflection cavity having a deflection cavity wall, a central axis, and a deflection cavity opening;
a deflection rod having a distal end secured within said deflection cavity and a proximal end extending out of the deflection cavity opening, and said cavity wall extends along said deflection rod;
a gap located between the deflection cavity wall and the deflection rod at the deflection cavity opening which gap diminishes in size towards the distal end of the deflection rod; and
wherein the proximal end of the deflection rod can resiliently deflect in response to a load applied to the proximal end of the deflection rod and wherein contact between the deflection rod and the deflection cavity wall limits deflection of the deflection rod.
40. The implant of claim 39 , further comprising a connector at the proximal end of the deflection rod configured for mounting a spinal rod to the deflection rod without preventing deflection of the deflection rod.
41. The implant of claim 39 , wherein the central axis of the deflection cavity is in-line with a longitudinal axis of the anchor.
42. The implant of claim 39 , where, in the absence of deflection of the deflection rod, the deflection rod and the bone anchor are colinear.
43. The implant of claim 39 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force acting perpendicular to the deflection rod.
44. The implant of claim 39 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a force action inside of the cavity located between the deflection cavity opening and the distal ending of the deflection rod.
45. The implant of claim 39 wherein the contact which limits resilient deflection between the proximal portion of the deflection rod and the deflection cavity wall occurs between the open end of the deflection cavity and a closed end of the deflection cavity along the cavity wall.
46. The implant of claim 39 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a forced acting inside of said cavity.
47. The implant of claim 39 wherein the resilient deflection is resisted by a material located inside of said cavity.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/230,337 US20120046696A1 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2011-09-12 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US94216207P | 2007-06-05 | 2007-06-05 | |
US2879208P | 2008-02-14 | 2008-02-14 | |
US3159808P | 2008-02-26 | 2008-02-26 | |
US5734008P | 2008-05-30 | 2008-05-30 | |
US12/130,454 US8057514B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US13/230,337 US20120046696A1 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2011-09-12 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/130,454 Continuation US8057514B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20120046696A1 true US20120046696A1 (en) | 2012-02-23 |
Family
ID=56291059
Family Applications (8)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/130,467 Expired - Fee Related US8052722B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Dual deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,411 Expired - Fee Related US7985243B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system with mount for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,475 Expired - Fee Related US7963978B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Method for implanting a deflection rod system and customizing the deflection rod system for a particular patient need for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system |
US12/130,454 Expired - Fee Related US8057514B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,457 Expired - Fee Related US8070776B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system for use with a vertebral fusion implant for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,395 Expired - Fee Related US8070775B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,423 Expired - Fee Related US8048113B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system with a non-linear deflection to load characteristic for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US13/230,337 Abandoned US20120046696A1 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2011-09-12 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Family Applications Before (7)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/130,467 Expired - Fee Related US8052722B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Dual deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,411 Expired - Fee Related US7985243B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system with mount for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,475 Expired - Fee Related US7963978B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Method for implanting a deflection rod system and customizing the deflection rod system for a particular patient need for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system |
US12/130,454 Expired - Fee Related US8057514B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,457 Expired - Fee Related US8070776B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system for use with a vertebral fusion implant for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,395 Expired - Fee Related US8070775B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US12/130,423 Expired - Fee Related US8048113B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2008-05-30 | Deflection rod system with a non-linear deflection to load characteristic for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (8) | US8052722B2 (en) |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10149702B2 (en) | 2015-01-12 | 2018-12-11 | Imds Llc | Polyaxial screw and rod system |
US10603091B2 (en) | 2014-02-24 | 2020-03-31 | Curtin University Of Technology | Fastener |
US10729480B2 (en) | 2016-03-18 | 2020-08-04 | Curtin University | Expandable fastener for orthopaedic applications |
WO2022187080A1 (en) * | 2021-03-01 | 2022-09-09 | University Of Washington | Methods and devices to measure angular stiffness of dental and medical implants |
US11944452B2 (en) | 2017-03-10 | 2024-04-02 | University Of Washington | Methods and systems to measure and evaluate stability of medical implants |
Families Citing this family (100)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7833250B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-11-16 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw with helically wound capture connection |
US8353932B2 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2013-01-15 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone anchor assembly with one-piece closure, pressure insert and plastic elongate member |
US10729469B2 (en) | 2006-01-09 | 2020-08-04 | Roger P. Jackson | Flexible spinal stabilization assembly with spacer having off-axis core member |
US7862587B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2011-01-04 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization assemblies, tool set and method |
US10258382B2 (en) | 2007-01-18 | 2019-04-16 | Roger P. Jackson | Rod-cord dynamic connection assemblies with slidable bone anchor attachment members along the cord |
US8292926B2 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2012-10-23 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization connecting member with elastic core and outer sleeve |
US8876868B2 (en) | 2002-09-06 | 2014-11-04 | Roger P. Jackson | Helical guide and advancement flange with radially loaded lip |
US7621918B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2009-11-24 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool set and method |
US7627343B2 (en) * | 2003-04-25 | 2009-12-01 | Apple Inc. | Media player system |
US7377923B2 (en) | 2003-05-22 | 2008-05-27 | Alphatec Spine, Inc. | Variable angle spinal screw assembly |
US8377102B2 (en) * | 2003-06-18 | 2013-02-19 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with spline capture connection and lower pressure insert |
US7776067B2 (en) | 2005-05-27 | 2010-08-17 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw with shank articulation pressure insert and method |
US7766915B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2010-08-03 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic fixation assemblies with inner core and outer coil-like member |
US8926670B2 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2015-01-06 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw assembly |
US8137386B2 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2012-03-20 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw apparatus |
US8398682B2 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2013-03-19 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw assembly |
US8814911B2 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2014-08-26 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw with cam connection and lock and release insert |
US8092500B2 (en) | 2007-05-01 | 2012-01-10 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization connecting member with floating core, compression spacer and over-mold |
US7179261B2 (en) | 2003-12-16 | 2007-02-20 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Percutaneous access devices and bone anchor assemblies |
US11419642B2 (en) | 2003-12-16 | 2022-08-23 | Medos International Sarl | Percutaneous access devices and bone anchor assemblies |
US7527638B2 (en) | 2003-12-16 | 2009-05-05 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Methods and devices for minimally invasive spinal fixation element placement |
US7160300B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2007-01-09 | Jackson Roger P | Orthopedic implant rod reduction tool set and method |
US8152810B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2012-04-10 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool set and method |
US11241261B2 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2022-02-08 | Roger P Jackson | Apparatus and method for soft spinal stabilization using a tensionable cord and releasable end structure |
EP1720468A4 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2010-01-27 | Roger P Jackson | Orthopedic implant rod reduction tool set and method |
US8066739B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2011-11-29 | Jackson Roger P | Tool system for dynamic spinal implants |
US8114158B2 (en) | 2004-08-03 | 2012-02-14 | Kspine, Inc. | Facet device and method |
US7651502B2 (en) | 2004-09-24 | 2010-01-26 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool set and method for rod reduction and fastener insertion |
US8926672B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2015-01-06 | Roger P. Jackson | Splay control closure for open bone anchor |
EP1811911A4 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2012-01-11 | Roger P Jackson | Helical guide and advancement flange with break-off extensions |
US8308782B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2012-11-13 | Jackson Roger P | Bone anchors with longitudinal connecting member engaging inserts and closures for fixation and optional angulation |
US9918745B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2018-03-20 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with pop-on shank and winged insert with friction fit compressive collet |
US8444681B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2013-05-21 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with pop-on shank, friction fit retainer and winged insert |
WO2006057837A1 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2006-06-01 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool attachment structure |
US9980753B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2018-05-29 | Roger P Jackson | pivotal anchor with snap-in-place insert having rotation blocking extensions |
US9216041B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2015-12-22 | Roger P. Jackson | Spinal connecting members with tensioned cords and rigid sleeves for engaging compression inserts |
US9168069B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2015-10-27 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with pop-on shank and winged insert with lower skirt for engaging a friction fit retainer |
DE102005005647A1 (en) * | 2005-02-08 | 2006-08-17 | Henning Kloss | Pedicle screw for spinal column stabilizing device, has screw head with two opposed oblong hole shaped recesses, and ball unit including recess for accommodating connecting unit and movably mounted in head |
US7901437B2 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2011-03-08 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization member with molded connection |
US10076361B2 (en) | 2005-02-22 | 2018-09-18 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw with spherical capture, compression and alignment and retention structures |
US8105368B2 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2012-01-31 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization connecting member with slitted core and outer sleeve |
FR2901687B1 (en) * | 2006-05-30 | 2008-12-19 | Arthroplastie Diffusion Sarl | BONE FASTENING DEVICE |
US8366745B2 (en) | 2007-05-01 | 2013-02-05 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization assembly having pre-compressed spacers with differential displacements |
US8475498B2 (en) | 2007-01-18 | 2013-07-02 | Roger P. Jackson | Dynamic stabilization connecting member with cord connection |
US8012177B2 (en) | 2007-02-12 | 2011-09-06 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization assembly with frusto-conical connection |
US10383660B2 (en) | 2007-05-01 | 2019-08-20 | Roger P. Jackson | Soft stabilization assemblies with pretensioned cords |
US8012175B2 (en) | 2007-06-05 | 2011-09-06 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Multi-directional deflection profile for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
US8052722B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2011-11-08 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Dual deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
WO2008154313A1 (en) | 2007-06-06 | 2008-12-18 | Vertech, Inc. | Medical device and method to correct deformity |
US9060813B1 (en) | 2008-02-29 | 2015-06-23 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Surgical fixation system and related methods |
AU2010260521C1 (en) | 2008-08-01 | 2013-08-01 | Roger P. Jackson | Longitudinal connecting member with sleeved tensioned cords |
US20100049252A1 (en) * | 2008-08-21 | 2010-02-25 | Southern Spine, Llc | Transverse Connector Device for Extending an Existing Spinal Fixation System |
US8828058B2 (en) | 2008-11-11 | 2014-09-09 | Kspine, Inc. | Growth directed vertebral fixation system with distractible connector(s) and apical control |
US8357183B2 (en) | 2009-03-26 | 2013-01-22 | Kspine, Inc. | Semi-constrained anchoring system |
US9668771B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2017-06-06 | Roger P Jackson | Soft stabilization assemblies with off-set connector |
EP2753252A1 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2014-07-16 | Jackson, Roger P. | Polyaxial bone anchor with pop-on shank and friction fit retainer with low profile edge lock |
US8998959B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2015-04-07 | Roger P Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchors with pop-on shank, fully constrained friction fit retainer and lock and release insert |
US11229457B2 (en) | 2009-06-15 | 2022-01-25 | Roger P. Jackson | Pivotal bone anchor assembly with insert tool deployment |
US8246657B1 (en) | 2009-06-29 | 2012-08-21 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Spinal cross connector |
US9168071B2 (en) | 2009-09-15 | 2015-10-27 | K2M, Inc. | Growth modulation system |
EP2485654B1 (en) | 2009-10-05 | 2021-05-05 | Jackson P. Roger | Polyaxial bone anchor with non-pivotable retainer and pop-on shank, some with friction fit |
WO2011069000A2 (en) | 2009-12-02 | 2011-06-09 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Low profile spinal prosthesis incorporating a bone anchor having a deflectable post and a compound spinal rod |
DE102010016854A1 (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2011-11-10 | Ulrich Gmbh & Co. Kg | Retaining device for vertebral bodies of the spine |
US9198696B1 (en) | 2010-05-27 | 2015-12-01 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Cross-connector and related methods |
US8518085B2 (en) * | 2010-06-10 | 2013-08-27 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Adaptive spinal rod and methods for stabilization of the spine |
AU2011299558A1 (en) | 2010-09-08 | 2013-05-02 | Roger P. Jackson | Dynamic stabilization members with elastic and inelastic sections |
DE112011104028A1 (en) | 2010-11-02 | 2013-12-12 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with quick-release shaft and rotatable holder |
US9247964B1 (en) | 2011-03-01 | 2016-02-02 | Nuasive, Inc. | Spinal Cross-connector |
US9387013B1 (en) | 2011-03-01 | 2016-07-12 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Posterior cervical fixation system |
WO2012128825A1 (en) | 2011-03-24 | 2012-09-27 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone anchor with compound articulation and pop-on shank |
WO2012167105A1 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-06 | Kspine, Inc. | Spinal correction system actuators |
US8758411B1 (en) | 2011-10-25 | 2014-06-24 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Implants and methods for treating spinal disorders |
US8920472B2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2014-12-30 | Kspine, Inc. | Spinal correction and secondary stabilization |
US9451987B2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2016-09-27 | K2M, Inc. | System and method for spinal correction |
US9468469B2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2016-10-18 | K2M, Inc. | Transverse coupler adjuster spinal correction systems and methods |
WO2014172632A2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2014-10-23 | Kspine, Inc. | Spinal correction and secondary stabilization |
US9468468B2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2016-10-18 | K2M, Inc. | Transverse connector for spinal stabilization system |
EP2790600B1 (en) * | 2011-12-12 | 2017-04-26 | Austen Bioinnovation Institute in Akron | Noninvasive device for adjusting fastener |
US10016226B2 (en) | 2011-12-12 | 2018-07-10 | Children's Hospital Medical Center Of Akron | Noninvasive device for adjusting fastener |
US8911479B2 (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2014-12-16 | Roger P. Jackson | Multi-start closures for open implants |
US8430916B1 (en) | 2012-02-07 | 2013-04-30 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Spinal rod connectors, methods of use, and spinal prosthesis incorporating spinal rod connectors |
US10687860B2 (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2020-06-23 | Retrospine Pty Ltd | Segmental correction of lumbar lordosis |
DE102012016294B4 (en) * | 2012-08-16 | 2014-02-27 | Spontech Spine Intelligence Group Ag | Polyaxial connector for spinal fixation systems and spine fixation system |
US8911478B2 (en) | 2012-11-21 | 2014-12-16 | Roger P. Jackson | Splay control closure for open bone anchor |
US10058354B2 (en) | 2013-01-28 | 2018-08-28 | Roger P. Jackson | Pivotal bone anchor assembly with frictional shank head seating surfaces |
US8852239B2 (en) | 2013-02-15 | 2014-10-07 | Roger P Jackson | Sagittal angle screw with integral shank and receiver |
WO2014172445A1 (en) * | 2013-04-17 | 2014-10-23 | Ebi, Llc | Cross connector system |
US9468471B2 (en) | 2013-09-17 | 2016-10-18 | K2M, Inc. | Transverse coupler adjuster spinal correction systems and methods |
US9566092B2 (en) | 2013-10-29 | 2017-02-14 | Roger P. Jackson | Cervical bone anchor with collet retainer and outer locking sleeve |
US9717533B2 (en) | 2013-12-12 | 2017-08-01 | Roger P. Jackson | Bone anchor closure pivot-splay control flange form guide and advancement structure |
US9451993B2 (en) | 2014-01-09 | 2016-09-27 | Roger P. Jackson | Bi-radial pop-on cervical bone anchor |
US9597119B2 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2017-03-21 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with polymer sleeve |
US10064658B2 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2018-09-04 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone anchor with insert guides |
TWI554304B (en) * | 2014-11-07 | 2016-10-21 | Yu-Han Chen | Projection capacitive body motion detection system |
FR3055573B1 (en) * | 2016-09-07 | 2018-08-31 | Sidel Participations | LOCKING DEVICE FOR A MOLDING UNIT OF THERMOPLASTIC CONTAINERS |
EP3537999A2 (en) | 2016-11-09 | 2019-09-18 | Children's Hospital Medical Center of Akron | Distraction osteogenesis system |
US10194995B2 (en) * | 2016-12-12 | 2019-02-05 | Medos International Sarl | Systems and methods for en bloc registration in navigated surgery |
US10610265B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2020-04-07 | K2M, Inc. | Polyaxial bone screw with increased angulation |
US11687165B2 (en) * | 2020-12-30 | 2023-06-27 | Meta Platforms Technologies, Llc | Stabilizing gestures in artificial reality environments |
US11331125B1 (en) | 2021-10-07 | 2022-05-17 | Ortho Inventions, Llc | Low profile rod-to-rod coupler |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050143737A1 (en) * | 2003-12-31 | 2005-06-30 | John Pafford | Dynamic spinal stabilization system |
US20060052786A1 (en) * | 2004-08-17 | 2006-03-09 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial device for spine stabilization during osteosynthesis |
US7163538B2 (en) * | 2002-02-13 | 2007-01-16 | Cross Medical Products, Inc. | Posterior rod system |
US7335201B2 (en) * | 2003-09-26 | 2008-02-26 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial bone screw with torqueless fastening |
US7819902B2 (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2010-10-26 | Custom Spine, Inc. | Medialised rod pedicle screw assembly |
US8048121B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2011-11-01 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Spine implant with a defelction rod system anchored to a bone anchor and method |
Family Cites Families (501)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB780652A (en) | 1954-04-30 | 1957-08-07 | Zimmer Orthopaedic Ltd | Improvements in or relating to apparatus for use in spinal fixation |
JPS52130183A (en) | 1975-04-22 | 1977-11-01 | Ingubuaru Buranemaruku Peru | Method of forming bone setting |
GB1551706A (en) | 1975-04-28 | 1979-08-30 | Downs Surgical Ltd | Surgical implant |
DE2649042B1 (en) | 1976-10-28 | 1978-01-05 | Ulrich Max Bernhard | Corrective implant for anterior derotation spondylodesis and device for adjusting the corrective implant |
CH639264A5 (en) | 1979-09-11 | 1983-11-15 | Synthes Ag | Instrument used for the treatment of vertebral fractures and scoliosis |
US4409968A (en) | 1980-02-04 | 1983-10-18 | Drummond Denis S | Method and apparatus for engaging a hook assembly to a spinal column |
US4411259A (en) | 1980-02-04 | 1983-10-25 | Drummond Denis S | Apparatus for engaging a hook assembly to a spinal column |
PL127121B1 (en) | 1980-07-30 | 1983-09-30 | Wyzsza Szkola Inzynierska | Surgical strut for treating spinal affections |
US4347845A (en) | 1981-03-23 | 1982-09-07 | Mayfield Jack K | Hook inserter device |
US4567885A (en) | 1981-11-03 | 1986-02-04 | Androphy Gary W | Triplanar knee resection system |
US4422451A (en) | 1982-03-22 | 1983-12-27 | Ali Kalamchi | Spinal compression and distraction instrumentation |
US4479491A (en) | 1982-07-26 | 1984-10-30 | Martin Felix M | Intervertebral stabilization implant |
DE3306657C2 (en) | 1983-02-25 | 1986-12-11 | Fa. Heinrich C. Ulrich, 7900 Ulm | Spine correction implant with a distraction rod |
FR2545350B1 (en) | 1983-05-04 | 1985-08-23 | Cotrel Yves | DEVICE FOR SHRINKAGE OF THE RACHIS |
US4611580A (en) | 1983-11-23 | 1986-09-16 | Henry Ford Hospital | Intervertebral body stabilization |
US4611581A (en) | 1983-12-16 | 1986-09-16 | Acromed Corporation | Apparatus for straightening spinal columns |
US4696290A (en) | 1983-12-16 | 1987-09-29 | Acromed Corporation | Apparatus for straightening spinal columns |
US4611582A (en) | 1983-12-27 | 1986-09-16 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Vertebral clamp |
GB2173104B (en) | 1984-02-28 | 1987-11-25 | Peter John Webb | Spinal fixation apparatus |
US4604995A (en) | 1984-03-30 | 1986-08-12 | Stephens David C | Spinal stabilizer |
CA1227902A (en) | 1984-04-02 | 1987-10-13 | Raymond G. Tronzo | Fenestrated hip screw and method of augmented internal fixation |
US4573454A (en) | 1984-05-17 | 1986-03-04 | Hoffman Gregory A | Spinal fixation apparatus |
US4655199A (en) | 1985-03-29 | 1987-04-07 | Acromed Corporation | Spinal column straightening apparatus |
US4743260A (en) | 1985-06-10 | 1988-05-10 | Burton Charles V | Method for a flexible stabilization system for a vertebral column |
US4653481A (en) | 1985-07-24 | 1987-03-31 | Howland Robert S | Advanced spine fixation system and method |
US4773402A (en) | 1985-09-13 | 1988-09-27 | Isola Implants, Inc. | Dorsal transacral surgical implant |
US4719905B1 (en) | 1985-11-01 | 1995-10-31 | Acromed Corp | Apparatus and method for maintaining vertebrae in a desired relationship |
US4648388B1 (en) | 1985-11-01 | 1995-10-31 | Acromed Corp | Apparatus and method for maintaining vertebrae in a desired relationship |
DE3614101C1 (en) | 1986-04-25 | 1987-10-22 | Juergen Prof Dr Med Harms | Pedicle screw |
US4805602A (en) | 1986-11-03 | 1989-02-21 | Danninger Medical Technology | Transpedicular screw and rod system |
DE3639810C2 (en) | 1986-11-21 | 1998-04-09 | Heinrich Ulrich | Implant for spine correction and / or stabilization |
FR2612070B1 (en) | 1987-03-12 | 1992-09-18 | Privat Jean Marie | POSTERIOR SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE |
FR2615095B1 (en) | 1987-05-15 | 1989-08-18 | Fabrication Materiel Orthopedi | OSTEOSYNTHESIS INSTRUMENTATION FOR THE CORRECTION OF LUMBAR SCOLIOSES BY POSTERIOR PATHWAY |
DE3800052A1 (en) | 1987-07-08 | 1989-07-13 | Harms Juergen | POSITIONING SCREW |
US4913134A (en) | 1987-07-24 | 1990-04-03 | Biotechnology, Inc. | Spinal fixation system |
US4887595A (en) | 1987-07-29 | 1989-12-19 | Acromed Corporation | Surgically implantable device for spinal columns |
CH683963A5 (en) | 1988-06-10 | 1994-06-30 | Synthes Ag | Internal fixation. |
US4950269A (en) | 1988-06-13 | 1990-08-21 | Acromed Corporation | Spinal column fixation device |
FR2633177B1 (en) | 1988-06-24 | 1991-03-08 | Fabrication Materiel Orthopedi | IMPLANT FOR A SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE, ESPECIALLY IN TRAUMATOLOGY |
US5112332A (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1992-05-12 | Zimmer, Inc. | Method of performing spinal surgery |
US4955885A (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1990-09-11 | Zimmer, Inc. | Surgical slider instrument and method of using instrument |
US5074864A (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1991-12-24 | Zimmer, Inc. | Clamp assembly for use in a spinal system |
GB2254394B (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1993-03-17 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Coupler assembly |
US5147359A (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1992-09-15 | Zimmer, Inc. | Spinal hook body |
US5201734A (en) | 1988-12-21 | 1993-04-13 | Zimmer, Inc. | Spinal locking sleeve assembly |
FR2642645B1 (en) | 1989-02-03 | 1992-08-14 | Breard Francis | FLEXIBLE INTERVERTEBRAL STABILIZER AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ITS VOLTAGE BEFORE PLACEMENT ON THE RACHIS |
USRE36221E (en) | 1989-02-03 | 1999-06-01 | Breard; Francis Henri | Flexible inter-vertebral stabilizer as well as process and apparatus for determining or verifying its tension before installation on the spinal column |
US5024213A (en) | 1989-02-08 | 1991-06-18 | Acromed Corporation | Connector for a corrective device |
US5084049A (en) | 1989-02-08 | 1992-01-28 | Acromed Corporation | Transverse connector for spinal column corrective devices |
FR2642643B1 (en) | 1989-02-09 | 1991-05-10 | Vignaud Jean Louis | SPINAL INSTRUMENTATION FOR UNIVERSAL PEDICULAR FIXATION WITH MICROMETRIC ADJUSTMENT DIAPASON SCREW |
US4987892A (en) | 1989-04-04 | 1991-01-29 | Krag Martin H | Spinal fixation device |
FR2645732B1 (en) | 1989-04-13 | 1997-01-03 | Cotrel Yves | VERTEBRAL IMPLANT FOR OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE |
DE3923996A1 (en) | 1989-07-20 | 1991-01-31 | Lutz Biedermann | RECORDING PART FOR JOINTLY CONNECTING TO A SCREW FOR MAKING A PEDICLE SCREW |
US5261913A (en) | 1989-07-26 | 1993-11-16 | J.B.S. Limited Company | Device for straightening, securing, compressing and elongating the spinal column |
US5344422A (en) | 1989-10-30 | 1994-09-06 | Synthes (U.S.A.) | Pedicular screw clamp |
CA2035348C (en) | 1990-02-08 | 2000-05-16 | Jean-Louis Vignaud | Adjustable fastening device with spinal osteosynthesis rods |
FR2659225B1 (en) | 1990-03-08 | 1995-09-08 | Sofamor | TRANSVERSE FIXING DEVICE FOR PROVIDING A RIGID CROSS-LINK BETWEEN TWO RODS OF A SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS SYSTEM. |
US5030220A (en) | 1990-03-29 | 1991-07-09 | Advanced Spine Fixation Systems Incorporated | Spine fixation system |
WO1991016020A1 (en) | 1990-04-26 | 1991-10-31 | Danninger Medical Technology, Inc. | Transpedicular screw system and method of use |
US5290289A (en) | 1990-05-22 | 1994-03-01 | Sanders Albert E | Nitinol spinal instrumentation and method for surgically treating scoliosis |
US5102412A (en) | 1990-06-19 | 1992-04-07 | Chaim Rogozinski | System for instrumentation of the spine in the treatment of spinal deformities |
US5129900B1 (en) | 1990-07-24 | 1998-12-29 | Acromed Corp | Spinal column retaining method and apparatus |
CH681853A5 (en) | 1990-08-21 | 1993-06-15 | Synthes Ag | |
FR2666981B1 (en) | 1990-09-21 | 1993-06-25 | Commarmond Jacques | SYNTHETIC LIGAMENT VERTEBRAL. |
US5127912A (en) | 1990-10-05 | 1992-07-07 | R. Charles Ray | Sacral implant system |
US5300073A (en) | 1990-10-05 | 1994-04-05 | Salut, Ltd. | Sacral implant system |
US6520990B1 (en) | 1990-10-05 | 2003-02-18 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Lateral fixation plates for a spinal system |
CH685850A5 (en) | 1990-11-26 | 1995-10-31 | Synthes Ag | anchoring device |
US5113685A (en) | 1991-01-28 | 1992-05-19 | Acromed Corporation | Apparatus for contouring spine plates and/or rods |
FR2672202B1 (en) | 1991-02-05 | 1993-07-30 | Safir | BONE SURGICAL IMPLANT, ESPECIALLY FOR INTERVERTEBRAL STABILIZER. |
CH683024A5 (en) | 1991-04-16 | 1993-12-31 | Synthes Ag | Connecting means for connecting a first adjustable with a second construction element, in particular of tubes or rods of a fixation device. |
FR2676911B1 (en) | 1991-05-30 | 1998-03-06 | Psi Ste Civile Particuliere | INTERVERTEBRAL STABILIZATION DEVICE WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS. |
US5261911A (en) | 1991-06-18 | 1993-11-16 | Allen Carl | Anterolateral spinal fixation system |
FR2680461B1 (en) | 1991-08-19 | 1993-11-26 | Fabrication Mat Orthopedique | IMPLANT FOR OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE, ESPECIALLY OF THE RACHIS, AND CORRESPONDING DEVICE FOR ITS PLACEMENT. |
US5257993A (en) | 1991-10-04 | 1993-11-02 | Acromed Corporation | Top-entry rod retainer |
JP2664614B2 (en) | 1992-02-20 | 1997-10-15 | ジ・ベ・エス ソシエテ アノニム | Cervical spine correction, fixation, clamping and retraction devices |
DE9202745U1 (en) | 1992-03-02 | 1992-04-30 | Howmedica Gmbh, 2314 Schoenkirchen, De | |
US5171279A (en) | 1992-03-17 | 1992-12-15 | Danek Medical | Method for subcutaneous suprafascial pedicular internal fixation |
EP0572790B1 (en) | 1992-06-04 | 1996-02-14 | Synthes AG, Chur | Osteosynthesis anchoring element |
US5281222A (en) | 1992-06-30 | 1994-01-25 | Zimmer, Inc. | Spinal implant system |
US5498264A (en) | 1992-07-21 | 1996-03-12 | Synthes (U.S.A.) | Clamp connection for connecting two construction components for a setting device, particularly an osteosynthetic setting device |
US5397363A (en) | 1992-08-11 | 1995-03-14 | Gelbard; Steven D. | Spinal stabilization implant system |
EP0582857B1 (en) | 1992-08-12 | 1997-02-05 | Synthes AG, Chur | Spinal fixation element |
GB9217578D0 (en) | 1992-08-19 | 1992-09-30 | Surgicarft Ltd | Surgical implants,etc |
US5382248A (en) | 1992-09-10 | 1995-01-17 | H. D. Medical, Inc. | System and method for stabilizing bone segments |
ZA937672B (en) | 1992-10-22 | 1994-05-16 | Danek Medical Inc | Spinal rod transverse connector for supporting vertebral fixation elements |
FR2697742B1 (en) | 1992-11-06 | 1994-12-16 | Biomat | Osteosynthesis device for spinal consolidation. |
US5562735A (en) | 1992-11-09 | 1996-10-08 | Hospital For Joint Diseases | Spinal stabilization system and improved method |
US5702395A (en) | 1992-11-10 | 1997-12-30 | Sofamor S.N.C. | Spine osteosynthesis instrumentation for an anterior approach |
DE69330909T2 (en) * | 1992-11-12 | 2002-06-20 | Neville Alleyne | HEART PROTECTION DEVICE |
DE4243951C2 (en) | 1992-12-23 | 1997-07-03 | Plus Endoprothetik Ag | Device for stiffening a spinal column section consisting of at least two vertebrae |
CA2103200A1 (en) | 1992-12-28 | 1994-06-29 | Robert S. Howland | Cervical spine rod fixation system |
US5947965A (en) | 1992-12-31 | 1999-09-07 | Bryan; Donald W. | Spinal fixation apparatus and method |
US5527314A (en) | 1993-01-04 | 1996-06-18 | Danek Medical, Inc. | Spinal fixation system |
US5282801A (en) | 1993-02-17 | 1994-02-01 | Danek Medical, Inc. | Top tightening clamp assembly for a spinal fixation system |
US5549607A (en) | 1993-02-19 | 1996-08-27 | Alphatec Manufacturing, Inc, | Apparatus for spinal fixation system |
DE4307576C1 (en) | 1993-03-10 | 1994-04-21 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Bone screw esp. for spinal column correction - has U=shaped holder section for receiving straight or bent rod |
US5415661A (en) | 1993-03-24 | 1995-05-16 | University Of Miami | Implantable spinal assist device |
FR2704133B1 (en) | 1993-04-19 | 1995-07-13 | Stryker Corp | Implant for osteosynthesis device in particular of the spine. |
FR2704134B1 (en) | 1993-04-20 | 1998-08-28 | Stryker Corp | Assembly piece for osteosynthesis device. |
ES2115767T3 (en) | 1993-05-11 | 1998-07-01 | Synthes Ag | FIXING ELEMENT FOR OSTEOSYNTHESIS AND HANDLING ACCESSORY. |
FR2705226B1 (en) | 1993-05-17 | 1995-07-07 | Tornier Sa | Spine fixator to maintain a spine. |
US6077262A (en) | 1993-06-04 | 2000-06-20 | Synthes (U.S.A.) | Posterior spinal implant |
US5584831A (en) | 1993-07-09 | 1996-12-17 | September 28, Inc. | Spinal fixation device and method |
US5437670A (en) | 1993-08-19 | 1995-08-01 | Danek Medical, Inc. | Attachment plate for top-tightening clamp assembly in a spinal fixation system |
FR2709246B1 (en) | 1993-08-27 | 1995-09-29 | Martin Jean Raymond | Dynamic implanted spinal orthosis. |
JP3683909B2 (en) | 1993-10-08 | 2005-08-17 | ロゴジンスキ,チェーム | Device for treating spinal conditions |
WO1995010238A1 (en) | 1993-10-08 | 1995-04-20 | Chaim Rogozinski | Spinal treatment apparatus and method including multi-directional attachment member |
US5380326A (en) | 1993-11-12 | 1995-01-10 | Lin; Chih-I | Clamping device for vertebral locking rod |
FR2712481B1 (en) * | 1993-11-18 | 1996-01-12 | Graf Henry | Improvements to flexible inter-vertebral stabilizers. |
US5466237A (en) | 1993-11-19 | 1995-11-14 | Cross Medical Products, Inc. | Variable locking stabilizer anchor seat and screw |
EP0786964B1 (en) | 1993-11-19 | 2004-03-31 | Cross Medical Products, Inc. | Rod anchor seat having sliding closure member |
US5628740A (en) | 1993-12-23 | 1997-05-13 | Mullane; Thomas S. | Articulating toggle bolt bone screw |
US5611800A (en) | 1994-02-15 | 1997-03-18 | Alphatec Manufacturing, Inc. | Spinal fixation system |
ES2133517T3 (en) | 1994-02-28 | 1999-09-16 | Sulzer Orthopadie Ag | STABILIZER FOR ADJACENT VERTEBRAS. |
US5601552A (en) | 1994-03-18 | 1997-02-11 | Sofamor, S.N.C. | Fixing device for a rigid transverse connection device between rods of a spinal osteosynthesis system |
WO1998008454A1 (en) | 1994-05-25 | 1998-03-05 | Jackson Roger P | Apparatus and method for spinal fixation and correction of spinal deformities |
DE59409553D1 (en) | 1994-06-30 | 2000-11-23 | Sulzer Orthopaedie Ag Baar | Device for connecting vertebral bones |
DE4425357C2 (en) | 1994-07-18 | 1996-07-04 | Harms Juergen | Anchoring element |
US5961517A (en) | 1994-07-18 | 1999-10-05 | Biedermann; Lutz | Anchoring member and adjustment tool therefor |
FR2722980B1 (en) | 1994-07-26 | 1996-09-27 | Samani Jacques | INTERTEPINOUS VERTEBRAL IMPLANT |
US5681311A (en) | 1994-09-15 | 1997-10-28 | Smith & Nephew, Inc. | Osteosynthesis apparatus |
US5690633A (en) | 1994-09-23 | 1997-11-25 | Smith & Nephew Richards, Inc. | Orthopedic fracture fixation device |
US6004322A (en) | 1994-10-25 | 1999-12-21 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Modular pedicle screw system |
FR2726171B1 (en) * | 1994-10-28 | 1997-01-24 | Jbs Sa | REHABITABLE CONNECTING SCREW DEVICE FOR BONE JOINT, IN PARTICULAR FOR STABILIZING AT LEAST TWO VERTEBRES |
JP3113285B2 (en) | 1994-11-16 | 2000-11-27 | アドバンスト スパイン フィクセイション システムス,インコーポレイティド | Segmental lamina grab hook |
US6344057B1 (en) | 1994-11-22 | 2002-02-05 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Adjustable vertebral body replacement |
US5716358A (en) | 1994-12-02 | 1998-02-10 | Johnson & Johnson Professional, Inc. | Directional bone fixation device |
FR2729556B1 (en) | 1995-01-23 | 1998-10-16 | Sofamor | SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE WITH MEDIAN HOOK AND VERTEBRAL ANCHOR SUPPORT |
US5643260A (en) | 1995-02-14 | 1997-07-01 | Smith & Nephew, Inc. | Orthopedic fixation system |
DE19507141B4 (en) | 1995-03-01 | 2004-12-23 | Harms, Jürgen, Prof. Dr.med. | Locking |
AU2101495A (en) | 1995-03-13 | 1996-10-02 | Steven D. Gelbard | Spinal stabilization implant system |
DE19509332C1 (en) | 1995-03-15 | 1996-08-14 | Harms Juergen | Anchoring element |
DE19511268A1 (en) | 1995-03-27 | 1996-10-02 | Johannes Franz Dr Med Hoenig | Osteosynthesis plate for bone stabilising e.g. post-tumour resection etc. |
US5688272A (en) | 1995-03-30 | 1997-11-18 | Danek Medical, Inc. | Top-tightening transverse connector for a spinal fixation system |
US5716355A (en) | 1995-04-10 | 1998-02-10 | Sofamor Danek Group, Inc. | Transverse connection for spinal rods |
US5545167A (en) | 1995-04-11 | 1996-08-13 | Lin; Chih-I | Retaining mechanism of vertebral fixation rod |
US5630816A (en) | 1995-05-01 | 1997-05-20 | Kambin; Parviz | Double barrel spinal fixation system and method |
FR2734147B1 (en) | 1995-05-19 | 1997-10-10 | Klein Jean Michel | IMPLANTABLE OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE |
JP3689146B2 (en) | 1995-05-30 | 2005-08-31 | ペンタックス株式会社 | Elements for screw fixation to bone |
ATE251423T1 (en) | 1995-06-06 | 2003-10-15 | Sdgi Holdings Inc | DEVICE FOR CONNECTING ADJACENT SPINAL SUPPORT RODS |
US5683391A (en) | 1995-06-07 | 1997-11-04 | Danek Medical, Inc. | Anterior spinal instrumentation and method for implantation and revision |
US5676665A (en) | 1995-06-23 | 1997-10-14 | Bryan; Donald W. | Spinal fixation apparatus and method |
US5609593A (en) | 1995-07-13 | 1997-03-11 | Fastenetix, Llc | Advanced polyaxial locking hook and coupling element device for use with top loading rod fixation devices |
US5702392A (en) | 1995-09-25 | 1997-12-30 | Wu; Shing-Sheng | Coupling plate for spinal correction and a correction device of using the same |
US6273914B1 (en) | 1995-09-28 | 2001-08-14 | Sparta, Inc. | Spinal implant |
US5683392A (en) | 1995-10-17 | 1997-11-04 | Wright Medical Technology, Inc. | Multi-planar locking mechanism for bone fixation |
US5697929A (en) | 1995-10-18 | 1997-12-16 | Cross Medical Products, Inc. | Self-limiting set screw for use with spinal implant systems |
US5693053A (en) | 1995-10-19 | 1997-12-02 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Variable angle and transitional linking member |
US5688273A (en) | 1995-10-23 | 1997-11-18 | Fastenetix, Llc. | Spinal implant apparatus having a single central rod and plow hooks |
US5690632A (en) | 1995-11-30 | 1997-11-25 | Schwartz; Paul Steven | Osteosynthesis screw fastener having angularly adjustable threads and methods of use therefor |
US5667507A (en) | 1995-12-04 | 1997-09-16 | Fastenetix, Llc | Compression locking variable length cross-link device for use with dual rod apparatus |
AU1352097A (en) | 1995-12-22 | 1997-07-17 | Ohio Medical Instrument Company, Inc. | Spinal fixation device with laterally attachable connectors |
US5669910A (en) | 1996-01-02 | 1997-09-23 | Pioneer Laboratories, Inc. | Crosslink for implantable rods |
FR2743712B1 (en) | 1996-01-19 | 1998-04-30 | Louis Rene | POSTERIOR VERTEBRAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS ANCHORING DEVICE |
US5690629A (en) | 1996-04-24 | 1997-11-25 | Acromed Corporation | Apparatus for maintaining vertebrae of a spinal column in a desired spatial relationship |
US5702399A (en) | 1996-05-16 | 1997-12-30 | Pioneer Laboratories, Inc. | Surgical cable screw connector |
US5843082A (en) | 1996-05-31 | 1998-12-01 | Acromed Corporation | Cervical spine stabilization method and system |
US5713900A (en) | 1996-05-31 | 1998-02-03 | Acromed Corporation | Apparatus for retaining bone portions in a desired spatial relationship |
US5879350A (en) | 1996-09-24 | 1999-03-09 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-axial bone screw assembly |
US5885286A (en) | 1996-09-24 | 1999-03-23 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-axial bone screw assembly |
US5797911A (en) | 1996-09-24 | 1998-08-25 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-axial bone screw assembly |
US5725528A (en) | 1997-02-12 | 1998-03-10 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Modular polyaxial locking pedicle screw |
US5735851A (en) | 1996-10-09 | 1998-04-07 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Modular polyaxial locking pedicle screw |
US5800435A (en) | 1996-10-09 | 1998-09-01 | Techsys, Llc | Modular spinal plate for use with modular polyaxial locking pedicle screws |
US5863293A (en) | 1996-10-18 | 1999-01-26 | Spinal Innovations | Spinal implant fixation assembly |
US6171311B1 (en) | 1996-10-18 | 2001-01-09 | Marc Richelsoph | Transverse connector |
US5964760A (en) | 1996-10-18 | 1999-10-12 | Spinal Innovations | Spinal implant fixation assembly |
US6416515B1 (en) | 1996-10-24 | 2002-07-09 | Spinal Concepts, Inc. | Spinal fixation system |
US5728098A (en) | 1996-11-07 | 1998-03-17 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-angle bone screw assembly using shape-memory technology |
US5720751A (en) | 1996-11-27 | 1998-02-24 | Jackson; Roger P. | Tools for use in seating spinal rods in open ended implants |
US5782833A (en) | 1996-12-20 | 1998-07-21 | Haider; Thomas T. | Pedicle screw system for osteosynthesis |
US5683393A (en) | 1996-12-23 | 1997-11-04 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Bidirectional rod-hook locking mechanism |
US5776135A (en) | 1996-12-23 | 1998-07-07 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Side mounted polyaxial pedicle screw |
US6001098A (en) | 1997-01-17 | 1999-12-14 | Howmedica Gmbh | Connecting element for spinal stabilizing system |
US6371957B1 (en) | 1997-01-22 | 2002-04-16 | Synthes (Usa) | Device for connecting a longitudinal bar to a pedicle screw |
US5752957A (en) | 1997-02-12 | 1998-05-19 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Polyaxial mechanism for use with orthopaedic implant devices |
US5733286A (en) | 1997-02-12 | 1998-03-31 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Rod securing polyaxial locking screw and coupling element assembly |
US5713904A (en) | 1997-02-12 | 1998-02-03 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Selectively expandable sacral fixation screw-sleeve device |
US6127597A (en) | 1997-03-07 | 2000-10-03 | Discotech N.V. | Systems for percutaneous bone and spinal stabilization, fixation and repair |
FR2762986B1 (en) | 1997-05-07 | 1999-09-24 | Aesculap Jbs | OSTEOSYNTHESIS SYSTEM FOR VERTEBRAL ARTHRODESIS |
US5785711A (en) | 1997-05-15 | 1998-07-28 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Polyaxial pedicle screw having a through bar clamp locking mechanism |
US6413257B1 (en) | 1997-05-15 | 2002-07-02 | Surgical Dynamics, Inc. | Clamping connector for spinal fixation systems |
US5810819A (en) | 1997-05-15 | 1998-09-22 | Spinal Concepts, Inc. | Polyaxial pedicle screw having a compression locking rod gripping mechanism |
US6783526B1 (en) | 1997-05-15 | 2004-08-31 | Howmedica Osteonics Corp. | Transverse rod connector clip |
US5989254A (en) | 1997-05-20 | 1999-11-23 | Katz; Akiva Raphael | Pedicle screw assembly |
US5891145A (en) | 1997-07-14 | 1999-04-06 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-axial screw |
FR2770767B1 (en) | 1997-11-10 | 2000-03-10 | Dimso Sa | IMPLANT FOR VERTEBRA |
JP2001524346A (en) | 1997-11-29 | 2001-12-04 | サージクラフト・リミテッド | Surgical implants and surgical fixation screws |
US5980523A (en) | 1998-01-08 | 1999-11-09 | Jackson; Roger | Transverse connectors for spinal rods |
EP0933065A1 (en) | 1998-02-02 | 1999-08-04 | Sulzer Orthopädie AG | Pivotable attachment system for a bone screw |
FR2774581B1 (en) | 1998-02-10 | 2000-08-11 | Dimso Sa | INTEREPINOUS STABILIZER TO BE ATTACHED TO SPINOUS APOPHYSIS OF TWO VERTEBRES |
US6010503A (en) | 1998-04-03 | 2000-01-04 | Spinal Innovations, Llc | Locking mechanism |
JP4245806B2 (en) | 1998-04-29 | 2009-04-02 | ストリケ、スピーヌ | Vertebral osteosynthesis system for anterior fixation |
FR2778089B1 (en) | 1998-04-30 | 2000-07-21 | Dimso Sa | SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS SYSTEM WITH FLANGE AND LATCH |
DE29808593U1 (en) | 1998-05-13 | 1999-09-23 | Howmedica Gmbh | Device for connecting two spaced longitudinal rods of a spinal implant |
US6113601A (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2000-09-05 | Bones Consulting, Llc | Polyaxial pedicle screw having a loosely coupled locking cap |
US5989251A (en) | 1998-06-17 | 1999-11-23 | Surgical Dynamics, Inc. | Apparatus for spinal stabilization |
US6565565B1 (en) | 1998-06-17 | 2003-05-20 | Howmedica Osteonics Corp. | Device for securing spinal rods |
US6090111A (en) | 1998-06-17 | 2000-07-18 | Surgical Dynamics, Inc. | Device for securing spinal rods |
FR2781663B1 (en) | 1998-07-30 | 2000-10-13 | Materiel Orthopedique En Abreg | SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE |
US5925047A (en) | 1998-10-19 | 1999-07-20 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Coupled rod, anterior vertebral body screw, and staple assembly |
US5910142A (en) | 1998-10-19 | 1999-06-08 | Bones Consulting, Llc | Polyaxial pedicle screw having a rod clamping split ferrule coupling element |
US5899904A (en) | 1998-10-19 | 1999-05-04 | Third Milennium Engineering, Llc | Compression locking vertebral body screw, staple, and rod assembly |
US5947969A (en) | 1998-10-19 | 1999-09-07 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Rotatable locking vertebral body screw, staple and rod assembly |
US6193720B1 (en) | 1998-11-30 | 2001-02-27 | Depuy Orthopaedics, Inc. | Cervical spine stabilization method and system |
US6050997A (en) | 1999-01-25 | 2000-04-18 | Mullane; Thomas S. | Spinal fixation system |
KR100324698B1 (en) | 1999-01-30 | 2002-02-27 | 구자교 | Spine fixing device |
US6302888B1 (en) | 1999-03-19 | 2001-10-16 | Interpore Cross International | Locking dovetail and self-limiting set screw assembly for a spinal stabilization member |
EP1164954B1 (en) | 1999-03-30 | 2006-12-06 | Howmedica Osteonics Corp. | Apparatus for spinal stabilization |
US6183473B1 (en) | 1999-04-21 | 2001-02-06 | Richard B Ashman | Variable angle connection assembly for a spinal implant system |
US6299613B1 (en) | 1999-04-23 | 2001-10-09 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Method for the correction of spinal deformities through vertebral body tethering without fusion |
US6210413B1 (en) | 1999-04-23 | 2001-04-03 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Connecting apparatus using shape-memory technology |
US6273888B1 (en) | 1999-05-28 | 2001-08-14 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Device and method for selectively preventing the locking of a shape-memory alloy coupling system |
US6254602B1 (en) | 1999-05-28 | 2001-07-03 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Advanced coupling device using shape-memory technology |
US6547789B1 (en) | 1999-07-02 | 2003-04-15 | Sulzer Orthopedics Ltd. | Holding apparatus for the spinal column |
DE19936286C2 (en) | 1999-08-02 | 2002-01-17 | Lutz Biedermann | bone screw |
ATE243472T1 (en) | 1999-08-14 | 2003-07-15 | Aesculap Ag & Co Kg | BONE SCREW |
US7553329B2 (en) | 1999-08-18 | 2009-06-30 | Intrinsic Therapeutics, Inc. | Stabilized intervertebral disc barrier |
US6883520B2 (en) | 1999-08-18 | 2005-04-26 | Intrinsic Therapeutics, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for dynamically stable spinal implant |
US6280442B1 (en) | 1999-09-01 | 2001-08-28 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Multi-axial bone screw assembly |
DE19944120B4 (en) | 1999-09-15 | 2008-08-28 | Ulrich Gmbh & Co. Kg | Bone screw for variable angle connection with a side member |
WO2001022893A1 (en) | 1999-09-27 | 2001-04-05 | Blackstone Medical, Inc. | A surgical screw system and related methods |
US6554834B1 (en) | 1999-10-07 | 2003-04-29 | Stryker Spine | Slotted head pedicle screw assembly |
US6217578B1 (en) | 1999-10-19 | 2001-04-17 | Stryker Spine S.A. | Spinal cross connector |
ES2298675T3 (en) | 1999-10-22 | 2008-05-16 | Archus Orthopedics Inc. | DEVICES OF FACETARY ARTROPLASTY. |
US6811567B2 (en) | 1999-10-22 | 2004-11-02 | Archus Orthopedics Inc. | Facet arthroplasty devices and methods |
US8187303B2 (en) | 2004-04-22 | 2012-05-29 | Gmedelaware 2 Llc | Anti-rotation fixation element for spinal prostheses |
US7674293B2 (en) | 2004-04-22 | 2010-03-09 | Facet Solutions, Inc. | Crossbar spinal prosthesis having a modular design and related implantation methods |
US20050261770A1 (en) | 2004-04-22 | 2005-11-24 | Kuiper Mark K | Crossbar spinal prosthesis having a modular design and related implantation methods |
DE10005385A1 (en) | 2000-02-07 | 2001-08-09 | Ulrich Gmbh & Co Kg | Pedicle screw |
US7662173B2 (en) | 2000-02-16 | 2010-02-16 | Transl, Inc. | Spinal mobility preservation apparatus |
US6248106B1 (en) | 2000-02-25 | 2001-06-19 | Bret Ferree | Cross-coupled vertebral stabilizers |
US6293949B1 (en) | 2000-03-01 | 2001-09-25 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Superelastic spinal stabilization system and method |
KR200200582Y1 (en) | 2000-03-15 | 2000-10-16 | 최길운 | Prosthesis for connecting bone |
US6309391B1 (en) | 2000-03-15 | 2001-10-30 | Sdgi Holding, Inc. | Multidirectional pivoting bone screw and fixation system |
US6565566B1 (en) | 2000-03-22 | 2003-05-20 | Spinal Concepts, Inc. | Sacral screw assembly and method |
US6805695B2 (en) | 2000-04-04 | 2004-10-19 | Spinalabs, Llc | Devices and methods for annular repair of intervertebral discs |
JP2001309923A (en) | 2000-04-28 | 2001-11-06 | Robert Reed Shokai Co Ltd | System supporting spinal rod and connection parts to be used therefor |
US6645207B2 (en) | 2000-05-08 | 2003-11-11 | Robert A. Dixon | Method and apparatus for dynamized spinal stabilization |
US6749614B2 (en) | 2000-06-23 | 2004-06-15 | Vertelink Corporation | Formable orthopedic fixation system with cross linking |
US6482207B1 (en) | 2000-07-13 | 2002-11-19 | Fastenetix, Llc | Efficient assembling modular locking pedicle screw |
EP1174092A3 (en) | 2000-07-22 | 2003-03-26 | Corin Spinal Systems Limited | A pedicle attachment assembly |
FR2812185B1 (en) | 2000-07-25 | 2003-02-28 | Spine Next Sa | SEMI-RIGID CONNECTION PIECE FOR RACHIS STABILIZATION |
US6626905B1 (en) | 2000-08-02 | 2003-09-30 | Sulzer Spine-Tech Inc. | Posterior oblique lumbar arthrodesis |
US6458131B1 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2002-10-01 | Salut, Ltd. | Apparatus and method for reducing spinal deformity |
US20060025771A1 (en) | 2000-08-23 | 2006-02-02 | Jackson Roger P | Helical reverse angle guide and advancement structure with break-off extensions |
US7833250B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-11-16 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw with helically wound capture connection |
US6485491B1 (en) | 2000-09-15 | 2002-11-26 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Posterior fixation system |
US6755829B1 (en) | 2000-09-22 | 2004-06-29 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Lock cap anchor assembly for orthopaedic fixation |
US6620164B2 (en) | 2000-09-22 | 2003-09-16 | Showa Ika Kohgyo Co., Ltd. | Rod for cervical vertebra and connecting system thereof |
US6695845B2 (en) | 2000-10-16 | 2004-02-24 | Robert A Dixon | Method and apparatus utilizing interference fit screw shanks for nonmetallic spinal stabilization |
US6520962B1 (en) | 2000-10-23 | 2003-02-18 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Taper-locked adjustable connector |
DE10055888C1 (en) | 2000-11-10 | 2002-04-25 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Bone screw, has connector rod receiving part with unsymmetrically arranged end bores |
US6656181B2 (en) | 2000-11-22 | 2003-12-02 | Robert A Dixon | Method and device utilizing tapered screw shanks for spinal stabilization |
US6726689B2 (en) | 2002-09-06 | 2004-04-27 | Roger P. Jackson | Helical interlocking mating guide and advancement structure |
US6565605B2 (en) | 2000-12-13 | 2003-05-20 | Medicinelodge, Inc. | Multiple facet joint replacement |
JP4471491B2 (en) | 2000-12-27 | 2010-06-02 | 京セラ株式会社 | Spine correction and fixation device |
EP1219255B1 (en) | 2000-12-27 | 2003-10-15 | BIEDERMANN MOTECH GmbH | Screw for connection to a rod |
US6488681B2 (en) | 2001-01-05 | 2002-12-03 | Stryker Spine S.A. | Pedicle screw assembly |
CA2434455A1 (en) | 2001-01-12 | 2002-07-18 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Polyaxial screw with improved locking |
US6451021B1 (en) | 2001-02-15 | 2002-09-17 | Third Millennium Engineering, Llc | Polyaxial pedicle screw having a rotating locking element |
DE10108965B4 (en) | 2001-02-17 | 2006-02-23 | DePuy Spine Sàrl | bone screw |
US7104991B2 (en) | 2001-02-27 | 2006-09-12 | Robert A Dixon | Method and device for using extended interference fit screw shanks for spinal stabilization |
US6652585B2 (en) | 2001-02-28 | 2003-11-25 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Flexible spine stabilization system |
US7090698B2 (en) | 2001-03-02 | 2006-08-15 | Facet Solutions | Method and apparatus for spine joint replacement |
US7344539B2 (en) | 2001-03-30 | 2008-03-18 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Intervertebral connection system |
US6554832B2 (en) | 2001-04-02 | 2003-04-29 | Endius Incorporated | Polyaxial transverse connector |
DE10116412C1 (en) | 2001-04-02 | 2003-01-16 | Ulrich Gmbh & Co Kg | Implant to be inserted between the vertebral body of the spine |
DK1252865T3 (en) | 2001-04-24 | 2006-03-06 | Co Ligne Ag | Instrumentation to stabilize certain vertebrae in the spine |
US7862587B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2011-01-04 | Jackson Roger P | Dynamic stabilization assemblies, tool set and method |
US6478797B1 (en) | 2001-05-16 | 2002-11-12 | Kamaljit S. Paul | Spinal fixation device |
US20030004511A1 (en) | 2001-06-27 | 2003-01-02 | Ferree Bret A. | Polyaxial pedicle screw system |
FR2827498B1 (en) * | 2001-07-18 | 2004-05-14 | Frederic Fortin | FLEXIBLE VERTEBRAL CONNECTION DEVICE CONSISTING OF PALLIANT ELEMENTS OF THE RACHIS |
FR2827499B1 (en) | 2001-07-20 | 2004-05-07 | Henry Graf | INTERVERTEBRAL LINK DEVICE |
JP4755782B2 (en) | 2001-08-01 | 2011-08-24 | 昭和医科工業株式会社 | Bone implant implant |
FR2829014B1 (en) | 2001-09-03 | 2005-04-08 | Stryker Spine | SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS SYSTEM COMPRISING A SUPPORT SKATE |
US6899714B2 (en) | 2001-10-03 | 2005-05-31 | Vaughan Medical Technologies, Inc. | Vertebral stabilization assembly and method |
US6652526B1 (en) | 2001-10-05 | 2003-11-25 | Ruben P. Arafiles | Spinal stabilization rod fastener |
GB2382304A (en) | 2001-10-10 | 2003-05-28 | Dilip Kumar Sengupta | An assembly for soft stabilisation of vertebral bodies of the spine |
US6623485B2 (en) | 2001-10-17 | 2003-09-23 | Hammill Manufacturing Company | Split ring bone screw for a spinal fixation system |
US6887242B2 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2005-05-03 | Ortho Innovations, Llc | Split ring bone screw for a spinal fixation system |
US6783527B2 (en) | 2001-10-30 | 2004-08-31 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Flexible spinal stabilization system and method |
FR2832620B1 (en) | 2001-11-27 | 2004-01-23 | Eurosurgical | CONNECTOR FOR VERTEBRAL ANCHORAGE SYSTEM |
US6572653B1 (en) | 2001-12-07 | 2003-06-03 | Rush E. Simonson | Vertebral implant adapted for posterior insertion |
FR2833151B1 (en) | 2001-12-12 | 2004-09-17 | Ldr Medical | BONE ANCHORING IMPLANT WITH POLYAXIAL HEAD |
FR2835173B1 (en) | 2002-01-28 | 2004-11-05 | Biomet Merck France | INTERTEPINEOUS VERTEBRAL IMPLANT |
US6932817B2 (en) | 2002-02-01 | 2005-08-23 | Innovative Spinal Design | Polyaxial modular skeletal hook |
FR2836368B1 (en) | 2002-02-25 | 2005-01-14 | Spine Next Sa | SEQUENTIAL LINK DEVICE |
US7530992B2 (en) | 2002-03-27 | 2009-05-12 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Bone anchoring device for stabilising bone segments and seat part of a bone anchoring device |
DE10213855A1 (en) | 2002-03-27 | 2003-10-16 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Bone anchoring device for stabilizing bone segments and receiving part of a bone anchoring device |
US6966910B2 (en) | 2002-04-05 | 2005-11-22 | Stephen Ritland | Dynamic fixation device and method of use |
EP1523279A2 (en) | 2002-04-09 | 2005-04-20 | Neville Alleyne | Bone fixation apparatus |
US6740086B2 (en) * | 2002-04-18 | 2004-05-25 | Spinal Innovations, Llc | Screw and rod fixation assembly and device |
US7048736B2 (en) | 2002-05-17 | 2006-05-23 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Device for fixation of spinous processes |
DE20207851U1 (en) | 2002-05-21 | 2002-10-10 | Metz Stavenhagen Peter | Anchoring element for fastening a rod of a device for setting up a human or animal spine to a vertebral bone |
DE50300788D1 (en) | 2002-05-21 | 2005-08-25 | Spinelab Gmbh Wabern | Elastic stabilization system for spinal columns |
US20040097925A1 (en) | 2002-06-07 | 2004-05-20 | Boehm Frank H. | Cervical spine stabilizing system and method |
US7060066B2 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2006-06-13 | Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research | Spinal fixation support device and methods of using |
US20040015166A1 (en) | 2002-07-22 | 2004-01-22 | Gorek Josef E. | System and method for stabilizing the spine by securing spine stabilization rods in crossed disposition |
FR2842724B1 (en) | 2002-07-23 | 2005-05-27 | Spine Next Sa | VERTEBRAL FASTENING SYSTEM |
US7107091B2 (en) | 2002-07-25 | 2006-09-12 | Orthosoft Inc. | Multiple bone tracking |
US7306603B2 (en) | 2002-08-21 | 2007-12-11 | Innovative Spinal Technologies | Device and method for percutaneous placement of lumbar pedicle screws and connecting rods |
US20040143264A1 (en) * | 2002-08-23 | 2004-07-22 | Mcafee Paul C. | Metal-backed UHMWPE rod sleeve system preserving spinal motion |
US20040049285A1 (en) * | 2002-09-09 | 2004-03-11 | Brian Haas | Duo-fixation prosthetic joints |
FR2844180B1 (en) | 2002-09-11 | 2005-08-05 | Spinevision | CONNECTING ELEMENT FOR THE DYNAMIC STABILIZATION OF A SPINAL FIXING SYSTEM AND SPINAL FASTENING SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH A MEMBER |
JP4047112B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2008-02-13 | 昭和医科工業株式会社 | Rod part fixing structure of vertebra connecting member |
FR2845587B1 (en) | 2002-10-14 | 2005-01-21 | Scient X | DYNAMIC DEVICE FOR INTERVERTEBRAL CONNECTION WITH MULTIDIRECTIONALLY CONTROLLED DEBATMENT |
US20060095035A1 (en) | 2004-11-03 | 2006-05-04 | Jones Robert J | Instruments and methods for reduction of vertebral bodies |
US9539012B2 (en) | 2002-10-30 | 2017-01-10 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal stabilization systems with quick-connect sleeve assemblies for use in surgical procedures |
US7250052B2 (en) | 2002-10-30 | 2007-07-31 | Abbott Spine Inc. | Spinal stabilization systems and methods |
US20040147928A1 (en) | 2002-10-30 | 2004-07-29 | Landry Michael E. | Spinal stabilization system using flexible members |
FR2847152B1 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2005-02-18 | Eurosurgical | VERTEBRAL ANCHORING DEVICE AND ITS LOCKING DEVICE ON A POLY AXIAL SCREW |
US20040111088A1 (en) | 2002-12-06 | 2004-06-10 | Picetti George D. | Multi-rod bone attachment member |
FR2848408B1 (en) | 2002-12-17 | 2005-08-19 | Vitatech | DEVICE WITH ANTERIOR PLATE FOR MAINTAINING THE RACHIS |
US7101398B2 (en) | 2002-12-31 | 2006-09-05 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Prosthetic facet joint ligament |
US6843791B2 (en) | 2003-01-10 | 2005-01-18 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Locking cap assembly for spinal fixation instrumentation |
US7104992B2 (en) | 2003-01-14 | 2006-09-12 | Ebi, L.P. | Spinal fixation system |
US20040158247A1 (en) | 2003-02-07 | 2004-08-12 | Arthit Sitiso | Polyaxial pedicle screw system |
US7282064B2 (en) | 2003-02-11 | 2007-10-16 | Spinefrontier Lls | Apparatus and method for connecting spinal vertebrae |
US20040162560A1 (en) | 2003-02-19 | 2004-08-19 | Raynor Donald E. | Implant device including threaded locking mechanism |
JP4598760B2 (en) | 2003-02-25 | 2010-12-15 | リットランド、ステファン | ADJUSTING ROD AND CONNECTOR DEVICE, AND ITS USING METHOD |
IL155222A0 (en) | 2003-04-03 | 2003-11-23 | Hadasit Med Res Service | An implant for treating idiopathic scoliosis and a method for using the same |
US20060200128A1 (en) | 2003-04-04 | 2006-09-07 | Richard Mueller | Bone anchor |
US6964666B2 (en) | 2003-04-09 | 2005-11-15 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw locking mechanism |
US6716214B1 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2004-04-06 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw with spline capture connection |
US7473267B2 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2009-01-06 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | System and method for minimally invasive posterior fixation |
US20050171543A1 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2005-08-04 | Timm Jens P. | Spine stabilization systems and associated devices, assemblies and methods |
US20050177164A1 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2005-08-11 | Carmen Walters | Pedicle screw devices, systems and methods having a preloaded set screw |
US7635379B2 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2009-12-22 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Pedicle screw assembly with bearing surfaces |
US20050182401A1 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2005-08-18 | Timm Jens P. | Systems and methods for spine stabilization including a dynamic junction |
KR100859827B1 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2008-09-23 | 예일 유니버시티 | Dynamic spine stabilizer |
US8652175B2 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2014-02-18 | Rachiotek, Llc | Surgical implant devices and systems including a sheath member |
US7615068B2 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2009-11-10 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Mounting mechanisms for pedicle screws and related assemblies |
WO2004098453A2 (en) | 2003-05-06 | 2004-11-18 | Triage Medical, Inc. | Proximal anchors for bone fixation system |
DE10320417A1 (en) | 2003-05-07 | 2004-12-02 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Dynamic anchoring device and dynamic stabilization device for bones, in particular for vertebrae, with such an anchoring device |
US7377923B2 (en) | 2003-05-22 | 2008-05-27 | Alphatec Spine, Inc. | Variable angle spinal screw assembly |
US6986771B2 (en) | 2003-05-23 | 2006-01-17 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Spine stabilization system |
US8137386B2 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2012-03-20 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw apparatus |
US8366753B2 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2013-02-05 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw assembly with fixed retaining structure |
WO2005000137A1 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2005-01-06 | Medicrea Technologies | Vertebral osteosynthesis equipment |
US7309355B2 (en) * | 2003-06-27 | 2007-12-18 | Depuy Mitek, Inc. | Flexible tibial sheath |
US7087057B2 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2006-08-08 | Depuy Acromed, Inc. | Polyaxial bone screw |
US6945974B2 (en) | 2003-07-07 | 2005-09-20 | Aesculap Inc. | Spinal stabilization implant and method of application |
US7875060B2 (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2011-01-25 | Spinefrontier, LLS | Multi-axial screw with a spherical landing |
US7763052B2 (en) | 2003-12-05 | 2010-07-27 | N Spine, Inc. | Method and apparatus for flexible fixation of a spine |
US8979900B2 (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2015-03-17 | DePuy Synthes Products, LLC | Spinal stabilization device |
US7815665B2 (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2010-10-19 | N Spine, Inc. | Adjustable spinal stabilization system |
US20050203513A1 (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2005-09-15 | Tae-Ahn Jahng | Spinal stabilization device |
US7137985B2 (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2006-11-21 | N Spine, Inc. | Marking and guidance method and system for flexible fixation of a spine |
FR2860138A1 (en) | 2003-09-26 | 2005-04-01 | Stryker Spine | ASSEMBLY AND METHOD OF FIXING BONES |
US20050090822A1 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2005-04-28 | Dipoto Gene | Methods and apparatus for stabilizing the spine through an access device |
US20050080415A1 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2005-04-14 | Keyer Thomas R. | Polyaxial bone anchor and method of spinal fixation |
US7967826B2 (en) | 2003-10-21 | 2011-06-28 | Theken Spine, Llc | Connector transfer tool for internal structure stabilization systems |
US7618442B2 (en) | 2003-10-21 | 2009-11-17 | Theken Spine, Llc | Implant assembly and method for use in an internal structure stabilization system |
US7588588B2 (en) | 2003-10-21 | 2009-09-15 | Innovative Spinal Technologies | System and method for stabilizing of internal structures |
ATE333841T1 (en) | 2003-10-31 | 2006-08-15 | Spinelab Ag | LOCKING DEVICE FOR PEDICLE SCREWS FOR FIXING ELASTIC ROD ELEMENTS |
US20050096652A1 (en) | 2003-10-31 | 2005-05-05 | Burton Charles V. | Integral flexible spine stabilization device and method |
ATE363250T1 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2007-06-15 | Impliant Ltd | SPINAL PROSTHESIS |
US7083622B2 (en) | 2003-11-10 | 2006-08-01 | Simonson Peter M | Artificial facet joint and method |
US7862586B2 (en) | 2003-11-25 | 2011-01-04 | Life Spine, Inc. | Spinal stabilization systems |
US7553320B2 (en) | 2003-12-10 | 2009-06-30 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Method and apparatus for replacing the function of facet joints |
US20050131406A1 (en) | 2003-12-15 | 2005-06-16 | Archus Orthopedics, Inc. | Polyaxial adjustment of facet joint prostheses |
US7806914B2 (en) | 2003-12-31 | 2010-10-05 | Spine Wave, Inc. | Dynamic spinal stabilization system |
US7678137B2 (en) | 2004-01-13 | 2010-03-16 | Life Spine, Inc. | Pedicle screw constructs for spine fixation systems |
US7815664B2 (en) | 2005-01-04 | 2010-10-19 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Systems and methods for spinal stabilization with flexible elements |
US7789896B2 (en) | 2005-02-22 | 2010-09-07 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw assembly |
US8152810B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2012-04-10 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool set and method |
US7862594B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2011-01-04 | Custom Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial pedicle screw assembly |
DE102004010844A1 (en) | 2004-03-05 | 2005-10-06 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Stabilizing device for the dynamic stabilization of vertebrae or bones and rod-shaped element for such a stabilization device |
US7214227B2 (en) | 2004-03-22 | 2007-05-08 | Innovative Spinal Technologies | Closure member for a medical implant device |
US7717939B2 (en) | 2004-03-31 | 2010-05-18 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Rod attachment for head to head cross connector |
US7503924B2 (en) | 2004-04-08 | 2009-03-17 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Polyaxial screw |
US8475495B2 (en) | 2004-04-08 | 2013-07-02 | Globus Medical | Polyaxial screw |
US20050228382A1 (en) | 2004-04-12 | 2005-10-13 | Marc Richelsoph | Screw and rod fixation assembly and device |
US7648520B2 (en) | 2004-04-16 | 2010-01-19 | Kyphon Sarl | Pedicle screw assembly |
US7833256B2 (en) | 2004-04-16 | 2010-11-16 | Biedermann Motech Gmbh | Elastic element for the use in a stabilization device for bones and vertebrae and method for the manufacture of such elastic element |
US7811311B2 (en) | 2004-12-30 | 2010-10-12 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Screw with deployable interlaced dual rods |
US7051451B2 (en) | 2004-04-22 | 2006-05-30 | Archus Orthopedics, Inc. | Facet joint prosthesis measurement and implant tools |
US20050267470A1 (en) | 2004-05-13 | 2005-12-01 | Mcbride Duncan Q | Spinal stabilization system to flexibly connect vertebrae |
FR2870711B1 (en) | 2004-05-26 | 2006-09-01 | Sdgi Holdings Inc | DEVICE FOR CONNECTING THE ROD OF A SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE TO A VERTEBRA, AND A OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE COMPRISING SAME |
US7935135B2 (en) | 2004-06-09 | 2011-05-03 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal fixation device |
US7559943B2 (en) | 2004-06-09 | 2009-07-14 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal fixation device with internal drive structure |
US8858599B2 (en) | 2004-06-09 | 2014-10-14 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Systems and methods for flexible spinal stabilization |
US7857834B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2010-12-28 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal implant fixation assembly |
US7731736B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2010-06-08 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Fastening system for spinal stabilization system |
WO2006002359A2 (en) | 2004-06-23 | 2006-01-05 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Spinal stabilization devices and systems |
US7871413B2 (en) | 2004-07-21 | 2011-01-18 | Solco Biomedical Co., Ltd. | Pedicle screw and operating device thereof |
US7658753B2 (en) | 2004-08-03 | 2010-02-09 | K Spine, Inc. | Device and method for correcting a spinal deformity |
WO2006017641A2 (en) | 2004-08-03 | 2006-02-16 | Vertech Innovations, L.L.C. | Spinous process reinforcement device and method |
TW200612860A (en) | 2004-08-09 | 2006-05-01 | Innovative Spinal Technologies | System and method for dynamic skeletal stabilization |
US7766945B2 (en) | 2004-08-10 | 2010-08-03 | Lanx, Inc. | Screw and rod fixation system |
WO2006016371A2 (en) | 2004-08-13 | 2006-02-16 | Mazor Surgical Technologies Ltd | Minimally invasive spinal fusion |
US20060052783A1 (en) | 2004-08-17 | 2006-03-09 | Dant Jack A | Polyaxial device for spine stabilization during osteosynthesis |
US20060052784A1 (en) | 2004-08-17 | 2006-03-09 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial device for spine stabilization during osteosynthesis |
US20060058787A1 (en) | 2004-08-24 | 2006-03-16 | Stryker Spine | Spinal implant assembly |
US20060058788A1 (en) | 2004-08-27 | 2006-03-16 | Hammer Michael A | Multi-axial connection system |
BRPI0419057A (en) | 2004-09-22 | 2007-12-11 | Kyung-Woo Park | spinal fixation |
US8092496B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2012-01-10 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Methods and devices for posterior stabilization |
US20060084978A1 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2006-04-20 | Mokhtar Mourad B | Spinal fixation system and method |
US20060129148A1 (en) | 2004-10-01 | 2006-06-15 | Simmons Edward D | Screw sleeve made of polyetheretherketone (PEEK) for augmentation of bone screw insertion in osteoporotic or revision lumbar spine instrumentation |
US7794477B2 (en) | 2004-10-05 | 2010-09-14 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Spinal implants and methods with extended multi-axial anchor assemblies |
US7722654B2 (en) | 2004-10-05 | 2010-05-25 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Spinal implants with multi-axial anchor assembly and methods |
US7572280B2 (en) | 2004-10-05 | 2009-08-11 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Multi-axial anchor assemblies for spinal implants and methods |
US8123807B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2012-02-28 | Vertiflex, Inc. | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US8162985B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2012-04-24 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US8012207B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2011-09-06 | Vertiflex, Inc. | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US8317864B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2012-11-27 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US8167944B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2012-05-01 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US8409282B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2013-04-02 | Vertiflex, Inc. | Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine |
US9023084B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2015-05-05 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine |
EP1814473B1 (en) | 2004-10-25 | 2012-12-05 | X-spine Systems, Inc. | Pedicle screw systems |
WO2006047707A2 (en) | 2004-10-25 | 2006-05-04 | Alphaspine, Inc. | Pedicle screw systems and methods of assembling/installing the same |
US7691129B2 (en) | 2004-10-27 | 2010-04-06 | Felix Brent A | Spinal stabilizing system |
US7513905B2 (en) | 2004-11-03 | 2009-04-07 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw |
US7572279B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2009-08-11 | Jackson Roger P | Polyaxial bone screw with discontinuous helically wound capture connection |
AU2005309869B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2009-09-10 | Roger P. Jackson | Polyaxial bone screw with multi-part shank retainer |
WO2006057837A1 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2006-06-01 | Jackson Roger P | Spinal fixation tool attachment structure |
US20060149380A1 (en) | 2004-12-01 | 2006-07-06 | Lotz Jeffrey C | Systems, devices and methods for treatment of intervertebral disorders |
US7811288B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2010-10-12 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Instruments and methods for adjusting separation distance of vertebral bodies with a minimally invasive spinal stabilization procedure |
US7578833B2 (en) | 2004-12-13 | 2009-08-25 | Dr. Robert S. Bray, Jr. | Bone fastener assembly for bone retention apparatus |
US8066749B2 (en) | 2004-12-13 | 2011-11-29 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Implant for stabilizing a bone graft during spinal fusion |
US7306606B2 (en) | 2004-12-15 | 2007-12-11 | Orthopaedic Innovations, Inc. | Multi-axial bone screw mechanism |
EP1719468A1 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2006-11-08 | Zimmer GmbH | Intervertebral stabilization system |
US20060149242A1 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2006-07-06 | Gary Kraus | Spinal stabilization systems supplemented with diagnostically opaque materials |
US7704270B2 (en) | 2004-12-22 | 2010-04-27 | Stryker Spine | Variable offset connectors and bone fixation methods |
FR2880256B1 (en) | 2004-12-30 | 2007-04-06 | Neuro France Implants Sarl | SYSTEM OF VERTEBRAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS |
US20060229613A1 (en) | 2004-12-31 | 2006-10-12 | Timm Jens P | Sheath assembly for spinal stabilization device |
US7445627B2 (en) | 2005-01-31 | 2008-11-04 | Alpinespine, Llc | Polyaxial pedicle screw assembly |
US20070088359A1 (en) | 2005-02-07 | 2007-04-19 | Woods Richard W | Universal dynamic spine stabilization device and method of use |
US7294129B2 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2007-11-13 | Ebi, L.P. | Spinal fixation device and associated method |
BRPI0607139A2 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2009-08-11 | M S Abdou | bone fixation set |
US7604654B2 (en) | 2005-02-22 | 2009-10-20 | Stryker Spine | Apparatus and method for dynamic vertebral stabilization |
US7594924B2 (en) | 2005-03-03 | 2009-09-29 | Accelerated Innovation, Llc | Spinal stabilization using bone anchor seat and cross coupling with improved locking feature |
WO2006096351A1 (en) | 2005-03-03 | 2006-09-14 | Accelerated Innovation, Llc | Spinal stabilization using bone anchor and anchor seat with tangential locking feature |
US7951172B2 (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2011-05-31 | Depuy Spine Sarl | Constrained motion bone screw assembly |
US20060229607A1 (en) | 2005-03-16 | 2006-10-12 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Systems, kits and methods for treatment of the spinal column using elongate support members |
US7338491B2 (en) | 2005-03-22 | 2008-03-04 | Spinefrontier Inc | Spinal fixation locking mechanism |
CA2602009A1 (en) | 2005-03-23 | 2006-09-28 | Alpinespine Llc | Percutaneous pedicle screw assembly |
KR20080031155A (en) | 2005-03-25 | 2008-04-08 | 블랙스톤 메디칼, 인크. | Multi-axial connection system |
US20060241757A1 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2006-10-26 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of manufacturing same |
US20060235385A1 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2006-10-19 | Dale Whipple | Low profile polyaxial screw |
EP1865862B1 (en) | 2005-04-04 | 2016-08-24 | Zimmer GmbH | Pedicle screw |
MX2007012493A (en) | 2005-04-08 | 2008-03-14 | Paradigm Spine Llc | Interspinous vertebral and lumbosacral stabilization devices and methods of use. |
US7708762B2 (en) | 2005-04-08 | 2010-05-04 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Systems, devices and methods for stabilization of the spinal column |
US7794481B2 (en) | 2005-04-22 | 2010-09-14 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Force limiting coupling assemblies for spinal implants |
US20060247631A1 (en) | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-02 | Ahn Sae Y | Spinal pedicle screw assembly |
US7850715B2 (en) | 2005-04-29 | 2010-12-14 | Warsaw Orthopedic Inc. | Orthopedic implant apparatus |
US7585312B2 (en) | 2005-04-29 | 2009-09-08 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Spinal stabilization apparatus and method |
US20060247623A1 (en) | 2005-04-29 | 2006-11-02 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Local delivery of an active agent from an orthopedic implant |
US20060264937A1 (en) | 2005-05-04 | 2006-11-23 | White Patrick M | Mobile spine stabilization device |
US20060264935A1 (en) | 2005-05-04 | 2006-11-23 | White Patrick M | Orthopedic stabilization device |
US7828830B2 (en) | 2005-05-12 | 2010-11-09 | Lanx, Inc. | Dynamic spinal stabilization |
US7951169B2 (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2011-05-31 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Posterior dynamic stabilization cross connectors |
US7799060B2 (en) | 2005-06-20 | 2010-09-21 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Multi-directional spinal stabilization systems and methods |
US7828825B2 (en) | 2005-06-20 | 2010-11-09 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Multi-level multi-functional spinal stabilization systems and methods |
US20070016190A1 (en) | 2005-07-14 | 2007-01-18 | Medical Device Concepts Llc | Dynamic spinal stabilization system |
US7811309B2 (en) | 2005-07-26 | 2010-10-12 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Dynamic spine stabilization device with travel-limiting functionality |
US7699875B2 (en) * | 2006-04-17 | 2010-04-20 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Spinal stabilization device with weld cap |
US7713288B2 (en) | 2005-08-03 | 2010-05-11 | Applied Spine Technologies, Inc. | Spring junction and assembly methods for spinal device |
US7625394B2 (en) | 2005-08-05 | 2009-12-01 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Coupling assemblies for spinal implants |
EP1933741A2 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2008-06-25 | Innovative Spinal Technologies | Alignment instrument for dynamic spinal stabilization systems |
CH705709B1 (en) | 2005-08-29 | 2013-05-15 | Bird Biedermann Ag | Spinal implant. |
DE502006002049D1 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2008-12-24 | Bird Biedermann Ag | Dynamic clamping device for spinal implant |
US20070083200A1 (en) | 2005-09-23 | 2007-04-12 | Gittings Darin C | Spinal stabilization systems and methods |
US7879074B2 (en) | 2005-09-27 | 2011-02-01 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Posterior dynamic stabilization systems and methods |
JP2009512465A (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2009-03-26 | パラダイム・スパイン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー | Hinge multi-axis screw and method of using the same |
US7857833B2 (en) | 2005-10-06 | 2010-12-28 | Abdou M Samy | Devices and methods for inter-vertebral orthopedic device placement |
US20070093814A1 (en) | 2005-10-11 | 2007-04-26 | Callahan Ronald Ii | Dynamic spinal stabilization systems |
US7862591B2 (en) | 2005-11-10 | 2011-01-04 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same |
US8221467B2 (en) | 2005-11-18 | 2012-07-17 | Life Spine, Inc. | Dynamic spinal stabilization device and systems |
US7819899B2 (en) | 2006-01-03 | 2010-10-26 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Instrument for pedicle screw adhesive materials |
US7918792B2 (en) | 2006-01-04 | 2011-04-05 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Surgical retractor for use with minimally invasive spinal stabilization systems and methods of minimally invasive surgery |
US8029545B2 (en) | 2006-02-07 | 2011-10-04 | Warsaw Orthopedic Inc. | Articulating connecting member and anchor systems for spinal stabilization |
US7520879B2 (en) | 2006-02-07 | 2009-04-21 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Surgical instruments and techniques for percutaneous placement of spinal stabilization elements |
US20070233068A1 (en) | 2006-02-22 | 2007-10-04 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Intervertebral prosthetic assembly for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same |
US20070233090A1 (en) | 2006-02-23 | 2007-10-04 | Naifeh Bill R | Aligning cross-connector |
US20070233091A1 (en) | 2006-02-23 | 2007-10-04 | Naifeh Bill R | Multi-level spherical linkage implant system |
US8088148B2 (en) | 2006-02-24 | 2012-01-03 | Medical Design, LLC | Dynamic/static facet fixation device and method |
US8262696B2 (en) | 2006-02-24 | 2012-09-11 | Medical Design, LLC | Multilevel facet/laminar fixation system |
US8470008B2 (en) | 2006-03-01 | 2013-06-25 | Warsaw Othropedic, Inc. | Modular fastener assemblies for spinal stabilization systems and methods |
US7927358B2 (en) | 2006-03-07 | 2011-04-19 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal stabilization device |
US7842072B2 (en) | 2006-03-16 | 2010-11-30 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Spinal fixation device with variable stiffness |
US8025681B2 (en) | 2006-03-29 | 2011-09-27 | Theken Spine, Llc | Dynamic motion spinal stabilization system |
US20070288012A1 (en) | 2006-04-21 | 2007-12-13 | Dennis Colleran | Dynamic motion spinal stabilization system and device |
US8435267B2 (en) | 2006-04-24 | 2013-05-07 | Spinefrontier Inc | Spine fixation method and apparatus |
US7563274B2 (en) | 2006-04-25 | 2009-07-21 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Surgical instruments and techniques for controlling spinal motion segments with positioning of spinal stabilization elements |
US7785350B2 (en) | 2006-05-08 | 2010-08-31 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Load bearing flexible spinal connecting element |
US8012179B2 (en) | 2006-05-08 | 2011-09-06 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Dynamic spinal stabilization members and methods |
US20070270838A1 (en) | 2006-05-08 | 2007-11-22 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Dynamic spinal stabilization device with dampener |
US20070288009A1 (en) | 2006-06-08 | 2007-12-13 | Steven Brown | Dynamic spinal stabilization device |
US7927356B2 (en) | 2006-07-07 | 2011-04-19 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Dynamic constructs for spinal stabilization |
US7967847B2 (en) | 2006-07-24 | 2011-06-28 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Spinal stabilization and reconstruction with fusion rods |
US20080033433A1 (en) | 2006-08-01 | 2008-02-07 | Dante Implicito | Dynamic spinal stabilization device |
US7806913B2 (en) | 2006-08-16 | 2010-10-05 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Modular multi-level spine stabilization system and method |
US9526525B2 (en) | 2006-08-22 | 2016-12-27 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Percutaneous system for dynamic spinal stabilization |
US20080065073A1 (en) | 2006-09-08 | 2008-03-13 | Michael Perriello | Offset dynamic motion spinal stabilization system |
US8425601B2 (en) | 2006-09-11 | 2013-04-23 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Spinal stabilization devices and methods of use |
WO2008034130A2 (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2008-03-20 | Alpinespine Llc | Dynamic pedicle screw system |
US7875059B2 (en) * | 2007-01-18 | 2011-01-25 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Variable stiffness support members |
US8052722B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2011-11-08 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Dual deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
-
2008
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,467 patent/US8052722B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,411 patent/US7985243B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,475 patent/US7963978B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,454 patent/US8057514B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,457 patent/US8070776B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,395 patent/US8070775B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2008-05-30 US US12/130,423 patent/US8048113B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2011
- 2011-09-12 US US13/230,337 patent/US20120046696A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7163538B2 (en) * | 2002-02-13 | 2007-01-16 | Cross Medical Products, Inc. | Posterior rod system |
US7335201B2 (en) * | 2003-09-26 | 2008-02-26 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial bone screw with torqueless fastening |
US20050143737A1 (en) * | 2003-12-31 | 2005-06-30 | John Pafford | Dynamic spinal stabilization system |
US7819902B2 (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2010-10-26 | Custom Spine, Inc. | Medialised rod pedicle screw assembly |
US20060052786A1 (en) * | 2004-08-17 | 2006-03-09 | Zimmer Spine, Inc. | Polyaxial device for spine stabilization during osteosynthesis |
US8048121B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2011-11-01 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Spine implant with a defelction rod system anchored to a bone anchor and method |
US8298267B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2012-10-30 | Spartek Medical, Inc. | Spine implant with a deflection rod system including a deflection limiting shield associated with a bone screw and method |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10603091B2 (en) | 2014-02-24 | 2020-03-31 | Curtin University Of Technology | Fastener |
US10149702B2 (en) | 2015-01-12 | 2018-12-11 | Imds Llc | Polyaxial screw and rod system |
US10729480B2 (en) | 2016-03-18 | 2020-08-04 | Curtin University | Expandable fastener for orthopaedic applications |
US11944452B2 (en) | 2017-03-10 | 2024-04-02 | University Of Washington | Methods and systems to measure and evaluate stability of medical implants |
WO2022187080A1 (en) * | 2021-03-01 | 2022-09-09 | University Of Washington | Methods and devices to measure angular stiffness of dental and medical implants |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20080306532A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US20080306533A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US20080306531A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US8057514B2 (en) | 2011-11-15 |
US8070776B2 (en) | 2011-12-06 |
US7963978B2 (en) | 2011-06-21 |
US20080306535A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US8048113B2 (en) | 2011-11-01 |
US20080306534A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US8052722B2 (en) | 2011-11-08 |
US8070775B2 (en) | 2011-12-06 |
US20080306529A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US20080306530A1 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
US7985243B2 (en) | 2011-07-26 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8057514B2 (en) | Deflection rod system dimensioned for deflection to a load characteristic for dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method | |
US8105359B2 (en) | Deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method | |
US8070774B2 (en) | Reinforced bone anchor for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method | |
WO2008151097A1 (en) | A deflection rod system for a dynamic stabilization and motion preservation spinal implantation system and method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |